A Travel Into The Korean Culture: 2012 Korean Festival In Houston Essay College Essay Help

One of the most vivid and memorable events in the Korean culture, the Korean Festival in Houston makes one dive into the Korean culture and understand the essence of the Korean dances. Although the process of globalization shapes the Korean culture a lot, the dance tradition manages to remain the same, with only a few elements borrowed from the Western style.

The Korean Festival in Houston is a perfect reason to analyze the impact of the Western culture on the Korean dance, considering such essential factors as gender, modernity, empire, environmental concerns and globalization, much closer than ever.

The first thing that comes to one’s mind when watching the 2012 Houston concert (ArirangDanceGroup, 2012 Houston Festival) is that it is completely unique, which seems incredible, given that the event takes place in the heart of America.

Indeed, how can a group of people so detached from its native land set such typically Korean performance? The answer is, however, rather simple. Culture is far not as fragile as people think it is, and it takes much more conscious effort to make to disintegrate; in the case with the Koreans in the USA, migration is an obvious obstacle, yet this obstacle is rather easy to overcome.

As Appadurai explains, “The story of mass migration (voluntary and forced) is hardly a new feature of human history” (Appadurai 4); thus, national culture must have become quite immune to the outer impact (Salih). Hence, the fear that the process of globalization is likely to kill the national culture and that “genuine humanism can degenerate into jingoism and false patriotism” (Said xxi) is less than reasonable – once there are at least a few people who can relate to a certain culture, it will never die, which the concert certifies.

On the one hand, living in a foreign country does make the culture more vulnerable to the impact of globalization. As Mahfouz explains, the introduction of a more influential culture affects the inferior one in the most negative way “Everything has changed!” (Mahfouz 3). However, such events as the Farmer’s Dance (ArirangDanceGroup) claim the opposite. Their authenticity does not leave any shadow of the doubt that Korean culture can survive even on the American continent.

Spawning from the issue of national identity raised in the paragraph above, the idea of empire and its gradual decay can also be traced in the elements of the concert. On the one hand, the concert makes it obvious that Korea has established its own culture against all the odds and the influence of the American culture; on the other hand, it is still clear that, unlike elements of culture, the principles of community structure are not going to stay within the American diaspora for too long. As Said explains,

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Every single empire in its official discourse has said that it is not like all the others, that its circumstances are special, that it has a mission to enlighten, civilize, bring order and democracy, and that it uses force only as a last resort. (xvi)

Herein lies the fallacy of each empire. Relying on its own uniqueness, it falls apart once its people are out of the native land. However, it is still clear that the Korean national dances keep the flair of the empire (Appadurai).

For instance, in 2012 Houston Festival, one can see distinctly that the dancers wear the traditional clothes; moreover, the rhythm of the drums, which sets the mood for the rest of the concert since the very beginning of the show, also creates the impression of a very strong community and a nation of impressive power and impact performing the dance. Hence, the spirit of the Korean empire us still in the air, though slightly washed away by the sands of time.

The concert also makes one thing of gender issues in Korea. Performed mostly by women, yet sounding rather bellicose, the concert displays rather feministic mood. The latter, however, is rather unusual for the Korean culture, since the spirit of a female guru is the most valid attempt at feminism in the modern Korean literature (Ghosh).

The last, but not the least, the environmental issue must be mentioned. Addressed in the performances in a rather subtle way, the issue seems to have become one of the top priorities for most countries in the present-day world, and Korea is no exception for that.

Though Appaderrai claims that “More people than ever before seem to imagine routinely the possibility that they or their children will live and work in the places other than they were born” (Appaderrai 175), such elements of the Korean concert as bright colors of the costumes, which are supposed to symbolize the colors of nature serve as a cautious reminder of this possibility.

Therefore, it seems that, slightly influenced by the process of globalization, the Korean culture still continues to develop in its own unique way. Keeping to the traditional motives and referring to the elements of the Korean culture, the modern dances also seem to incorporate certain features of the Western civilization, which can be considered as a positive trend.

We will write a custom Essay on A Travel into the Korean Culture: 2012 Korean Festival in Houston specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, it is important to make certain that globalization contributes to the culture fusion, yet does not make distinct feature of the Korean culture fade into the background. Once maintaining the balance between the Korean dance traditions and the world legacy, the Koreans will develop their culture to reach a completely new point.

Works Cited Appadurai, Arjun. “Here and Now.” The Visual Culture Reader. Ed. Nicolas Mirzoeff. New York, NY: Routledge. 2002. 173-179. Print.

Appadurai, Arjun. Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization. Volume 1. Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press. 1996. Print.

ArirangDanceGroup. “Farmer’s Dance.” YouTube, 4 Nov. 2012. Web.

ArirangDanceGroup. “2012 Houston Festival –Nan Ta Dance.” YouTube, 4 Nov. 2012. Web.

ArirangDanceGroup. “2012 Korean Festival Houston – Sword Dance.” YouTube, 4 Nov. 2012. Web.

Ghosh, Amitav. Sea of Poppies. New Delhi, N: Penguin Books India. 2009. Print.

Mahfouz, Naguib. Midaq Alley. n.d. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on A Travel into the Korean Culture: 2012 Korean Festival in Houston by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Said, Edward. Orientalism. London, UK: Penguin. 1977. Print.

Salih, Tayeb. Seasons of Migration to the North. Oxford, UK: Heinemann Educational Publishers. 1991. Print.


Socio-Cultural Effects of Tourism Report (Assessment) cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Bali Island

Petra in Jordan




Introduction Tourists affect the host countries in socio-cultural ways. They affect the values of the values, family structure and relationships, behaviour, art forms, community organizations, traditional ceremonies and lifestyle. The socio-cultural effects came about due to host-tourist interaction when the tourist is purchasing a product, exchanging ideas and information and when socializing at different locations.

Bali Island A recent article published in the Guardian, showed the huge influence tourists have on the social life of the residents. Bali, one of the most beautiful locations in the Sundra islands has been facing a high increase in tourism in the recent years. They have gained financially however the authorities are noting that they are paying a high price for these financial gains.

Apart from the environment degradation as the investors build hotels on the land and dispose waste irresponsible, the culture and religion activities of the island have been adversely affected (Philip, 2012).The Balinese used to be people who are deeply entrenched in their culture, especially the observance of religious rituals.

They would spend a significant amount of time in the temples. However, this has reduced as people concentrate on making money and interacting with the tourists. If the youths do not attend daily rituals, they are required to pay some money to the village. They are fed up with religious meetings and do not want to pay any money either.

The use of the Balinese language is also decreasing as the people use more of the official language of Indonesia. The level of art engagement of the people has also been affected. The music ensembles are dying in the region. The people are not noticing the change in their culture since their living standards have improved and they are better off economically.

Petra in Jordan Jordan has also been affected socially and culturally by the tourist activities in the region. It is located in the Middle East and tourism is a significant contributor to the economy. There have been positive and negative effects in the region. In Petra, there are locals who have started learning foreign languages.

The money earned from tourism has helped the local residents finance their education. The local residents usually work in the hotels, restaurants, tour guide companies and travel agencies. Others are earning their living by investing in tourism (Alhasant, 2010). However, there are negative effects of the host-tourist interaction. There are locals who have started to take alcohol and there are sexual relationships between them and the tourists. The sex tourism especially where young children are affected is disheartening.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some are also losing their own identity and culture as they imitate the behaviours of the tourists. They have western dressing styles and some live beyond their means. They are young people who drop out of school due to the allure of getting easy money when they interact with tourists.

Cyprus: In Cyprus, there have also been changes in the residents’ behaviour as a result of tourism. There has been an increase in drug trafficking and other crimes and young people are smoking at an early age. There are young people who have reduced the amount of time they spend with their families and in community activities in order to interact with the tourists more. They are spending considerable time clubbing in the bars. They have also been young people who have dropped out of school.

Tourism has also affected the area positively. Apart from the rise in standard of living, there has been a lot of infrastructure development. There has been an increase in the building of roads, airports and restaurants. The tourists have also made the local residents increase their activities in art trade and festivals.

There is more involvement in embroidery, weaving, wood crafting and pottery. Tourism has actually helped the residents to get more in touch with their culture. The local residents have noted that the tourists love old architecture and instead of allowing eager real estate developers to devour the buildings, they have renovated them and reserved them as tourist attractions.

The people are torn however over the introduction of a casino in the area. There are concerns that gambling will become a social problem while others feel every tourist attraction usually has one and the region will be losing money if they do not introduce one (Spanou, 2007).

Caribbean In the Caribbean, there has been a renewed interest in their culture due to the high tourist interests. There has been an increase in the art festivals and cultural events. The monuments are also being renovated and preserved. The people however feel the increase of wealth in residents has been limited as most of the returns accrue to the foreign investors who have set up hotels, communication and transport systems in the area.

In fact, they contend that tourism has increased the wage differentials in the indigenous people between the ones who are able to get great jobs in the tourism industries and those who get menial jobs. All these case studies show that tourism affects the social-cultural life of residents both positively and negatively (TransAfrica Forum, 2000).

We will write a custom Assessment on Socio-Cultural Effects of Tourism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusion The tourist-host interaction and the influence on the resident’s social and cultural activities in Bali, Cyprus, Jordan and the Caribbean show that tourism has a significant influence on the residents.

There are positive effects such as increase in income for the residents and increased development in infrastructure. However, the youth are affected negatively as they drop out of school and engage in drinking and smoking and other vices. The government and other authorities should put up strategies to mitigate the adverse effects of tourist-host interaction.

References Alhasant, S. (2010). Sociocultural Impacts of Tourism on the Local Community at Petra, Jordan. European Journal of Scientific Research, 44(3), 374-386.

Philip, B. (2012). Beauty of Bali under threat from pressures of mass tourism. Retrieved from: https://www.theguardian.com/world/2012/aug/07/bali-tourism-threatens-natural-beauty

Spanou, E. (2007). The Impact of Tourism on the Sociocultural Structure of Cyprus. Tourismos, 2(1):145-162.

TransAfrica Forum (2000).The Impact of Tourism in the Caribbean. Washington: TransAfrica Forum.


Mobile Commerce Technology Essay (Critical Writing) best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Paper Summary



Introduction In the article “Mobile Commerce Technology” by Chung-wei Lee, Wen-Chen Hu and Jyh-haw Yeh, the authors set out to discuss the mobile commerce technology on business.

Mobile commerce technology has emerged as a distinct and important entity influencing the traditional business environment significantly. This technology promises to revolutionalize the manner in which business is carried out thereby changing the businesses world profoundly. An understanding of the technology that makes mobile commerce possible is therefore important.

Paper Summary The paper begins by highlighting how the World Wide Web revolutionalized commerce and paved the way for electronic commerce. It notes how advances in mobile networks have made possible mobile commerce. In a few years, mobile commerce has gained ground with millions of users engaging in e-commerce activities using their mobile devices.

The article goes on to describe a mobile commerce system, which involves a wide range of disciplines and technologies. The major components of the system are mobile commerce applications, mobile stations, mobile middleware, wireless networks, wired networks, and host computers. An explanation of how the six components work together following the submission of a request by a mobile user is provided. The mobile commerce application provides the client-side and server-side programs that will be used.

The mobile station relays user requests to the other components in the system and displays the results of the processing to the end user. The mobile middleware makes the interaction between the internet contents and the mobile station seamless. It does this by supporting a wide range of software standards and operating systems thereby making it possible for mobile stations to understand a wide variety of content.

Mobile middleware also enhances security by providing some encryption standards for communication. Wireless networks are networks that use radio waves for communication. They make use of the wireless access point or a base station to deliver user requests. Wired networks are not a mandatory component for the mobile commerce system but they may be used by the server computers that are used to process user requests. The host computer is the machine that has software that processes the user requests.

Considering the wide scope of each individual component, the authors proceed to explain the elements in components that are related to mobile commerce. The first element is mobile commerce applications and this many of these applications have been developed and implemented in many phones.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The applications have the capabilities of electronic commerce applications and additional functions such as inventory tracking and dispatching. The mobile station is the handheld device used by the end user. This device has features of computers, telephones, and personal information managers.

However, the mobile station has significant differences from a personal computer or laptop. The mobile devices have limited bandwidth, limited power and processing capabilities, and mobility features. The authors observe that the limitation in bandwidth makes it impossible for most multimedia material to be displayed correctly on the microbrowser present in the mobile station.

The paper defines middleware as “the software layer between the operating system and the distributed applications that interact via the networks” (Chung-wei, et al., 2009, p.2586). The middleware later provides transparency by hiding the network environment complexities and enabling diverse systems to work together.

The middleware is able to translate requests from mobiles stations into a form that the host computer can understand and translate the host computer responses to a form the mobile station can understand. As of the year 2000, the most widely used middleware by wireless internet users was i-mode with 60% of users followed by WAP which had 39% of users and lastly Palm with 1% of total users.

Wireless networks are interconnected computing devices where the nodes are capable of communicating with each other without the need of physical connections. The network infrastructure provides the medium through which communication takes place.

The move from electronic commerce to mobile commerce necessitates the use of wireless networks to support the mobility of mobile devices. Wireless local-area networks (WLANs) and wireless cellular networks are the two major wireless networks technologies used in mobile commerce. WLANs are well suited for office and home networks as well as personal area networks and ad hoc networks.

The wireless environment can be made up of mobile devices and an access point that acts as a router. The article explains that in a one-hop WLAN environment, the mobile stations connect directly to the access point through radio waves. The Access point relays data packets from the transmitter device to the receiver device. The mobile devices can communicate amongst themselves without an access point in what is referred to as a wireless adhoc network.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Mobile Commerce Technology specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition to the WLAN products available in the market, Bluetooth technology can also be used for wireless communication although this technology has a very limited coverage range and throughput, which makes it only useful in personal area networks. The most popular wireless networks currently use industry standards such as the IEEE 802.11b. However, standards with much higher transmission speeds such as the IEEE 802.11g are predicted to replace this popular standard in the near future.

Cellular system users can make use of their cellular phones for mobile commerce. The phone connects to the nearest base station and the requests are forwarded to a fixed network. The authors advance that while cellular systems were originally designed for voice-only communication; they have evolved from analog to digital and are capable of transmitting data packets, which makes them usable for mobile commerce.

The standards used by most cellular networks are 2g and 2.5G although it is predicted that 3G systems will dominate future wireless cellular services. The article states that CDMA (WCDMA) and CDMA2000 are the two main Wideband standards for 3G

The host computer acts upon the user requests by processing and storing the information for mobile commerce applications. This component has three major parts; a web server, database server, and application programs and support software. The host computer is unaware of the nature of the client and it provides the same kind of response for mobile devices and personal computers. The mobile commerce application programs have to structure the information in a format that is usable for the mobile station.

The article then sets out to discuss future trends in mobile commerce technology. It begins by noting that 26% of the 50million wireless phone users in the US used their devices to take part in some mobile commerce activity in the year 2006. Mobile commerce has risen to prominence because of its effectiveness and convenience.

The user can engage in commerce at anytime and from any place. The potential for mobile commerce has led many companies to start offering mobile commerce options to their customers. Majority of the big US companies plan to implement mobile solutions in future.

The article reveals that security will play a major role in the future of mobile commerce. Potential customers will be wary of using mobile commerce systems that do not guaranty security of information and exchange over the mobile network. Security issues encompass the entire mobile commerce system.

The article discusses the WAP security system, which is provided through the WTLS protocol. This system ensures data integrity and guarantees privacy in the system through data encryption. However, the system has a loophole since the encrypted messages appear as clear text on the WAP gateway during processing. This problem can be solved by having the WAP gateway reside on a server network with major security mechanisms implemented on it.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Mobile Commerce Technology by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The authors state that the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) protocol is used to provide security in the IEEE 802.11 standard. In this security protocol, each mobile host has a private key shared with the base station.

An encryption algorithm based on RC4 is used to generate the ciphertext in the encryption process. However, this method is not very secure since there are methods of breaking the approach. Future systems need to employ standards that provide better security. Payment presents another challenge in mobile commerce since there is not global standard.

The Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) protocol currently favored requires processing and memory capacities that are too much for most WAP client devices. A “thin” SET wallet approach is proposed for future systems since it will have less processing and memory demands therefore making it usable by all WAP client devices. The paper concludes by reasserting that wireless and mobile networks have extended electronic commerce.

Critique The article sets out to provide an informative discussion on mobile commerce technology. Considering the space limitations of the paper, it does a good job of explaining the multiple components of a mobile commerce system.

The article is able to provide a brief yet informative enough description of the components of a mobile commerce system therefore providing adequate background information for a person who is not familiar with the components. The authors are able to prioritize on the components that are most important for a mobile commerce system and provide more information on the same for the reader. The article makes use of graphical figures that are very important in enhancing understanding on the topic.

The authors make use of a lot of expert opinion on the subject. This increases the credibility of the statements and arguments made in the article. The reader can therefore have confidence in the material presented in the article since reliable experts in the field of mobile application technology are referenced all through the paper.

However, the article introduces too many technical issues that a person who is not conversant with computing technology cannot understand. Without background information on concepts such as IEEE standards, Wideband systems, Access points, and encryption algorithms, the non-technical reader will not have a good understand of what is being discussed.

While the authors attempt to take care of this by providing a definition of key terms at the end of the paper, the descriptions still introduced other terms that the layperson will not be familiar with. In overall, the article is well written and very informative. A person gains significant knowledge concerning mobile commerce technology from reading the article.

Reference Chung-wei, L., Wen-Chen, H.,


Genetically Modified Foods Research Paper cheap essay help

Introduction The introduction of genetically modified foods, GMFs, has been quite rapid, especially in the US. Stewart report that in the year 1996, “transgenic crops covered 1.7 million hectares worldwide”(5). Presently, there are more than fifty individual transgenic products that involve thirteen separate crops (Stewart 6).

Statistics indicate that in 2009, more than fourteen million large, as well as small-scale farmers in twenty-five nations across the world had planted one hundred and thirty-four million hectares. This was a seven-percent increase compared to the year 2008 (Johnson 43). A prediction has been made that, within the next twenty years, the gene technology “will touch every type of agricultural crop in the world, although this will depend on a high-level of consumer acceptance” (Johnson 48).

GM technology has revolutionized how agricultural practices are being conducted around the world. Many nations believe GM technology is the way forward to self-sustaining in food security, and as a source of foreign exchange. This is unlike traditional agricultural practices which are labor intensive but low yielding.

Thus, various research affirms the technology will likely shape the future agricultural practices in terms of increasing food production and foreign exchange. However, fears such as human and plant health in regard to the technology are major concerns that are being discussed by various stakeholders across the world.

Genetically Modified Food, GMF GMF is a popular word in the food industries. Jukes (61) defines the term as the food derived from genetically modified organism, GMO. According to Feight and Nashat (156) the genetic engineering process is used to alter the GMF DNA composition.

GMF in the US and Other Parts of the World Various research conducted on GMFs have signaled that the US is a leading nation in both production and consumption of genetically modified foods worldwide (Lekha


Fashion and Personality Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

It is important to note that the way you dress or the fashion you choose says a lot about the kind of a person you are. The fashion you decide to go with should reveal your desires, interests, ambition, and background. Everyone is unique in terms personality and interest, and therefore, it is important for a person to wear what emphasize whom he or she is. There are people who are wild and like to explore while others prefer styles that add nostalgia and romance (Bell 45).

It is important to know who you are so that you can choose a style that fits your personality to avoid misjudgment. In addition, be sure to be consistent with your style to create a signature that describes you as an individual. The fashion we choose to go with should match our personality because people can easily judge us from our dress code (Bell 47). Using examples, I will discuss how fashion makes people’s personality prominently.

Discussion While most individuals find it easy to conform to other people’s fashion, it is extremely important for people to identify what suits them best and incorporate that in their own style to distinguish their personality. In fashion, being different is an important aspect because it helps individual personality to stand out.

In the movie the “Devil wears Prada”, which is created around fashion, we can easily identify roles of the characters by observing their dress codes. While Anna is dressed in simple clothes that do not have a voice in fashion, Miranda is dressed in timeless fashion that gives her the rich woman’s look (The devil wears prada). On the other hand, Andrea was given an over the edge fashion that showed the outgoing and careless look in the movie (The devil wear prada).

In addition to this, it is not difficult to notice that Field had a good idea about fashion and personality based on the outfits and make up for her characters. The looks and fashion in this movie was able to give the characters stage personalities that were outstanding from the other. This is a clear indication that what we put on talks much about who we are.

Although, it takes time to develop one’s style and fashion it is important for individuals to be in a position to say who they are through their dressing. Having individual dress code helps in boosting self-confidence and brings comfort (Bell 113). Your image is highly dependent on how you dress on a regular basis because people learn to associate you with the kind of fashion you embrace.

When it comes to fashion and personality, make sure that when people see a certain fashion they can actually identify that look with your personality. Learn to leave a mark in what is in your wardrobe to ensure that your clothes speak loud about the kind of a person you are; let your clothes define you more than words can do.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More People who are dramatic and casual like to make strong fashion statements also tend to be stunning and attention seeking (Musselman and DeGregori 47). For this kind of personality, choose bold colors, straight lines, and unique outstanding jewelry to match your outfits (Musselman and DeGregori 47). A dramatic personality seeks attention at all times and wants to make a strong statement (Bell 121).

A dramatic personality goes well with clothes that are fashionable and overshadow other people. Their class of fashion is able to help people notice their personality even for those meeting them for the first time. However, if someone with a dramatic personality decided to dress like a classic personality he or she would look out of place. Therefore, it is advisable to have fashion that clearly highlights who you are from far.

For those people with a serious personality, and mostly like having a classic look, they should have clothes with straight lines, neutral colors such as gray, white and black, flat shoes, and striped tops (Musselman and DeGregori 56). This is what makes them stand out as no nonsense people and enables them to get people’s attention at first glance. In addition, this kind of fashion portrays people with very strong personality, focused and in control (Bell 78).

However, when blending fashion with personality it is wise to choose clothes that match your body shape. Clothes should highlight on your strong points and conceal physical faults (Musselman and DeGregori 94). Women with a classic personality are conservative and prefer simple fashion that is well balanced. In addition, they like simple accessories that stand the test of time such as plain gold chain. This type of fashion screams that “am intelligent, simple, and focused” (Bell 113).

On the other hand, there is ingénue and romantic personality that always appears young and girlish with a small body (Musselman and DeGregori 73). Young girls always look cute and charming because of their small physique. In addition, they have a love for things that are nice and more feminine such as fragile jewelry, ruffles, lace, and soft fabrics (Musselman and DeGregori 77).

Because of their personality, such people are likely to be taken less serious and considered childish by most people. This is the weakness associated with this personality but people can be able to combine their dressing with other aspects to make their personality clearly represented without misjudgment. However, this personality enables women to be more feminine and attractive compared to other personalities hence if it is combined with other types of fashion it creates a balanced style.

Conclusion The way we dress says so much about our personality especially in instances where we have to make a first impression. Our fashion speaks volumes about the kind of people we are in terms of interests, ambitions, and aspirations. A person in jeans and t-shirt appears to be relaxed while, one in a suit creates the impression of focus, alert and serious.

We will write a custom Essay on Fashion and Personality specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, a person in an inadequate dress creates the impression that she is wild, free spirited and easy to hang around. People can draw assumptions about us or our social preference from the way we dress. Therefore, it is important for people to make independent choices for fashion to ensure that we create the right impression about ourselves. While it may not be possible for one to pick a single style or fashion, it is wise to incorporate some aspects of other fashions to emphasize on their personality.

For instance, if you are dramatic and realize that people brush you off you can add some elements of classic in your style to achieve the desired results. Some classic fashion elements will let people respect and take you a serious individual. However, if you are a classic and people are not able to see your fun and charming side, adding some element of dramatic personality in your fashion is more appropriate.

Works Cited Bell, Allison. Fearless Fashion (What’s Your Style?). Hempstead: Lobster Press, 2004. Print.

Musselman, Jennifer, and Patty DeGregori. The Hip Girl’s Handbook for the Working World: Work What You Got to Get What You Want. San Francisco: Council Oak Books, 2005. Print.

The devil wears prada, Dir. David Frankel. Perf. Anne Hathaway, Meryl Streep. Lauren Weisberger. 2006. Film.


Rights of Immigrants and Immigration Policy Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Statement of politicians’ position

Critique of politicians’ position and my position


Introduction Each year, a great number of new immigrants arrive into the country from all over the world. Some of these immigrants enter the country legally while the others try to get in illegally. On the other hand, there are those who attempt to immigrate into the country illegally through various devious means. At the borders, they are apprehended and forcibly made to return to their country. Despite the challenges that the government faces with regard to the immigrant problem, there are cases when authorities are obligated to accept immigrants.

The rising number of immigrants each year has become a serious debate issue. Some groups support policies that protect the rights of immigrants while others are strongly opposed to the laws that encourage immigrant entrance into the country. According to Sir Michael Dummet, the state has several duties towards immigrants. To begin with, the state has to recognize that its primary role is the welfare of its own citizens as well as protection of the others who are in need.

Thus the notion that a state’s sole responsibility is only to ensure and care about its citizens’ wellbeing is faulty and misconceived. Dummet supports his supposition. He claims all the citizens have a personal a certain moral obligation to their country as well. The whole population is represented by their state in the world. Consequently, it follows that some country is also morally obliged to consider the welfare of other states and that of other individuals (Huemer, 2010).

This paper will explore the obligations that the nation has towards the acceptance of immigrants. Furthermore, the paper will discuss what a morally justified immigration policy includes. The paper will uphold the position to support for the right of immigration.

Statement of politicians’ position The opposition directed towards immigrants and their rights stems from the sense of selfishness among the citizens and politicians of the host country. Both the electors and the politicians alike promote the idea that a nation is only responsible for its citizens without any regard for immigrants coming in from foreign countries.

Consequently, the politicians will normally base their arguments on what they think about serving the interests of their country best. For instance, British politicians involved in the European Union deliberations always ground their decisions to support or veto motions on whether it is in the interest of Britain or not. This is contrary to the expectation that they should consider the interests of the European Union to make their decision whether to support the motion or denounce it.

Politicians take this position with regard to one crucial reason, which is foreign citizens are of little or no value to their political ambitions. Since the foreign citizens hold no voting power in the country they immigrate into, the politicians deem them insignificant for their campaigns (Dummett, 2001).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Critique of politicians’ position and my position The concept of ‘sovereignty’ promotes this state of affairs. This concept supports national independence and non-interference by other foreign nations, especially on matters of how it deals with its citizens. Additionally, another argument forwarded in opposition to immigrant rights and policies is that each country has an individual right to regulate the activities on its borders.

Consequently, the government can exclude or admit foreigners who wish to pass through the country’s borders. However, those who support free immigration, suppose that countries should not impose any restrictions on immigration. A comparison is drawn between free immigration and the free market concept. This proposition was strongly supported by Milton Fried Mans as well as Ernest Bevin, who envisioned the total abolition of passports.

They argued that free immigration should have been allowed to ensure that basic human right which is the right for freedom – particularly freedom of movement would be enjoyed by all humans. Therefore, in the spirit of promoting human rights, no country would have the right to deny any individual entry into a country of his/her choice.

Pope John XXIII also supported free immigration policies that excluded no individual from entering into any country. According to Pope John XXIII, all humans are members of a universal family and a greater world society. This existence, according to the Pope, is inherent and cannot be curtailed by any country.

Additionally, Pope John XXIII endorsed the fact that immigrants deserved to have their rights recognized and respected. They should enjoy economic rights and personal rights to ensure that they are able to comfortably adapt to a new society. Furthermore, it allows them to obtain a means of self sustenance.

There are several reasons as to why the sanctions and restrictions are imposed on immigrants. However, these do not suffice as an excuse in denying those people their right. To begin with, some believe that restricting the number of immigrants entering into the country would protect the national heritage and culture. Additionally, it is claimed that accepting immigrants will increase the economic hardships he state faces as this would impose constrain on the scarce resources of the country. It is, therefore, argued that these restrictions are in the interests of the country’s native citizens (Dummett, 2001).

From my perspective, the rights of immigrants should be upheld and protected. There are several reasons as to why immigration restriction is not a favorable option. To begin with, restricting immigrants from entering a country is a direct violation of their inherent rights. The most common reason for instituting these regulations is to protect and ensure the security of the native citizens.

We will write a custom Essay on Rights of Immigrants and Immigration Policy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In most cases, terrorism has been cited as the main security concern that necessitates immigrant regulation. However, terrorist activities are perpetrated even by the citizens of the country. Additionally, not all immigrates are willing to enter the country to commit a terrorist act. Therefore, this cannot be used as a basis for such limitations. The other reason that has been widely cited is the effect of immigration on employment.

Most native citizens feel that the higher the number of immigrants in a country the higher the competition on the existing jobs. This ultimately leads to a decrease in the quality of life of the native citizens. Since the immigrants are normally desperate for finding jobs they tend to accept low salaries. Employees prefer such workers as the business would incur less operational costs. However this comes at the expense of the native citizens losing their jobs.

However, this is not an acceptable reason since it is the duty of the government to regulate and state the base salary within its territory. Furthermore, the jobs are meant to be acquired based on merit and the individual’s qualification.

A morally acceptable immigration policy is the one that meets both the interests of the citizens of the country and those of the immigrants. Such a policy is difficult to be developed and implemented as there are various challenges. The situation regarding the issue may be compared to a limited capacity lifeboat (Hardin 2001) since a country cannot take in all the immigrants.

References Dummett, M. A. E. (2001). On Immigration and Refugees. New York: Routledge.

Hardin, G. (2001). Living on a Lifeboat. The Social Contract. 36-47. Retrieved from http://www.garretthardinsociety.org/articles_pdf/living_on_a_lifeboat.pdf

Huemer M (2010). Is there a Right to Immigrate? Social Theory and Practice. 36(3), 429-461. DOI: 10.5840/soctheorpract201036323.


“Cocaine: Abuse and Addiction” by National Institute on Drug Abuse Essay online essay help

Table of Contents Cocaine and drug abuse

Summary of the article

The core issues in the reading

Analysis of the article

Critique of the article

Lessons learnt


Works Cited

Cocaine and drug abuse Drug abuse has become an issue of concern in the society today. Despite of numerous education programs on drug related issues, people continue to abuse drugs and the youths are reported as the most affected group in the society. In the US, Africa-Americans turn out to be the most affected in such a case as statistics show that drug abuse among this group is relatively high.

The most commonly abused drugs in the US include marijuana, cocaine, and heroin. Uncontrollable use of these drugs can cause severe health effects. To combat drug abuse, there is a need for the government to work with other stakeholder to develop long-term strategies that will effectively address this problem.

Summary of the article An article “Cocaine: Abuse and Addiction” by National Institute on Drug Abuse (NIDA) is the main focus in this paper. This article gives a broad spectrum of information regarding the problem of cocaine abuse in the US. The literature provides us with a report of a research that has been conducted in the US regarding the topic of cocaine and drug abuse.

The article is extensive and begins with basic information about cocaine to ensure the reader has a proper understanding of the drug. The authors of the article go a step further to provide information about cocaine abuse and addiction, which is a big problem in the modern society.

To be more elaborate, the authors of this research have developed a graphical representation and statistics, which present prevalence rates of cocaine abuse in the US for the last decade. The survey done by National Institute on Drug Use and Health (NSDUH) has revealed that the abuse of cocaine has been declining at a considerable rate among the youths. Nevertheless, there is a need to make more efforts to combat the use of cocaine and other drugs in the society.

The core issues in the reading This report by NIDA is a piece of literature that has been designed to sensitive, enlightened public to educate people on the cocaine abuse, effects related to use of cocaine, and the most appropriate treatment option that can help cocaine addicts recover.

The aim of the article is to keep the public well-informed regarding the latest scientific developments in the field of drug abuse (National Institute on Drug Abuse 2). “Cocaine: Abuse and Addiction” reveals that genetic studies have proved that there were heredity influences, which caused addiction to cocaine and to other drugs.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, the authors of this survey disclose that more recent researches on the issue of drug abuse have proven that environment is to be blamed for increased cases of cocaine abuse (National Institute on Drug Abuse 2). Such factors as parenting, nutrition, and stress can influence abuse of cocaine. Due to such issues, NIDA is committed to find a more effective solution to the issue of cocaine abuse.

Alternatively, the authors enlighten the readers that the most commonly form of cocaine that is used is powder, also known as coke. The researchers further argue that most of cocaine users as a rule combine this drug together with heroin to speed up the effect.

According National Institute on Drug Abuse, cocaine is one of the most addictive drugs because of the way it impacts on the brain (2). Due to the addictive nature of cocaine, it has both the long-term and the short-term effects on the addicts. The authors explain that cocaine is effective within the first hour, and it makes the users feel energetic, talkative, alert, and can cause a decrease of appetite.

However, the author argues that the effect can vary depending on the route of absorption. Long-term effects, according to the article, include significant weight loss due to the lack of appetite, irritation of the skin, over-sensitiveness, psychological effects (paranoia), and mental disorder, among others (National Institute on Drug Abuse 5).

In addition to this, the article reveals that HIV is easily spread among cocaine users due to sharing needles and trading sex for the drug. In relation to treatment, the authors of this article argue that because of the effects related to cocaine abuse, there is no particular treatment method that has been indentified.

However, most drug addicts undergo a comprehensive treatment program where the social, neurobiological, medical aspects are addressed depending on the condition of the patient. The authors say that there is continuing research for a pharmacological approach to address the effects of the abuse among cocaine users. The editorial concludes that the best approach that has been effective in treating patients or cocaine addict is the behavioral intervention, especially contingency management.

Analysis of the article This article provides the reader with adequate information regarding cocaine abuse. The editorial team has been very keen in explaining and describing several ways through which cocaine drug is used/abused. With sufficient data, the authors have presented the reader(s) numerous effects of using cocaine drug.

We will write a custom Essay on “Cocaine: Abuse and Addiction” by National Institute on Drug Abuse specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Both short- and long-term effects of cocaine abuse, as outlined in this article, present that cocaine is a very harmful drug. The health effects caused by cocaine abuse are severe. The data and facts used by the editor of this article have been acquired through research and survey.

An investigation by National Survey on Drug Use and Health (NSDUH) has been used to provide statistics on the prevalence rates of cocaine abuse in the US. The use of such forms of first hand data attests that this research report is valid. The facts have been present in a graphical presentation. Most information presented in this article, especially the facts related to effects and treatment of cocaine addicts, have been acquired from real life situations combined with extensive research from numerous research agencies.

Data have been gathered from public institutions including renowned research agencies, which include NSDUH and Drug Abuse Warning Network (DAWN), schools, and hospitals. The data presented here is consistent with other research findings and surveys on the same topic and, therefore, very reliable.

The conclusion made by the writers of this article is reasonable. It is a fact that there is no particular method for treating cocaine addicts. Just like most researchers have recommended, this article supports the use of behavioral intervention in treating cocaine addicts as well as other drugs addicts (National Institute on Drug Abuse 6). Therefore, due to the fact NIDA is an accredited research agency, I find this report valid, practical, and valuable. This literature can be used for education and rehabilitation of drug abusers.

Critique of the article The data and reported findings presented in this article are accurate. Based on extensive research carried out by various research bodies, the report can be deemed as valid. Information presented in this article is consistent with other findings and researches. The editorial board of this article is not biased in any way since the article has been developed with the intention of informing, educating and warning the public about the seriousness of the issue regarding cocaine and drug abuse in the society.

The data presented on prevalence of cocaine abuse among students from University of Michigan present important findings that can be used by other institutions to deal with the problem of drug abuse in the society (National Institute on Drug Abuse 4). The findings from the University of Michigan have shown that efforts by various bodies to eradicate the problem in the society have been fruitful to some extent.

However, despite of the results, the authors continue to emphasize on the need for a more effective strategy; this portrays fairness of this report. The article elucidates the dangers of cocaine abuse to the reader making it a very resourceful piece of literature. The approach, in which the author outlines the effects of cocaine abuse, is very educative and can, therefore, be incorporated in the education curriculum because of its informative nature.

This particular article can be linked to one of the resources that we used in the class. America’s first cocaine epidemic by David Musto talks about the issue of Cocaine abuse and most of the information by National Institute on Drug Abuse can be related to this article. Although this primary article or resource provides most recent data, both studies have something in common and address the same theme.

Not sure if you can write a paper on “Cocaine: Abuse and Addiction” by National Institute on Drug Abuse by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Lessons learnt This particular article has helped me have a clear understanding on issues related to drug abuse. In particular, the report has shed more light on issues related to cocaine and drug abuse, which are big problems in the today’s society. The article has also shown that environmental and heredity factors cannot be ignored because they have a considerable influence on increase of drug abuse in the society.

The health effects of cocaine explained clearly in this article have helped me gain a deeper understanding on the negative impacts of drugs. Most importantly, the informative data on treatment techniques for cocaine drugs is relevant and has, therefore, helped me see various ways that can be used to treat such patients. If I was to provide a response to the editorial team of this article, I would advise the researchers focusing more on the effects of cocaine.

Conclusion Without doubt, the problem of drug abuse in the society is an issue that should be addressed with a lot of concern. The effects of drug abuse are long term and very ruthless.

Cocaine is one of the most commonly abused drugs in the US, regardless the fact that it causes serious health problems. Although recent research by National Institute on Drug Use and Health (NSDUH) reveals that the prevalence rate of cocaine abuse in the society is declining, there is a need for the government to develop more effective strategies to address this problem.

The authorities should establish many rehabilitation centers so that more drug addicts can be enrolled in the treatment program. In addition, the research agencies and other institutions with similar interests should carry out more researches on the issues of drug abuse so that a permanent solution can be acquired on how to manage this issue.

Works Cited National Institute on Drug Abuse. “Cocaine: Abuse and Addiction”. Research Report Series. 2010. Web.


Why people cheat Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Although cheating is considered a “bad thing”, there are no clear pointers as to who are prone to cheating. The general agreement is that everybody is capable of cheating. According to Dachis (Par.2), a consideration of why people make a fearful choice is crucial in understanding why people cheat. In this essay, I assess some of the causes of cheating among different people and the effects of their actions.

Dachis asserts that cheating occurs because people are afraid that the alternative to cheating would possibly result in worse experiences. Adams further asserts students cheat in examinations in order to get good grades and avoid failing. He argues that students also cheat in order to secure admission to prestigious colleges of their choice and to please their parents by posting good grades. Pressure from the society to perform well in examination also results in cheating among students (Par.3).

Cheating happens when the risk of being caught does not seem frightening like the risk of failing. Combinations of pressure to perform well and forced activities are the major causes of cheating. Forced or compulsory schooling promotes cheating. Students are continuously being told on the value of good grades.

Basically, grades are the only motivator for students who view schooling as forced work, boring, and purposeless. Consequently, they advance their way out of the system and into freedom by ensuring they post good grades through cheating (Dachis Par.4).

People cheat because they perceive the outcome to be more attractive than failure. A subjective external environment can cause pressure for a person to perform thus resulting to cheating. However, it is baffling to understand why some people would continue cheating even after succeeding and the need to continue cheating is no longer there.

Dachis (Par.8) argues that there are some self-destructive people who like pushing things to the edge. He further argues that other people are risk-seekers who enjoy the pleasure that comes with the risk of cheating. Other people cheat because they enjoy the feeling of power that comes with getting away with things they should not have.

Many people have been left wondering why a smart student capable of passing an examination would resort to cheating. In the world of sports, a lot of people have been perplexed by the tendencies of great teams to cheat despite prior warning regarding the consequences of cheating.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It has baffled many people as to why people would choose to cheat in circumstances where the disadvantages of cheating far much outweigh the benefits. A student may have the entire examination cancelled, or in some cases he or she may be discontinued from school.

Cheating in sports may also give a slight edge in a game but may result in huge fines, suspensions, stripping off the medals or awards worn, or even a lifetime ban from the sport (Bennet Par. 3). According to Fiedler (Par.1), Lance Armstrong who was a seven times Tour de France champion was stripped off his medals and many other wins after the U.S. Anti-Doping Agency found him guilty of doping. He was also banned from farther competition.

Bennet argues that although irrationality is a rule in many cases of cheating, it is not the only reason why people cheat. Conventionally, cheating has been thought to involve cold calculations.

However, recent research findings indicate that people succumb to the temptation of cheating even when it is not in their best interest (Par.6). Rather than think about disadvantages and benefits of cheating with care, people are influenced by their frame of mind, peer pressure, and personal perceptions about their image. A sense of fairness is sometimes a motivating factor for some people who cheat.

Although cheating has been widely publicized through the media, new research is producing evidence that cheating is also widespread in sports. These researchers whose findings are based on economics as a forensic tool assert that cheating either by referees or players is a common occurrence in a wide range of sports.

Betting has been also attributed to cheating in sports. A study by Justin Wolfers between 1989 and 2005 involving over 4000 Division 1 college basketball games found out that there was significant point shaving in college basketball.

He discovered that probability alone could not explain the number of times that the winning team just fell short of beating the “spread” (margin of victory as determined by bookmakers). The researcher argued that the players were in most cases holding back just a little bit to enable the gamblers who had bet against the spread to also win .Wolfer concluded that the gamblers had prior arrangements with the players (Bennet par.8)..

We will write a custom Essay on Why people cheat specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Some sports people cheat because their competitors are doing the same. This mentality of cheating because others are cheating has resulted in widespread cheating in the sport fraternity including professional cycling. The pressure to perform well and be at par or even better than a cheating competitor has contributed to cheating among many sports.

Works Cited Bennett, Drake, Why do people cheat? (4 Oct. 2007). Web.

Dachis, Adam, Why People Cheat. (23 May 2011). Web.

Fiedler, David. n.d. Lance Armstrong: Everything You Ever Wanted To Know About Lance Armstrong. n.d. Web.12 Nov. 2012.


SWOT Analysis: David Christopher, an Orthopaedic Surgeon Case Study a level english language essay help

Synopsis In every field of study or business, there exist the external and internal factors that you can either have control over them or not. In this case, one can have a problem-oriented approach to identify the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and the threats in the life of David Christopher according to the book OM, third edition by David Alan Collier and James R. Evans.

David Christopher ventured in the business of Orthopaedic Surgery Clinic. By taking the problem-oriented approach, this paper analyses the case study to identify the main problems. The writer then suggests solutions to the existing problems. In this case, the weaknesses and the threats are discussed as the major problems. However, there are solutions to the problems as in the case of David Christopher.

Recommendations have also been made and the best solutions chosen from the proposals. The theory used in this case study analyses the business using the approach of SWOT analysis. Discussions of the findings are incorporated together in the SWOT analysis and at the end of the case study; there are details of the solution and implementation.

Strengths These are the capabilities or the successes in a business that are helpful in accomplishing the mission. In Christopher’s business, the owner ventured in a business that is in line with his profession. He uses the knowledge he has to ensure best service delivery. Christopher obtained medical degrees from Universities of Kentucky and Virginia. He has experience in orthopaedic surgery obtained from Duke University Medical Centre.

Christopher has employed 12 support personnel including X-Ray technicians, nurses, accounting and office support. Evidence shows that the employees are committed because the orthopaedic surgeons are working long hours a day. The clinic’s typical workweek shows that employees work for 10 hours excluding lunch hour.

David Christopher’s clinic has many customers because of the overload of the surgeons. The clinic has good reputation among the customers because there are so many patients requiring the orthopaedic surgery and therefore David Christopher has thought of employing more orthopaedic surgeons.

The clinic offers the best quality services to the customers free of medical and surgical errors. David Christopher’s workweek shows the set up and changeover times for the orthopaedic surgeons. This ensures that the surgeons get enough time to rest after attending to a patient and before the next patient.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the clinic, treatments of fractures have always been successful. Osteoporosis is a condition that leads to the fractures. Through Orthopaedic surgery clinic, the fractures of the hips, wrists, and the spine are treated successfully. Their services are perfect. This is strength in David Christopher’s clinic.

Weaknesses Weaknesses are those qualities that hinder the accomplishment of the mission and the achievement of the full potential. These are the controllable internal factors. In David Christopher’s clinic, there are only two orthopaedic surgeons including him and another one hired recently. The number of patients increases day-by-day forcing both orthopaedic surgeons to work for extra hours a day. This is a controllable internal crisis because David can decide to hire more orthopaedic surgeons.

Opportunities Opportunities are the chances in a business that when utilized, the business can gain competitive edge over others. A trained orthopaedic surgeon treats extremities and spine by preserving, investigating and recovering their initial forms and functions. The surgeon achieves this through medical, surgery and the physical handling (Collier


Factors Influencing Organizational Effectiveness Essay writing essay help

Table of Contents Importance of Vision, Mission and Values of an Organization

Techniques of Environmental Analysis

Factors Influencing Organizational Effectiveness


Importance of Vision, Mission and Values of an Organization It should be noted that long term goals play a crucial role in any organization’s development plans as compared to short term goals. Consequently, organizations have been known to put in place visions, missions and values to encourage stakeholders focus on a common goal.

Though visions, missions and values of organizations appear as meaningless statements to some people, they play a very important role in the quest to achieve long term objectives. They provide pillars on which organizations base their day-to-day aims as well as roadmaps on which long term strategies are founded (Hirschey, 2008). By aligning an organization’s vision, mission and values with the organization’s long term strategies, employees and other stakeholders are given a yard stick to measure their activities.

Furthermore, it has been noted that an organization whose strategic plans are in harmony with its vision, mission and values is more likely to succeed in the long run. All organizations aspire to be sustainable in the long run. In this regard, positive organizational culture is paramount in achieving these aims.

However, organizational culture can only be fostered if proper vision, mission and values are put in place. In addition, company vision, mission and values are used guiding principals in streamlining projects so as to attain desired outcomes. In a nutshell, vision, mission and values give specific aims that a firm seeks to achieve.

Techniques of Environmental Analysis Analysis of business environment is very important in determining success of an organization. Organizations use many techniques in analyzing business environment though cross-impact analysis and expert opinion are more effective. Cross-impact analysis allows comparison of variables besides forecasting of events (Freeman, 2010).

On the same note, cross-impact analysis does not require extensive knowledge in mathematics for one to be able to use the model. As a result, many employees can be able to use it. Similarly, expert opinion technique is highly beneficial since it involves professional advice. Professionals are well experienced in matters relating to their areas of specialization and will, therefore, be in a good position to forecast future events.

Though situations change, it has been noted that there is a tendency of circumstances being repeated overtime (Hirschey, 2008). Consequently, people experienced in various areas will be able to tell the expected trend of events. Incidentally, environmental analysis is crucial in ensuring long term sustainability and should therefore be dexterously handled. It is important to note that organizational effectiveness is influenced by both internal and external factors.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Factors Influencing Organizational Effectiveness In order to achieve long term goals of an organization, various factors have to be in play. To begin with, positive organizational culture should be insisted on since it ensures that all stakeholders work towards a common goal. Additionally, all strategies implemented by an organization should be customer focused, because an organization cannot survive without customers (Freeman, 2010). Moreover, reaction to any changes in the market should be swift in order to gain competitive advantage.

In Addition, an organization where decision making process is decentralized is likely to perform better, because it is easy to react to abrupt changes in the market. On the contrary, organizations where top management makes all decisions are ineffective since it takes time to implement policies. Similarly, organizations with high ability of adapting to changes in the environment usually have sustainable growth (Freeman, 2010).

References Freeman, R. E. (2010). Strategic Management: A Stakeholder Approach. New York: Cambridge University Press.

Hirschey, M. (2008). Fundamentals of Managerial Economics. Stanford: Cengage Learning.


Why Some People Choose Not to Carry Cellphones Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

A cellphone is a device used to make and receive phone calls. These devices enable you to communicate with anyone, any time no matter the distance and the place as long as there is a network coverage in your area.

It is due to cellphones that the world recently has turned into a global village, and this is a sharp contrast to the past when we did depend on telephone lines for communication. Although cellphones are advantageous and have made our life easier, people are still skeptical about carrying their cellphones everywhere due to their past experiences and fear of the unknown.

The most memorable experience while using my Android smart phone was the way it easily located my position. This happened since the phone was able to synchronize the goggle maps application on my phone. This made me phobic to carry my phone since I had given someone an incorrect address and the person was able to find out that I was lying.

Cellphones pose security threats to many people since they attract thieves who are usually stealing smartphones. Thus, most of the times people who do not want to be victims of robbery go about their daily activities without their cellphones in order to limit their vulnerability to robberies.

This makes them feel safe as most people keep some valuable documents in their cellphones such as work memos, daily schedules and their various personal identification numbers, thus by leaving phones at home or at their work place they stand a lesser chance of losing the data.

Some people use their phones to access social sites and electronic mail, and in case they lose their cellphones most of their personal information is lost as well. This poses a security threat to them and those around them especially if they are distinguished persons in society.

Cellphones ensure people are able to be reached at any time. Hence, when some people do not want to be contacted, they just want to have a peaceful time without interference. Therefore, they tend to leave their cellphones behind so that they are able to go about their daily activities without interference. Carrying the cellphones is sometimes hectic for them too, since such people do not want to be reached at times, thus they will only ensure they carry their cellphones when they want to be reached.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The new designs of cellphone are also scary as some phones especially smart phones usually have global positioning system. Hence, they can be traced in case of anything. Cellphones provide an easier avenue of tracing a person since if a phone is on, there is usually a way of tracing its owner through the use of internet protocol addresses.

More so, if it is used for internet access, this makes phones phobic due to the fear of being traced or followed by someone or even a stalker. Hence, by leaving the cellphone, they tend to be safe and confident that no one can follow them using their cellphones (Kang 6).

In addition, carrying a cellphone around is usually a burden for some people who feel it is a burden, since it is always in their pockets or their hands. This group or category of people is more prone to losing their phones because carrying the phones everywhere around increases the likelihood of forgetting one somewhere. Since they may forget or misplace the cellphone while undertaking their daily activities. Thus, it seems to be wiser to leave the cellphone at home or in the office so that to make sure the phone is not lost or misplaced.

Health factors and risks that are associated with cellphones are also a reason why many people prefer not to carry their cellphones around since recent research shows that the radiation from cellphones tend to cause chronic diseases and cancer that are still under research. Some people are scared of the effects of using their cellphones all the time.

This is most probably caused by various prejudices and stories that people hear about the consequences of using cellphones even though they might not have concrete evidence whether all those diseases are caused by the radiation from the cellphone. People’s reasons are purely speculative but understandable since some people are usually ignorant of these facts, although these are not surefire reasons why some people are afraid of carrying their cellphones (Saylor 12).

Technophobic people do not carry their cellphones along when doing their normal duties, these people sometimes even do not have a cellphone since they are usually highly conservative by nature and ignorant of technology, they do not accept it, or they are not willing to learn more about it.

Such people think technology is not really significant for the present day society. They also are afraid of the costs that are associated to it such as the purchase of airtime, fees for internet and email access. The ignorance is caused by the lack of proper understanding of how technology works and the concept behind the operation of cellphones. This is the reason why people do not carry cellphones since they do not want to incur costs that they do not understand.

We will write a custom Essay on Why Some People Choose Not to Carry Cellphones specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Kang, Cecilia. “China to Track Cellphones, Causing Human Rights Concerns.” Washington Post. 2011. Web.11 Nov 2012.

Saylor, Michael. Mobile Wave: How Mobile-Intelligence Will Change Everything. New York: Vanguard Press, 2012.


Euthyphro: Concept of Holiness and Piety Essay cheap essay help

Introduction The dialogue between Socrates and Euthyphro in front of the King Archon’s court presents two individuals in an argument on how to define and comprehend holiness. The two were to attend court hearings on different cases. During their discussion, they reveal to each other reasons why they are to appear in court.

According to Burrington (n.d.), Socrates was to attend a court hearing in which Meletus accused him of distracting the attention of young people from believing in the gods that the state religion recognized. Instead, Socrates was propagating the belief in new gods. On the other hand, Euthyphro was at the court to file a case against his father, who, he argued, had caused his family and friends be unkind to him.

The father had placed a servant who murdered one of the slaves in isolation to prevent the sin from spreading around. Later, the servant died even before the messenger could report on what religious steps could be taken against the servant. Euthyphro explained that it was wrong, in line with his accepted beliefs, to protect a manslayer. In addition, he said that his actions would prevent poisoning his father’s associates. According to Socrates, it was a taboo to lodge harmful proceedings against one’s father.

However, Euthyphro claimed that family relationships were not important when a man was unjustly murdered (Geach, 1966, p.369). This paper examines the attempts at providing a logically sound and universal definition of piety as they are presented in Plato’s dialogue Euthyphro.

Socrates’ aims Socrates wanted to understand the interpretation of the term holiness from other people’s standpoint. This step could help him in defending himself at the court (God, 2009). Socrates wanted to gage whether his action of preaching to the youths to accept foreign gods could be viewed as holy or not. He also wanted to know whether his act was appeasing or annoying all the gods, and whether it was right or wrong.

The concept of holiness also took major position, as Socrates wanted Euthyphro to evaluate his decision of accusing his father of murder. In the dialogue, Socrates aimed at making Euthyphro back his actions with solid religious premises. According to Socrates, many people have confused religious actions that are wrong or right, as they argue from archaic religious contexts. Remarkably, these two characters were faced with cases, which required deep philosophical explanations and comprehension.

The first definition Socrates requested Euthyphro to define what is meant by piety. In his first response, Euthyphro defended his ‘religious’ actions by alluding that even Zeus punished his father the same way.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Socrates refuted this response by saying that even though it can be genuine, the exemplification cannot be part of the definition. Therefore, Euthyphro needs to understand the difference between what he considers religious, and what he considers moral. Further, Socrates adds that he had difficulties in comprehending how misunderstanding arises among the gods.

The second definition In the second definition, Euthyphro suggested that pious is what pleases the gods (God, 2009). Socrates finds that this definition is much more logical since it appeals to generalization, rather than one particular example (Koukl, n.d.). He mentions that he needs to find a formulation that could serve as a standard against which people could measure all their acts, and see whether they have acted piously or not.

The idea that Socrates presents is a very important one, and it lies at the core of the method that we try to use when governing our society. We need an objective formulation of our laws and regulations to be able to tell with confidence if someone has broken them. However, despite the fact that the definition is logically more valuable, Socrates responded by indicating that what is appealing to one god could be unappealing to another god. Therefore, this definition tells us little about the essence of piousness.

The third definition Euthyphro felt frustrated and defined piety as that which pleases all the gods. This definition prompted Socrates to ask Euthyphro the question, “Is what is pious loved by (all) the gods because it is already pious, or is it pious merely because it is something loved by them?” (Burrington, n.d.). Socrates is aware that if an act is pious just because gods love it, then we know nothing about what piety in itself is. This idea is a bit difficult to grasp, but it might help if it is viewed through examples.

For instance, Socrates mentions that there is nothing in the essence of a carried thing that is determined by that particular condition in which it temporally finds itself. Similarly, gods may love an action, but that action is not in its essence pious for that reason, it is rather in a state of being loved and nothing more. One might think that Socrates is chasing unimportant nuances here, but what he is really doing is indicating how precise we have to be in defining our laws and morals if we want to be able to condemn someone of breaking them.

The fourth definition In an attempt of providing a better definition, Socrates appeals to logic and the relations between notions. He tries to define the notion of piety as belonging in its entirety to the notion of justice. He and Euthyphro agree that piety belongs to the domain of justice, but this does not mean that every just action is at the same time pious. They locate several types of behaviours that can be regarded as morally right, but do not belong to the domain of piety; for example, caring for other human beings.

The next thing that is necessary for a good definition, in Socreates’ view, is to differentiate pious acts from other just or ethical acts. However, he does not seem to be able to find such a characteristic that makes pious acts stand apart (Burrington, 2012, p.3). What I also find necessary when defining piety in such a way is to provide a formulation of justice or moral rightness which is an incredibly difficult task in its own right; however, Socrates and Euthyphro do not try to accomplish that.

We will write a custom Essay on Euthyphro: Concept of Holiness and Piety specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Final attempts at definition In the end , Euthyphro makes two more attempts at giving Socrates a satisfactory answer. Firstly, he argues that when acting piously, people look after the gods. Socrates immediately spots that such a definition would imply that in each particular action people contribute to one particular god which makes him stand out from the rest of the gods, which is something that gods forbid.

Secondly, Euthyphro also mentions that humans act piously in order to satisfy gods so that they could pray to gods, and expect them to grant their wishes in return (Burrington, 2012, p. 3). Following Kant’s deontology, I would say that if this were true, it would move the notion of piety from the domain of morality to the domain of rationality. This is because if one performs an action in order to profit from it, then it is a merely rational action, which involves no moral value.

Kant says that an action counts as moral only if a person performs it because they feel that it is their duty to act in that particular manner (Kant


Comparison of Renaissance Works of Art Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

The renaissance period can be described as an era in which great works of art, especially paintings by great artists, were produced. This paper endeavors to compare and contrast two paintings from this period, one appearing on a website and the other from a study textbook.

The two paintings are The Last Communion of St. Jerome by Sandro Botticelli, and The Adoration of the Magi by Leonardo da Vinci. The comparison will look at the paintings’ form, their subject matter, their content, and how they fit into the context of that particular time period.

The Adoration of the Magi is a two-dimensional painting that was painted using oil on a wood panel measuring 246 by 243 centimeters. The exact date of the painting is not known, but is estimated to have taken place sometime between 1481 and 1483. The technique that Leonardo da Vinci used in this painting, therefore, became a trendsetter in the art revolution of the time.

This is seen in the manner in which figures are given a presentation in the painting. In this painting, Mary and her son easily come out as the center piece, surrounded by many people at the scene. The colors used in the painting are yellow, ochre and brown (Delahunt, 2010).

In comparison, The Last Communion of St. Jerome is a three-dimensional painting that was painted on wood with gold and tempera, with dimensions of 34.3 by 25.4 centimeters. Its exact date of painting is also not known, with estimates placing it at sometime in the early 1490s. The suffused lights filtering through the hut’s grayish green wicker frame highlight the sense of concentration and intimacy in the painting. In contrast, the furniture and fabrics are depicted by vibrant colors.

The green-brown robes worn by acolytes put emphasis on the grey-freckled, dark brown tunics of the two young monks. The priest’s red planet is repeated with a stronger shade in the cardinal’s hat. In addition, the priest’s gold and blue dalmatic echoes the blue cloth that the saint kneels on (Frank, 2010).

The Adoration of the Magi definitely has a strong subject matter. This painting shows Mary and her son Jesus surrounded by a crowd of men and women and the tree of life. One can also see knights in combat, an indication of the fall of paganism and the rise of Christian faith. The painting is an abstract work of art. This is because it has been taken out from elements that are found in the observed world, but no longer represent a particular person or object that can be found in this observed world (Delahunt, 2010).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, in The Last Communion of St. Jerome, Botticelli depicts the last moments of the life of St Jerome attempting to capture a scene of serenity and peace. The scene includes a gabled hut in which the saint is confined in as a cell, with the only hint of severe suffering being seen in the elderly saint’s face.

The painting is a representation of the moment in which Jerome is lying on a sheet made from linen. He has gathered around him his companions from the monastery and is asking for the body of Christ from one of his brothers (Frank, 2010).

The painting matches with the written text concerning the incident. This is seen in the way the epistle recalled that Jerome asked his companions to assist him in getting to his feet when he saw the priest coming closer to him. He also testifies his faith in Jesus Christ, whose blood and body are present in the wafer.

Additionally, he speaks against Christians who take the Holy Communion despite their several instances of sinning. He also speaks passionately against unworthy priests. He concludes with a recital of several prayers, and a complete confession. The Last Communion of St. Jerome is a representation work of art since it represents something that is, or was, observable in the real world at the time (Frank, 2010).

In The Adoration of the Magi, Leonardo da Vinci sends a message to Christians everywhere that the king of heaven is Jesus Christ, who is to be worshiped by everyone on earth, including kings. Symbolism is used prominently in the painting. The rocky landscape indicated in the background, together with the combating knights seen on horsebacks, points to symbolism.

The rocky landscape is symbolism of the ruins of King David’s palace. This is meant to symbolize the fall of King David as the king, to pave the way for Jesus Christ, who would be the new king to be worshipped by everyone, including King David himself. On the other hand, the combating knights symbolize the fall of paganism to pave the way for the rise of Christianity under Jesus Christ (Delahunt, 2010).

The message that artist Botticelli wishes to pass in the painting The Last Communion of St. Jerome is the meditation or reflection on St Jerome. The painting encourages the viewer to reflect and mediate. However, Botticelli assumed that the viewers would have knowledge about the life and times of Saint Jerome. For a viewer to understand the message, he would have to know the details concerning Saint Jerome’s life.

We will write a custom Essay on Comparison of Renaissance Works of Art specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The painting also has elements of symbolism as seen in the precise symbols present. One of the symbols is that of Jesus Christ, which symbolizes the source of living water as well as the spiritual rock for Christians. It can also symbolize Christ as the good shepherd. There are also some symbols that remind the painting’s viewer of certain moments in the life of Saint Jerome, such as the lion in the painting. The application of a lion in renaissance art is largely associated with Saint Jerome (Frank, 2010).

The painting Adoration of the Magi fits perfectly into the context of the time period in which it was painted. Leonardo da Vinci did the painting during the late 15th century, a time when Christianity was on the rise. At the time, Christianity was taking its root in Europe, with early Christians trying to recruit new followers, or convert pagans and nonbelievers into the religion. The painting contributed a lot to what Christianity is today, by depicting the birth of Jesus Christ as the future king (Delahunt, 2010).

On its part, The Last Communion of St. Jerome shares a similar time period context with of The Adoration the Magi. While the latter portrays the birth of Jesus Christ as the leader of Christianity, the former portrays a saint passing on the teachings of Christianity, such as the taking of the Holy Communion.

References Delahunt, M. (2010). Examples of earlier Renaissance works of art – by artists born before 1470. ArtLex on the Earlier Renaissance Art. Web.

Frank, P.L. (2010). Prebles’ Artforms: An Introduction to the Visual Arts. New York, NY: Prentice Hall.


Euthanasia and Human’s Right to Die Essay essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

Euthanasia as a Murder

Euthanasia as the Way to Make People Free from Pain


Introduction People have an explicit right to die. However, modern science and medicine try to reject this fact or at least to put off the day of human death. Still, there are cases when people have to choose whether to live or to die, and it is twice difficult when one is unable to make such a decision and relatives have to decide instead of him/her. Euthanasia is the topic for discussion. Being one of the most contestable issues, the quarrel around this problem does not stop.

Both sides of the problem have personal vision of the situation, and none of them wants to agree with the opposite argumentation. Euthanasia is an ethical issue as modern equipment allows medical establishments to support life almost forever. This is incorrect due to the law of God, therefore, switching off all the equipment, people follow God’s decision and give a person an opportunity to die in piece.

Euthanasia as a Murder There are a lot of reasons why euthanasia should be prohibited. First of all, modern science is aimed at creating various means for prolonging human life.

When relatives refer to euthanasia they kill a person as there are variants for him/her to stay alive. The possibilities of a human organism are not studied up to the end. There are a lot of cases when a person was agreed by doctors to be more dead than alive, but after it one continues living for many years. Medicine is aimed at giving people a chance to live, and euthanasia is the measure which kills them.

Human life is sacred. Ceasing human life means murder. Doctors are mistaken sometimes and the prognosis may be not that bad as doctors say. Many patients themselves sign up the permission for euthanasia as they are afraid of pain and obscurity. Still, I am inclined to think that all these reasons do not work when a person is almost dead and in case all the equipment is switched off he/she is unable to live.

Euthanasia as the Way to Make People Free from Pain Euthanasia is not a murder, it is the way to release a person from pain. People have a sacred right to die and if God is sure that death should take place, neither modern medical achievements nor scientific equipment may help. When life is impossible without modern medical equipment, when a person is unable to breathe, eat, drink, have blood pressure, etc. without medical assistance this is not a life, it is a survival.

In this case a patient is unable to make decisions, however, it is obvious that everyone would better die than live without any sign of life. Choosing euthanasia as the way out, relatives usually think about a patient and his/her interests. What is better for a patient, a lengthy existence without reasonable signs of life or death which may be not the end? I suppose death is better in this case as when there are no chances for a person to lead normal life, it is better not to lead it at all.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Conclusion In conclusion, it should be stated that there are several arguments in favor of euthanasia which cannot be covered by those who are against it. The main argument is that people are created by God and they cannot decide whether a person should live or not. Trying to support human life with the help of modern equipment is a good idea, however, not in case there are no chances for a person to live without that equipment. In this case euthanasia is a release.


Oatmeal Company Marketing Mix Research Paper best essay help

Table of Contents Marketing Considerations for Quaker oats

The Customer’s Importance

Product Differentiation

Product promotion


Marketing Considerations for Quaker oats The art of marketing starts when a product is produced, and stops when the product is transferred to the open market. Marketing strategy determines how a product is sold. A well-planned marketing strategy influences the sale and profit of products. For product such as Quaker oats, the market is a homogenous one and the chance for a close substitute is slim.

Quaker oats is a seasonal product, and that means it sells better at varying times. The presence and sustainability of the product can guarantee its sale for a very long time (Chris


The Emergence of a Law of Slavery in Mississippi Research Paper best essay help: best essay help

Tushnet, Mark V. The American Law of Slavery 1810-1860 Considerations of Humanity and Interest, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1981. Print.

Mark Tushnet has conducted a thorough and has presented it in a book The American Law of Slavery 1810-1860 Considerations of Humanity and Interest. This book presents a thorough analysis of different cases where black slaves were involved.

One of the main disadvantages of Mark Tushnet’s writing is that he does not present a strict division of the cases according to their geographical location. Thus, the author dwells upon the court cases involved black slaves in Alabama, Mississippi, Louisiana and Georgia. The court cases point at the development of the slavery law in these states.

Trying to distinguish the cases related to the Mississippi state, the following aspects were considered, murders, robberies, assaults, labor law, etc. Even though the source under consideration is poorly structured and the information in many cases is vague, the data presented in the book is important in understanding the law of slavery emergence.

Turning to the analysis of the book and the cases presented there with the purpose to understand the process of the emergence of the law of slavery in Mississippi, it should be stated that this source is rather confusing as the cases presented there and called “illustrative and not typical” (Tushnet 223).

However, the cases do not have the time limits, it is very difficult to understand when the case took place, therefore, the timeline of the accepted laws cannot be followed using this source. Tushnet ignores some important cases pointing to the fact that there is a great “volume of the material” (Tushnet 233). However, these cases are important as they show the general aspects and directions of the law of slavery in Mississippi state.

Conducting a further research and trying to understand what specific information can be considered from the source, the reader should pay attention to the particular cases discussed in the book. The cases are devoted to various situations when black slaves were convicted in committing specific crimes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More One of the main crimes which were committed and discussed in the court trials were the murders, robbery, violence, rapes, attempt to escape and absence of the specific certificates of registration which could give slaves freedom. The author of the book presented the cases where judges were either amateur or very prejudiced people whose decisions were always on the side of white parties. The author calls judges “merely ordinary thinkers” (Tushnet 7) who were unable to make fair decisions.

Even though slaves were on the territory from the day of the community emergence, the slaves had some rights. However, the development of the court system in the region and the appearance of the specific cases where slaves were involved into made the community authorities to reconsider the law. Each time new crime involving a black slave was taken to the court, a new law in the legislative system appeared.

Slaves were one of the categories of people who did not have ay rights. A crime committed by a slave was punished more severely than the same crime committed by a black person. Most of the evidence which was used for defending a black slave was not include din the case, judges just ignored most of the arguments which could protect a slave. The book shows that slaves did not have any rights and the cases discussed in the book and which were used for creating the law for slaves proves this statement.

One more specific aspect devoted to the law of slavery in the book is the labor law. The author dwells upon numerous cases where slaves were either injured or killed in the industrial accidents. It should be stated that such cases were the main reasons for creating the labor legislation where slaves did not have any rights at all. Each case creates some new law in the legislation. Thus, each time Mississippi state created more and more laws devoted to slavery in the region.

Race and class were the main identifiers of the particular decision. The author of the book draws a conclusion that the law of slavery in Mississippi was unprofessional, the court system was not ideal and the general legislature in relation to slaves was prejudiced. Not many resources are devoted to slavery and the book by Tushnet helps understand what specific cases were considered in Mississippi legislation, how cases were solved, whether the court system in the state was ideal and how people reacted to the situation.

White authorities and other white citizens of Mississippi were sure that slaves did not nave any rights and they do not have any opportunity to do anything to remain legally active. The whole legislative system was created during several years and numerous court cases prove it. When a new situation appeared and was taken to the court, a decision was made not in favor of slaves. Further, a new point in the law of slavery appeared.

Finkelman, Paul. Slavery and the Law, New Jersey: Madison House, 1997. Print.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Emergence of a Law of Slavery in Mississippi specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Slavery and the Law is a book edited by Paul Finkelman. This book gathers many specific articles devoted to slavery is different places. Not much information is devoted to Mississippi state, however, that information which is present deserves much attention and may be discussed for a long period of time.

It should be stated that he law of slavery in the mentioned above stated was created since the time of the state emergence, however, some laws were added further on the basis of the specific court cases which took place in the country and which were solved in favor of white people. All the cases where slaves were involved supported whites. There were many reasons for such attitude.

Reading the source under consideration, the following words may be stressed, slaves, “Negroes are an inferior caste, incapable of the blessings of free government, and occupying, in the order of nature, an intermediate state between the irrational animal and the white man” (Finkelman 57).

Calling black slaves the alien enemies, the author of the source wants to underline that slaves did not have any rights. This was the main concept of the law of slavery in Mississippi. Reading the information in the book, it is possible to conclude that the position of the Mississippi slaves was the most severe as they did not have any rights.

There were black people in America who were free, however, the authorities of the Mississippi state were sure that black people did not deserve to be free, they did not deserve to have opinion, and to be equal to white people. Slavery existed in Mississippi from the very inhabitance of the region, therefore, the main laws were crated may years ago.

The racist conception was the main in curt decision making. Moreover, the relation to slaves was not good. A slave was nothing, it was like an animal who did not have the right to speak until he/she is asked, etc.

One of the main reason according to which the law of slavery was created is that if to give freedom to black slaves, people appear at risk to lose their own freedom. Such philosophy was the central in formation of the law of slavery in Mississippi. The implementation of the racist conception may be explained by the history of slaves emergence in the region.

From the first day of the emergence of the Mississippi community, black people were considered as slaves. Even without any laws, black people were subjected to performing the activities they did not want to perform. However, having no choice, black people did what they were told. The racial discrimination was obvious from the first days of the community existence, therefore, all the legal acts and decisions which made further were based on the specific consideration of black slaves as those who have neither rights nor freedoms.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Emergence of a Law of Slavery in Mississippi by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The racial discrimination, and the law of slavery in the form as it was presented, was based on the idea that black slaves were unable to fell and think like white people could. Why do black slaves need freedom if they were unable to use it? Why did black slaves were offered the rights if they did not know what those right could offer to them. Such prejudiced point of view about black people created existed situation.

White people were sure that black slaves were unable to make personal decisions, therefore, they did not consider it necessary to give them such an opportunity. “The free black man lives amongst us without motive and without hope. He seeks no avocation, is surrounded with necessities, is sunk in degradation; crime can sink him no deeper and he commits if of course” (Finkelman 58). This phrased used in the book underlines the author’s idea about slavery and the attitude of the society to it.

Speaking abut this book as about the source devoted to the emergence of a law of slavery in Mississippi, it should be stated that it is rather complicated to find the information which is devoted to the topic directly. Being a good source for slavery, the book contains legal cases which involved slaves as one of the parties of the situation. The authors in this edited book speak about different situation related to slaves and how the courts drew decisions.

The source is not really effective as it contains little information about slavery in Mississippi, however, the emergence of law of slavery in general is perfectly discussed in this book. Applying to this source as for discussing the topic of emergence of law of slavery in Mississippi, it should be used in the introduction to dwell upon slavery in general, to discuss the relation to slaves and the general laws which existed in Southern America.

Davis, Dernoral. “A Contested Presence: Free Blacks in Antebellum Mississippi, 1820–1860.” Mississippi History Now, 2012. Web.

Dernoral Davis in his article “A Contested Presence: Free Blacks in Antebellum Mississippi, 1820–1860” dwells upon the history of development the law of slavery in such specific place as Mississippi. The author states that this territory comprised four groups of people from the time of Mississippi inhabitance. Indians, whites, slaves, and free blacks were the main groups of people who lived in the state.

There was a law according to which black slaves could buy freedom for themselves. Moreover, some slaves could become free if slaveholders freed them. Still, this law lasted not for a long time. Starting with 1825, black slaves were not given such an opportunity, moreover, it was considered as illegal.

Thus, it may be said that starting with 1825 the cases of slaves being freed were too rare. Moreover, those slaves who managed to buy freedom up to 1825 had to appear before the court and to prove their rights for freedom. Each free black person had to have a certificate of registration, otherwise, he/she appeared at risk to be jailed. After that, these people were sold at the auction as slaves. The slavery laws in Mississippi did not give rights for slaves to become free. There was a little number of free black people.

The new free blacks could become only in case a child is born from a free black mother. Black slaves could become free through the petitions for emancipation. Such option became possible with the law dated from 1822. The laws of slavery in Mississippi have remained in power until the 21st century. Mississippi is the hardly the only place where the laws of slavery remained and were successfully used in the civilized world.

Reference List Davis, Dernoral. “A Contested Presence: Free Blacks in Antebellum Mississippi, 1820–1860.” Mississippi History Now, 2012. Web.

Finkelman, Paul. Slavery and The Law, New Jersey: Madison House, 1997. Print.

Tushnet, Mark V. The American Law of Slavery 1810-1860 Considerations of Humanity and Interest, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1981. Print.


Relationship Between Modern Imperialism and Economic Globalization Essay cheap essay help

Introduction Globalization of the economy has played a vital role in shaping the post-war period. Over the last fifty years, international trade in services and goods has increased tremendously. In addition, international financial flows have also increased immensely. The rise of modern imperialism has a close relationship with economic globalization.

The two concepts can be linked to each other in various ways. Although globalization may be taken to mean developments that have occurred in the recent past (especially in the period from 1990s), the focus of globalization should be long term since it relates to the formation of the modern world through imperialism (Hepp 40-100).

The relationship between economic globalization and modern imperialism Modern imperialism and globalization can be regarded as aspects that came to being with the intention of changing the world as well as interpreting the world. In many international forums, modern imperialism and economic globalization have taken centre stage due to the links, which exist between the two concepts. First, economic globalization relates to modern imperialism in that the origin of the two concepts dates back to 500 years ago.

During this time, activities such as European imperialism, which started at a local level, became regional and eventually international, thus contributing to economic globalization. For example, imperialism can be associated with the establishment of a free market, which has become a common phenomenon in the arena of economic globalization. The expansion of the global economy has become a widespread phenomenon as a result of imperialism (Hepp 40-100).

Modern imperialism also relates to economic globalization in that imperialism carried out by European nations led to the worldwide spread of the spirit of capitalism. This has played a significant role in economic globalization as it led to the establishment of global empires, which started during the 1500s. Modern imperialism also relates to economic globalization in that the European and Western powers emphasized on civilization, as they spread in most parts of the world; this ultimately led to economic globalization.

The spread of European imperialism meant that most of the structures in society had to be rearranged. For example, politics and the economy got rearranged through imperialism. As a result, there was the introduction of new technology and new ways of doing things in the corporate world. This has had significant contributions to economic globalization (Fernandez-Armesto 674-685).

The interactions between countries, which are enhanced through modern imperialism, contribute to economic globalization. Modern imperialism has also contributed to economic globalization through flows in international trade. As a result of imperialism, financial flows have become common in the economy of the world. (Fernandez-Armesto 674-685). The global economy witnessed significant changes during the 18th century.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More During this time, there was widespread trade between the European and Asian countries as rulers from Europe expressed a lot of interest in goods manufactured in Asia. This resulted to trade in goods such as silk, cotton, tea and spices. This trade in goods contributed significantly to the aspect of globalization as it speeded up economic globalization.

Modern imperialism has also played a role in ensuring that there is speculation in far as international finance is concerned. As a result, people have purchased assets with the hope that the value of the assets will rise in the future since there is a global economy. The trade avenues provided by modern imperialism ensure that there is a reduction in the cost of financial transactions internationally.

Consequently, investors have been able to access international markets, as well as foreign markets, which are outside their home country. This plays a crucial role in enhancing economic globalization, as it has become possible to carry out transactions with other people in various parts of the world (Hepp 40-100).

Modern imperialism can be termed as the reason behind the liberalization taking place in financial markets. This liberalization has contributed significantly to financial investment; consequently, this enhances economic globalization. After the end of the Second World War in 1945, there was the establishment of international powers and this altered the international economy.

The economic system established after 1945 did away with the systems that existed in the interwar period. Economic globalization spread widely after World War II; this phenomenon had started in the nineteenth century and went up to the twentieth century. The economic activities carried out by the developed countries during the post-war era contributed to modern globalization (Attack par. 1-13).

Imperialism also relates to the aspect of economic globalization with respect to the formation of political ideologies and blocs after World War II. With each bloc aiming to outperform the other, economic globalization became deeply rooted as a result of the competition between the two blocs. The Soviet Union led bloc mostly comprised of countries in the Middle East and Asia, as well as those in Eastern Europe and it advocated for communism.

On the other hand, the bloc led by the United States of America advocated for a capitalist form of economy. Each bloc spread its ideals to various parts of the world, thus contributing to economic globalization. Of most importance was the role played by capitalism in spreading economic globalization. With its advocacy of a free market, capitalism led to economic globalization in the sense that international trade became a reality (Fernandez-Armesto 674-685).

We will write a custom Essay on Relationship Between Modern Imperialism and Economic Globalization specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The first phase of globalization is believed to have taken place before the post-war period, with economic globalization being witnessed between 1875 and 1914. The industrialization witnessed during this period made notable contributions to the commercialization of the world economy, thus leading to economic globalization.

Imperialism led to the rise of new centres of agricultural and industrial production. As a result, millions of people migrated in search of better jobs and desirable living conditions. This migration of people from European countries to such destinations as United States, Brazil, and Canada transformed the international economic structure (Hepp 40-100).

Modern imperialism led to a sharp rise in economic globalization after the end of the Second World War. Since the war had led to the shattering of the world economy, countries such as the United States and Britain aimed at repairing the international economy. As a result, multinational corporations dominated the production as well as distribution of goods all over the world.

Economic globalization took shape with the introduction of modern technology. For example, the advancement of information technologies such as computers led to the ease of access to information through the internet. Other factors that contributed to economic globalization included the invention of the airplane and the telephone (Hepp 40-100).

Conclusion While concluding this study, it is worth noting that there exists a strong relationship between economic globalization and modern imperialism. As developed nations aimed at spreading their ideals to the developing world, economic globalization was born. Today, the effects of globalization can be felt in almost every part of the world. With globalization, international trade has become a reality; farmers in the developing countries have access to international markets where they can market their farm produce.

Works Cited “Attack at Pearl Harbor, 1941,” Eyewitness to History, 1997. Web. http://www.eyewitnesstohistory.com/hiroshima.htm

Fernandez-Armesto, Felipe. The World – A Brief History, Combined Volume. New Jersey, NJ: Pearson, 2009. Print.

Hepp, John. Historical Foundations of the Modern World: Imperialism and economic globalization. Pennsylvania: Wilkes University, 2012. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Relationship Between Modern Imperialism and Economic Globalization by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Les Demoiselles d’Avignon – Picasso – 1907 Essay college admissions essay help

Les Demoiselles d’Avignon – Picasso – 1907

Abstract art, especially the work of Pablo Picasso, is always subject to individual interpretation yet always contains an underlying theme that expresses the “message” that the artist is attempting to convey to the viewer. It is due to this that before meticulously analyzing a particular painting it is important to first understand the inherent themes that that artist has placed into his previous work in order to gain a better perspective on what message he is trying to convey in the painting that is being examined.

What must be understood when examining the work of Picasso is the fact that his work is more symbolic rather than representative. It represents a combination of views created in an abstract way which cannot be possibly rendered in a classical artistic representation due to the diversity of subjects involved (Carbon et al., 191).

In this particular case it can be seen that the artist has chosen to utilize both curved, straight and angular lines in this piece in order to depict the characters involved. What must be understood is that the use of these particular line forms are intentional in that Picasso attempted to exaggerate aspects of the feminine body utilizing these particular line styles.

This can be seen in his use of sharp angular lines in this depiction of breasts while smooth and curving lines to depict the thighs, ass and arm all of which are commonly associated with a woman’s most appealing traits. what is unusual though in this case is his use of geometric shapes in the piece namely triangles which are evident in almost every single part of the painting if one were to take into account the requirements of a triangle namely an angled object with three sides.

Mass in this particular case is implied through the use of lines while the concept of space here seems to be rather minimal, almost inhibited in that the artist apparently tried to portray the subjects in this piece as being contained within a single room.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In fact in its portrayal of space the subjects in the painting are portrayed as being within a two dimensional space with little application of overall depth to the piece. The perspective in this particular case does not seem to be one where a viewer merely looks at the painting but apparently there seems to a certain type of “reverse” in this case wherein it is the painting that is look at the viewer.

This is apparent by the perspective of the subjects within it that apparently stare straight out at the viewer. What must also be taken into consideration when examining the painting itself is that the characters are apparently frozen in position gazing out at viewers but there is a certain degree of “motion” within the piece itself wherein the various subjects seemingly flow into each other. It must be noted though that the use of light is not quite used as much within the painting itself and is in fact strangely absent.

There is a certain illusion of the presence of light through the changes in tone from the bottom towards the top but it is very slight and not really an important aspect of the painting itself. On the basis of its design principle the painting has discontinuities on multiple levels with an apparent elision of limbs in one instance, abbreviation in another and sudden cleaving of the flesh and an apparent stylistic shift in the end.

In fact it was apparently the goal of the artist to create little perceived balanced in the painting and instead focused on emphasizing the sexuality of the subjects through the exaggeration of their feminine qualities. What must be understood is that this particular piece of art doesn’t follow what one would normally call “standard” aspects of design due to its abstract nature.

This is seen through the use of repeated triangle elements within the piece, the odd variation of colors ranging from flesh to white to brown in the subjects and the fact that scales and proportion seem slightly off. Based on this it can be seen that the goal of the artist for this particular piece was to initially shock viewers and then have them experience the effects of the reverse gaze.

What must be understood is that the painting itself is based off the concept of looking at whores within a prostitute den but due to the effect of the reverse gaze a reversal is done wherein it is not the viewer that is looking at the whores in question but rather the whores that are looking at the viewer.

Spooning Couple – Ron Mueck – 2005

We will write a custom Essay on Les Demoiselles d’Avignon – Picasso – 1907 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Examining the Spooning Couple In this examination what is observed is the hyper-realistic sculpture “the Spooning Couple” by Ron Mueck. As it can be seen from the picture shown above, the sculpture shows a couple in the act of “spooning” which is classified as a mild form of sexual interaction, however, when observing the sculpture there are multiple aspects that seem out of place. For instance, the expressions on the subjects within the sculpture are not of a couple sleeping, they are wide awake as evidenced by their open eyes.

Not only that, the love and affection that is normally associated with spooning is strangely absent from their face and what is present is merely an expression of deep thought rather than passion and lust. Further observations of the sculpture reveal strange discrepancies such as the woman wearing panties while the bottom half of the man is unclothed while the opposite is also true wherein the top half of the woman is unclothed yet the top half of the man is clothed.

This I believe is not a mere choice of aesthetics on the part of the artist but an essential aspect of the message that the sculpture was meant to impart. From a certain perspective, it can be assumed that the lack the of expression on the face of the subjects of the sculpture is related to their strangely clothed and unclothed state.

Since spooning is usually done after a certain degree of sexual interaction, the clothing on the bottom half of the woman and the top half of the man is indicative of a barrier between the two when it comes to sexual relations. Combined with the lack of sufficient contact (i.e. the man is not placing his hand around the woman) this is indicative of a lack of passion between the two.

It should also be noted that the pensiveness in the expression of both subjects within the sculpture may in fact be a way of them contemplating their current situation (Amy, 132). When taking such factors into consideration it can be stated that the “Spooning Couple” is actually a way in which Mueck has chosen to represent a period in a couple’s life wherein the passion has gone out of their relationship and they are merely stuck with each other.

The pensive expressions on their faces could actually be them thinking “how did we get this way”, “what did we do wrong”, “what should I do”, and “will it always be like this”? In short, Mueck has captured the essence of the evaporation of passion and has brought it out for the entire world to see.

Since such aspects are normally kept private between two people, this is a way in which Mueck has enabled the world to see just what it is like. From a certain perspective “the Spooning Couple” is a piece of art that resonates with many individuals today since a large percentage of present day couples have experienced moments where the passion in their married lives has simply evaporated.

Strategies Utilized by Artists When looking at the work by Picasso and by Mueck, it can be immediately seen that both artists utilize completely different mediums in getting their message across. In the case of Picasso he utilized the reverse gaze of people being stared at by prostitutes in order to make them feel what it was like to be stared at.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Les Demoiselles d’Avignon – Picasso – 1907 by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Mueck on the hand utilized a realistic sculpture in order to invoke a certain degree of familiarity among people in relationships who have felt that their passion has fizzled out. Overall, both works were successful in their individual strategies in utilizing sexual elements in order to convey a much deeper truth.

Works Cited Amy, Michaël. “Ron Mueck At The Brooklyn Museum.” Art In America 95.4 (2007): 132. MasterFILE Premier. Web.

Carbon, Clark et al. “When a Picasso is a “Picasso”: The entry point in the identification of visual art.” Acta Psychologica 133.2 (2010): 191-202. Academic Search Premier. EBSCO. Web.


The Purpose of College Athletics Essay best essay help: best essay help

Introduction Universities and colleges in the United States benefit from athletics more than the student-athlete does. Although the students get an opportunity to explore their talents while they are still young, they end up benefiting the colleges more than they benefit themselves.

This topic is important because from the studies undertaken by the researchers, it has been confirmed that colleges benefit more from athletics at the expense of student-athletes who in addition to paying school fees, for those not sponsored, bring revenue to the institution and get no pay.

The first part of the essay discusses the benefits the institutions of higher learning derive from the student-athletes in the United States. The second part shows why the student-athletes should be paid in the United States Universities by discussing the negative impacts in their lives when they participate in the college athletics. At Idaho State University, a football coach who abused a player and went unpunished is used as an example to show how student are abused at the time of bringing revenue to the college.

Benefits of college athletes to the institutions of higher learning in the United States Michael Martin, the chancellor of Louisiana State University pointed out the benefits of the college athletics to the institutions of higher learning in the United States.

He said that despite the fact that they lost to the University of Alabama at the college football championship, the school gained a massive exposure because the event was aired in the national and international television stations. He was arguing that one of the benefits that the college derives from the college athletics is the marketing of the college to the potential students, sponsors and any other form of assistance to the college (Robe, 2012).

Martin also argued that the televised college athletics events contribute to the full achievement of the academic mission. He responded by saying that during the breaks where the players rest, advertisements about the school’s mission, vision, core functions and the principles will boost the academic performance of the school because the viewers of the game will get a chance to know about the academic programs offered by the participating college. Some may decide to enroll in the school from the programs they have seen during the resting time (Robe, 2012).

The good performance by the student-athlete is attributed to the University and not the student athlete. When a company approaches the institution to advertise their products through the student-athletes, all the revenue obtained goes to the university and not to the student.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is corruption because the students do not earn money even after generating much income for the college. This scandal in the United States was alleged to be done by the National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA), two of the former United States Olympic Committee and the various universities’ heads (Branch, 2012).

Several United States universities’ administrators believe that the college’s success in athletics amounts to the university’s ability to attract high quality people in both academics and athletics. Due to the larger market they reach during the college athletics championship, a well performing college will stand a higher chance of recruiting many good performing students in both academics and athletics because many potential students will admire to be part of the successful college.

This success will not be attributed to the student-athlete but to the hosting institution. According to Allen, Boston College recorded an increase by 33 percent of the applicants to the college when Doug Flutie became a football star in the early 1980s (Mixon, 2004)

Negative effects of college athletics to the student-athlete The male students who participate in the college athletics is less recognized compared to the females who participate. Research shows that male students tend to engage in alcohol, partying and drug abuse more than they study during the college athletics. This effect is more pronounced in the lowly performing students and those who come from disadvantaged backgrounds. They argue that the sports, which take a considerable time in America, threaten the performance of students in institutions of higher learning (Robe, 2012).

Title IX is the gender-equity law that was passed by the congress and was meant to bridge the gap between men and women, which was increasing rapidly. In lieu of this law, many colleges and universities of higher learning in the United States established so many recreational sites and playing grounds for women to participate, which was not heard before enforcement of the law. College athletics have been used as an avenue through which this law is broken.

A survey conducted showed that many institutions claimed that the participants were women while in the real sense they were men. The best example is at Cornell, where it was not realized that out of the 34 participants who wore the masks on the women’s team, 15 of them were men. This was until they removed their masks (Katie, 2011.) In this regard, college women rights are undermined through the college athletics.

Through the college athletics, the coaches and the game organizers have abused many students-athletes. Mike Kramer, the Idaho university football coach pushed the player during the basketball practice. Kramer stopped in front of a player and yelled at him. Matters got worse when the attorney defending the coach threw this case away claiming that there were no enough medical records to show that the player was injured and no evidence from the other players and assistant coaches (Leonnig, 2012).

We will write a custom Essay on The Purpose of College Athletics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Despite the benefits drawn by the institution from the student-athletes and the challenges faced by the students who participate in the college athletics it is possible to assist the student-athletes to explore the talents bestowed upon them during their early stages of life. At the end, they might excel in the field and gain income from the sports. If student-athletes realize their full potential while at school, they may perform excellently in their field of expertise.

Conclusion There are more disadvantages than there are advantages for a student athlete studying in the United states Universities and colleges. Student-athletes benefit the institution they are enrolled in more than they benefit themselves. This argument has been supported by the benefits that accrue to the institution when a student participates in athletics and the negative impacts on the participating student.

Therefore, it is important for every student athlete to be paid in proportion to the revenue that he or she generates for the college. However, despite these challenges, the student will have a chance to explore the talent at the early stages supported by the college funds set aside for sports and discover the sporting activities that he or she can perform best.

References Branch, T. (2012). The Shame of College Sports. Boston: The Atlantic Monthly Group.

Katie, T. (2011). College teams, relying on deception, undermine gender equity: Gender game. New York. The New York Times.

Leonnig, C. (2012). Idaho State football coach Kramer will not face charges for pushing player. Washington: The Washington Post.

Mixon, F. (2004). Touchdowns and test scores: Exploring the relationship between athletics and academics. London: Routledge.

Robe, J. (2012). Rethinking the benefits of college athletics. Washington: Forbes.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Purpose of College Athletics by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


The White Immigrants in America Essay essay help online free

It is true that the whites, also known as Caucasians, are the dominant group in America. However, they are not a basis to understand the experiences of the minority groups. They only help get a glimpse of what the ethnic minority lacks. This is because they are the reason for the mediocre lives of the ethnic minority. The only way to understand the experiences of the ethnic minority is by learning about these specific ethnic minority groups.

Direct interaction with these groups is one way of achieving this. The white Americans lead better lives and their lifestyles cannot be used to understand that of the ethnic minority groups. Even though the whites have equal exposure to the best available privileges and opportunities, they vary in terms of socioeconomic status. I think that the skin color signifies a lot because by the mere fact of racial cross-breeding, discrimination does not end.

Some of the ethnic minorities are descents of European immigrant but their black color of African origin and non-white facial features alienates them. The dominance by the whites nonetheless has stood the tests of time. The whites in America are a mixture of various immigrant descents but despite the cross-breeding, the white Americans continue to dominate in the US. There are various definitions that in use when referring to the term whites/Caucasian.

One definition has it that the whites are of European immigrant descent while another more recent definition has it that the whites are descents of Europe, Middle East and North Africa. The latter definition is presumably due to constantly diversified racial categories of the whites. Hence, everyone with white characteristics based on his or her skin color or facial features is a white regardless of his or her primordial race. The fact that ethnic minority exists shows that ethnicity is very eminent in the U.S.

It is because of ethnicity that the whites hold socioeconomic power, and they don’t suffer from prejudice and discrimination. The American national identity is for the whites hence; they are the nationals of America. But even the ethnic minorities have a bearing on the white identity.

Thus, they should enjoy the same privileges as the “white Americans”. Just the same way Barack Obama of East African descent received an equal opportunity to seek the American presidential seat is the same way that the ethnic minorities should receive equal opportunities to seek high paying jobs.

To some extent, this instance supports the proposition that discrimination against the ethnic minority has decreased. The notion by most whites is in fact changing and they believe that they are a different people who respect everyone. This needs confirmation because in the U.S., despite the fact that some ethnic minorities hold high job positions, a high preference is toward the whites.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More High job positions, which are the basis for social power and wealth, are mostly held by the dominant ethnic groups. Structural discrimination is the reason for this kind of discrimination, which still exists in the U.S. As a way of clearing itself of discriminating against the ethnic minorities, white Americans point accusing fingers at structural discrimination.

The ethnic minorities are not aware of structural discrimination. According to them, structural discrimination exists only in the eyes of the whites. Much as they whites try to vindicate themselves of not being discriminative, the facts speak for themselves. The whites embrace ethnicity rooted in aspects such as skin color and social privileges, and because of these the less privileged in society (ethnic minorities) get looked down upon.


Tablet Computer Technology Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Introduction Tablets refer to mobile portable computers that embrace the most modern technology of touch screens. Such computers use the screen as the primary input mode though some have digital pens for data input. The screens are sensitive to touch and gravity.

Tablet computer technology consists in the fact that large computer components are shortened ensuring that their size is considerably reduced compared to the laptops or desktops; their efficiency is enhanced as well.

Hybrids are an improvement of the laptops since they have keyboards that can be detached from the main central processing unit. Slates, on the other hand, have an inbuilt keyboard engrafted in the system. Instead, slates wholesomely rely on the on-screen keyboard for the text input (Computers. n.d.).

Comparison of selected tablets Ipad 2

It runs on a CPU with A 5 microchip dual core together with a display of 9.7‑inch LED-backlit Multi-Touch display with IPS technology, and a resolution of 1024×768, 132 pixels per inch. It weighs 613g and runs on a MAC X v10.6.8 operating system with a storage capacity of 64 GB. This gadget currently retails for $499 (Tabletpccomparison, 2012)

Samsung galaxy note 10.1

This tablet runs on the latest android operation system (4.0 Ice cream sandwich). It has an internal memory of 16GB together with a quad core processor and a micro SD card slot for expanded storage of up to 50GB. It weighs less than 500g and operates on the technology of AMOLED display with a resolution of WVGA 800×480 and a detachable input pen. It retails for a price of $450 (Computers. n.d.).

LG G-Slate V909

Its price is $366. It is run by a dual core processor with a speed of 1 GHZ dual core (NVIDIA Tegra 2 T250). Its internal capacity is 32 GB with a RAM of 2 GB and an approximated weight of 1.45 pounds. The machine is operated by an android operating system.

Its screen resolution is 1,280×768 pixels. The gadget has a screen size of 8.9 inches and a display technology of thin film transistor liquid crystal display otherwise known as TFT technology (Tabletpccomparison, 2012)

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Toshiba Thrive 10 Tablet

The gadget costs about $400. It runs on the latest Android 3.2 honeycomb Operating system with a NVIDIA® Tegra™ 2 Dual-Core Processor (1GHZ dual core). It has a 16 GB memory capacity with a display of 10.1 high-resolution widescreen with (1280×800) pixels, LED Backlit, Multi-touch. Its weight is 10b.

Sony Tablet S

It runs on an android honeycomb operating system with a screen display of LED technology and 16:9 widescreen. The machine has a resolution of 1280×800 pixels together with a processor type: NVIDIA Tegra2 and approximated weight of 12b.The processor speed is 1GB. It has an internal storage capacity of 1 GB is sold at the price of $366.

All the tablets discussed above are very powerful gadgets. As a student though, my preference is the Samsung galaxy phone. This gadget offers a unique range of qualities that corresponds to my needs and interests. The four chips provide very high speed along with the powerful display and the pen input system. As a student interested in graphic designs, it gives me a gadget with an unprecedented capability to develop my designing skills. The machine has a humongous number of applications, and is also relatively affordable.

References Tabletpccomparison. (2012). Retrieved from https://www.tabletpccomparison.net/

Computers. eHow. Web.


Inside the Meet Lab: Analysis and Evaluation Essay best essay help: best essay help

Potential Advantages and Disadvantage of Introducing the Meat Lab The advanced development of science and technology allows the world to face the problem of fast-growing population. Due to the salient increase in the meat consumption, integrating the laboratories for growing in vitro meat seems to be reasonable. On the one hand, the production of the lab meat can satisfy the extreme demand for protein. On the other hand, the cultured product differs much from that grown in nature due to the absence of necessary microbes protecting the immune system.

The latter can be solved in case antibiotics are introduced, but this innovation requires significantly higher costs, which might not justify the overall production of artificial protein. With regard to the above-presented advantages and shortcomings, producing meat in laboratories can threaten to human health because of the possibility of creating a genetically modified product. The natural environment is much more appropriate for sustaining human wellbeing.

The laboratory conditions for producing cultured meat are not fully appropriate because most of cells are taken from rats, humans, and rhesus monkeys. Certainly, “culturing embryonic stem cells would be ideal for this purpose since these cells have an…infinite self-renewal capacity” (Bartholet 65).

To extract such cells is impossible without killing an animal, or doing harm to them. Moreover, producing artificial meat does not ensure a microbe free environment and, a result, any contamination is a serious threat to the experiment. In addition, there are no analogues of this kind of meat production in the world, which does not contribute to its reliability.

Unlike the lab meat, the production of natural meat is not so sophisticated and, therefore, it is more cost-effective. What is more important is that breeding domestic animals in an ecologically safe environment guarantees production of high quality meat. It is also possible to grow cattle and poultry at the specialized factories, doing no harm to the natural environment and excluding the threats to the human health.

Ensuring sufficient nutrition for livestock also alleviates the potential risk of producing a genetically modified product. Establishing strict standards of quality production is also a guarantor of good meat. Unlike the laboratory production of meat, the traditional techniques are less dangerous to nature because they do not involve use of specific technological processes.

Ethical and environmental concerns with producing artificial meat are also under the question. People are aware of the potential threats of producing food in laboratory conditions because the product might lead to serious disorders and diseases, including cancer. Therefore, the idea of cultured meat can be justified as soon as meat will go through all known tests and inspections.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Bartholet recognizes “social acceptance as the biggest barrier of all to producing in vitro meat on a commercial scale” (65). Apparently, the scientists should be aware that the people’s attitude to artificial protein might never be changed because there is a growing tendency in consuming natural food only.

Succinct overview of scientific explorations and discoveries in the sphere of artificial meat production reveals controversial conclusions. First, in vitro meat cannot substitute the natural meat because of the absence of the necessary micro flora. Second, the laboratory production is not cost-effective, as compared to the traditional one.

Finally, growing meat in laboratories cannot be socially accepted, which is the major barrier to commercial integration. Nevertheless, the scientists should spend a plethora of research studies to ensure that cultured meat is as healthy as the natural one before it is promoted to the market.

Works Cited Bartholet, Jeffrey. “Inside the Meat Lab.” Scientific American 304.6 (2011): 64-69. Web.


The Lifestyle of Salvador Dali Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Early Days of Dali

Entry into Surrealism and Rise to Success

Reaction to his Work and Personality


Works Cited

Introduction Salvador Dali has always been referred to as one of the greatest artists of the 20th century. Due to his great paintings and other works of art, some people have regarded Dali as the greatest Surrealist artist to ever live. However, when he was asked personally whether he considered himself the greatest artist in the world, Dali denied any allegations.

Actually, he used to refer himself as a bad artist and painter because of the fact that he was too intelligent (Hesse 41). Dali had a belief that for someone to become a good artist, he/she needs to be a bit insane (Hesse 41). Dali acknowledged the fact that the society loved his works. In one of his interviews, Dali stated that people regarded him as the best artist in the world because the other artists who were creating during the time he lived in were doing a very bad work (Hesse 45).

After having a successful career as an artist, a filmmaker, and a photographer, Dali retired, and went to his home town of Figueres in Spain, in a castle where his wife, Galo, had been buried (Genzmer 65). During this time, there was no clear inventory of his works. At the same time, the speed at which people were selling the replicas of his works in the world was very high.

However, Dali was not highly concerned with the success. At that time, he had lived an isolated and lonely life away from the public and his friends who he was close with during the early years of his life. This was perhaps because his mentor and the love of his life, Gala, was no longer there with him.

As such, this paper will expound on the life of Salvador Dali, namely, it will focus on his early life, the impacts that he had on Surrealism, the success of his works, the way the society regarded Dali as well as his works and, finally, the criticisms that he received regarding his personal life as well as his paintings; the paper will also highlight on his personal life, how he developed his talent in art, the factors that influenced him and led him to join the Surrealist movement, the impact his wife Gala had on his life as an artist, and his life after leaving Surrealism.

The Early Days of Dali Salvador Dali was born on 11 May, 1904. He shared the same name with his father and elder brother who had died in 1903 because of meningitis. His father was the only solicitor in Catalina. As a result of the influence that he had and the respect that he had earned from the community, he hoped that his son, Dali, would take up his profession, and continue with his work to enhance his legacy.

However, this never came to be true as Dali pursued other interests in life. Consequently, the two had a tense relationship. His mother, Felipa Domenech, was a strong Christian professing the Roman Catholic faith. To ensure that her children had strong foundations in life and developed desirable morals, she raised them in accordance with the practices of the church.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Dali was enrolled in the Christian school in Figueres. It is in this school that he discovered his passion for art. In his book, The Shameful Life of Dali, he highlights one of his earliest memories while at school. He is in class; he closes his eyes to come up with a spontaneous image. The vision that comes to his mind is of two tall cypress trees that were of relatively the same height. From his desk, he sees two more paintings.

One of these paintings was a picture of a fox that was coming out of a cabin. The other picture was a replica of Millet’s Angelus that was originally done by Jean-François in the 19th century. The theme and concepts behind this painting astonished young Dali, especially the motionless images of the man and the woman.

His imagination pictured the context and the main idea of this image that consisted in the fact that the woman is a virgin who is waiting to be married, and the man who is sexually attracted to the woman, is excited which is why he hides his arousal by the hat that he is holding in his hands. Millet’s Angelus played a critical role in the future works of Dali. He used such a concept in some of his works as a central theme to express his imagination (Genzmer 77).

Accompanied by his parents, Dali visited the gravesite of his brother when he was about five years old. Although the two had actually never met, there was an immense connection between Dali and his late brother. The two shared the same name. Due to the connections that both of them had, Dali used images of his brother in most of the works that he painted during his entire life.

For instance, in 1963, Dali painted an image that was dedicated to his brother, Portrait of My Dead Brother (Genzmer 79). In his book, the Secret Life of Dali, he stated that, “…we resembled each other like two drops of water, but we had different reflections. He was probably a first version of myself but conceived too much in the absolute” (Dali 2).

As a young boy, Dali suffered from asthma. His condition became worse with time, perhaps due to the environment of his home area. To make sure their son lived in a good environment, his parents took Dali to live with one of their family friends, Ramon Pichot, who lived in the country.

Pichot was a modern painter; his house was a converted mill with a tower. During the time spent together with the Pichot family, Dali’s imagination and talent were at his zenith. He loved to spend most of his time at the top of the tower. There, he would imagine himself as a dictator or a tyrant. Being the leader in his dreams, Dali regarded all the subjects surrounding him as slaves for the fulfillment of his personal and egocentric thirst for power, control of people and respect.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Lifestyle of Salvador Dali specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Dali had been having these imaginations since the time he lived with his parents in Figueres. Other than having these imaginations, it is at the Pichot’s house that Dali’s talent in art was discovered. The dining room of the Pichot home was decorated with art paintings, all of which were originals. The family was also renowned for their eccentric work in music and art. Under the influence and the directions of Ramon Pichot, Dali started painting.

According to Dali, the fact that he attended a drawing school gave him the opportunity to explore his imagination that was earlier not very bright and vivid due to the absence of an academic education. In his earlier days when he was living with his parents, his mother had noticed his passion for art and had encouraged him to draw. However, the excellence that Ramon identified in his works was remarkable.

It is due to this fact that the Pichot family persuaded Dali’s father to enroll him in the Academy of Fine Arts in Madrid for the teenager to fully identify, develop and explore his talent in art. His father was always reluctant to this idea probably because he wanted his son to follow his career steps. However, after a number of Ramon Pichot’s persuasions, he agreed for Dali to join the Academy of Fine Arts in Madrid in 1922 (Creed 14)

Prior to his enrolment in the Academy of Fine Arts, Dali faced another challenge in his life, the death of his mother. Felipa Domenech died in early 1921 from breast cancer. She was Dali’s mentor in life. She believed in him and supported him in almost everything that he did.

Dali had a profound love for his mother, and the fact that she had gone had a huge psychological impact on the teenager. Dali described the death of his mother as, “…the greatest blow I had experienced in my life. I worshipped her… I could not resign myself to the loss of a being on whom I counted to make invisible the unavoidable blemishes of my soul” (Dali 153).

His greatest fear, however, was the fact that his mother would be completely forgotten by people by the people. As a result, Dali vowed that he would go out of his length to ensure that his name would never be forgotten. This was perhaps the main source of motivation that made him become a successful artist in his later life leaving behind a career of solicitor his father had always wanted him to follow.

In 1922, Dali moved to Madrid where he joined the Academy of Fine Arts. It is in this institution that the life of Dali both as an individual and as an artist began to take form. While interacting with other students, he developed strong friendship bonds with people who would later become influential figures in Spain and the world at large.

However, the friendship that he made with Luis Bunuel and Federico Garcia Lorca was the most important since they played a critical role in establishing his future life (Rodriguez 34). Luis Bunuel was a student of the Natural History Department.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Lifestyle of Salvador Dali by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More He would later on end up becoming one of the most successful filmmakers and directors in Spain. Federico Garcia, on the other hand, was a writer and a poet. By the time Dali met him, Spain had already commenced recognizing his talent in writing. While living in the campus of the Academy of Arts in Madrid, Dali reported that there was present segregation based on academic excellence and career among students.

Given the fact that he was from a small village in Spain and the fact that his works were not renowned at the time, most students regarded Dali as a backward individual with a funny taste and style (Creed 87). Despite this fact, the relationship that Dali had with Luis Bunuel and Federico Garcia led to the development and creation of a small group of artists united by their immense talents.

When studying at the Academy, Dali was working on a cubist canvass. He was not familiar with the cubist movement, or its ideologies. He only had a vague idea of the movement from the information that he had gathered from the magazines and books he was given by Ramon Pichot while he was living with his family.

Nonetheless, Dali had fully mastered the artistic concepts of the cubic movement. Thus, while working on one of the cubic canvasses in his room, a student noticed this piece of painting. He was amazed by the painting and Dali’s talent in general.

Immediately after that, he disseminated the information on the potential that Dali possessed. It is at this point that the other students accepted Dali into their realm of intellectual students because he was talented as they were. With his new friends, Dali became aware of the feeling of success. He also had a sense of belonging since he was constantly interacting with students and people of the same intellectual level.

Although Dali was good at school and had started to establish a strong base for his future career, his attitude and traits of character failed him on several occasions. As a result of his conduct, Dali was expelled twice from the Academy of Fine Arts. In the last case occurred, Dali was expelled because of the unrest that he had caused developed. He believed that he was better and more highly qualified than his professors were (Gibson 149).

Dali was supposed to expound on Raphael Sanzio, a Renaissance painter from Italy. Raphael was one of the artists that Dali looked up to. Therefore, he told his professors that he knew much more about Raphael as compared to all three of them put together (Rodriguez 65). These utterances enraged the professors that caused Dali’s expulsion from the Academy of Fine Arts. As a result, Dali never sat for his final exams.

This incident also played a critical role in destroying the relationship that Dali had with his father who felt bitter because of his son’s actions. Dali’s father had now given up hope that his son would ever have an official career. On his arrival back home, Dali made a pencil drawing of his father and sister. From the drawing, the bitterness that his father was feeling at that moment clearly imprinted on his face. This drawing became one of his most successful works during those times.

Entry into Surrealism and Rise to Success After being expelled from the Academy of Fine Arts in Madrid, Dali returned to his home in Figueres, where Dali continued to pursue his passion for painting despite his father’s disapproved. The Basket of Bread, a painting that Dali made in the year 1926 is one of his early works that were successful and gained him a lot of recognition as an artist. Dali, however, changed some styles and design of his paintings during the late 1920s. The concepts of his new paintings followed quite a different style called Surrealism.

Dali initial paintings had a modern concept or a classical concept. In some of his early works, a mixture of the two concepts was present. He always stressed on the fact that his passion for art was influenced by great artists of the Renaissance period, in particular, such artists as Raphael Sanzio and Diego Velazquez, after whom he grew his iconic mustache. Dali regarded these individuals as the greatest painters of all times. In an interview, Dali stated that Velazquez was a genius as well as a great painter (Target 114).

The quality of his works was always magnificent. As a result, he believed that he would never make paintings that would reach the levels of Velazquez. He said as a joke that if he would manage to make a painting that was as good as Velazquez’s, then he would definitely die. Thus, since he wanted to live longer, he would continue to make paintings that are of a lower quality than those of Diego Velazquez.

Dali’s interest in Surrealism grew after reading several editions of La Revolution Surrealiste, a surrealist magazine that covered the works of people who were part of movement and believed in it. In the magazine, Dali saw the works painted by Catalonian artists. The concepts and styles found on the canvasses presented in the magazine touched Dali’s emotions and feelings.

Within time, Dali adopted the concept that enabled him to explore his creativity and imagination to deeper depths. It is due to this influence that Dali developed an iconic style of his own, being the style of painting that he was recognized with for the rest of his life.

When he was a student, some of Dali’s early works were presented in several exhibitions in the Catalan capital that were situated in Barcelona. It is in that place that the works of other great artists of the time, such as Pablo Picasso and Joan Miro were also displayed. The great success that they enjoyed from the works of renowned artists, such as Picasso and Miro, the Catalonian art promoters wanted to develop the talents of upcoming artists to guarantee the sustainability of their art culture as well as their movement in the long run.

Therefore, presenting the works of a young artist, such as Dali was one of their main motives. In the art galleries, Dali’s work caught the attention of the public. According to JA Maragal, a Catalonian art dealer, the work of Dali was extraordinary; it was realistic with a lot of sense (Torok 141).

Maragal exhibited Dali’s work in his art gallery during the fall of 1926. During this time, the public was astonished by the quality of work as well as the talent that the young writer had. The public tried to determine the message that Dali’s work was trying to convey. There were demonstrations as well as protests regarding Dali’s work. Press posted cartoons in newspapers and magazines as a means of trying to fully understand the ideas presented by Dali. As a result, all his works were sold out.

The success of Dali’s work in Catalina played a significant role in developing his reputation and credibility. Joan Miro became familiar with the works of Dali because of the success during the exhibition. He had a lot of admiration for the talent of the young artist. As a result, he introduced Dali to Pablo Picasso who was living in Paris at that time.

In the same year, Dali went to Paris for the first time in his life. There, he had the chance to finally meet Picasso. With the guidance and directions of these two artists, Dali managed to develop his talent to a greater extent. It is in Paris that Dali finally understood Surrealism and the idea behind the movement.

During the 1920s, Paris was regarded as the cultural city of the world. It is also during this time that Surrealism was at its heights, and it is in Paris where its impacts were felt the most. Andre Breton headed the movement (Creed 91). Surrealism was a movement that explored the functioning of thought.

The followers of the movement achieved this goal through the different forms of writing as well as their works of art. All these works explored their imagination and creativity. As the leader, Breton was responsible for coming up with the ideologies and guidelines that the followers of the movement were to follow. In 1924, for instance, Breton developed the surrealist manifesto that was used to define Surrealism, its goals and objectives, and the overall purpose of the group (Bokay 45).

By means of surrealism and the directions of Picasso and Miro, Dali developed a new style of art. Prior to his introduction into Surrealism, Dali’s work had been mainly based on impressionism, futurism and cubism (Bokay 45). However, after he had become a follower of the Surrealist movement, his painting concepts changed totally. The main themes that were present in his new works included an extensive of use of collage, sexual symbolism, and imagery.

The idea behind his paintings originated from his dreams. In an interview, Dali once told that he loved to sleep because it is through his dreams that he managed to get the ideas to work on and, consequently, develop them (Torok 140). To enhance on his ideas, Dali utilized classical techniques that were present in the works of artists such as Raphael and Velazquez to enhance his own hallucinatory thoughts.

Therefore, with the help of Surrealism, Dali came up with a completely new style of art. This style not only led to his success but also differentiated him from other surrealist painters. With the help of his works, Dali made a huge contribution to Surrealism; he developed the paranoiac-critical method, a technique that artists can use to capture images from their subconscious mind (Target 119).

This concept was effective as it enhanced the development of creativity and originality in the works of artists under the surrealism movement. With this concept, Dali and other Surrealist artists managed to transform their dreams and subconscious thoughts into reality. Through this technique, Dali believed that he had the power to determine what reality could and could not exist.

As a result of his work and contributions to the art, in general, Dali ended up being one of the most influential figures of the Surrealism movement between 1929 and 1934. In addition to the paranoiac-critical method, the works of Dali employed other features and techniques. For instance, in one of his works titled, The Weaving of Furniture Nutrition that Dali painted in 1934, several techniques are presented.

At a glance, the picture looks normal. However, after a close investigation, one realizes that the picture has surreal components. The first thing that one notes is the crutch that has been used to support the back of the woman in the picture. This concept represents reversed laws of nature, one of the main features of Surrealism. Consequently, juxtaposition is presented by the fact that there are two chests in the picture.

The Ghost of Vermer of Delft is another marvelous work of art by Salvador Dali painted in 1934. In this work, several features of Surrealism are also vividly expressed. First, the leg of the man is elongated, at the same time, representing the leg of the table. This concept is referred to as metamorphosis (Freud 26). The painting also has a strange form of lighting that has been used as a transformation technique to scare and surprise the viewer at the same time.

However, the most successful work that Dali created during this time was the Persistence of Memory. Before completing this painting, Dali and Gala (who later became his wife and mentor) were to watch a motion film together in the theater. However, Dali changed his mind and decided to stay in, while Gala and her friends went to the theater. While at the dining table, Dali was thinking about the super-soft nature of the cheese that they had just eaten.

After that he went to the studio to have one last look at the painting, a routine check that he always had. The painting represented the landscape of Port Llegat with an olive tree that had neither branches, nor leaves. He felt at that very moment that something was missing in the painting that would surely give it an element of surprise. Suddenly, he came up with an idea, and added three soft watches, one of them hanging on the olive tree.

When Galo came back from the theatre, Dali showed her the painting and asked her if she would forget this image after three years time. Gala said that no one would ever forget it once they had laid eyes on it. Surprisingly, she told the truth, and the painting was a success.

Reaction to his Work and Personality Despite the success that Dali was enjoying as a surrealist painter, he also experienced a lot of criticism for his work and paintings, especially from his fellow Surrealists. In 1934, Dali painted a controversial picture, The Enigma of William Tell. The main theme of this painting was sexuality and death that were presented by the enlarged buttocks of Lennon leading to his disfiguration.

The alteration of this character questioned Dali’s motives amongst other Surrealist, and he was summoned to the Surrealism headquarters for a trial (Freud 26). Other than his paintings, Dali’s political ideologies were also questionable. It was believed at this time that he embraced fascism under the Nazi movement. At the same time, Dali supported Francisco Franco who was the leader of the rebel army during the Spanish Civil war of 1936-1939.

Under the leadership of Breton, Surrealists were leftist supporters. Therefore, the fact that Dali supported Franco proved that his ideologies did not match the ones professed by the movement. Because of these encounters, Dali was formally expelled from the Surrealist movement. However, it is believed that there were other personal differences between Breton and Dali that might have led to his expulsion from the movement.

Despite all these, Dali still maintained Surrealist ideologies in his later paintings. However, when he moved to the United States of America, Dali changed his style to classicism. With its techniques, Dali explored new ideas that enabled him to maintain his success. In the early 1940s, the Museum of Modern Art in New York displayed the work of Dali.

This exhibition had a positive appraisal from American painters as well as the public. In 1942, Dali released his book, The Secret Life of Dali. In USA, Dali became a celebrity; he was even featured in The Time Magazine as the greatest artist of the first half of the 20th century. However, another aspect of his personality started to develop slowly, his notoriety.

While people in Spain were familiar with this, the Americans were surprised when Dali smashed the window of a shop in New York that had altered the design that he had come up with. However, despite this, he continued to gather public support, for instance, some of his fans, Mr. and Mrs. Reynolds Morse played a crucial role in founding the Salvador Dali Museum. During the 1960s and 1970s, Dali spent much of his time developing the Dali Theatre and Museum in Figueres where he was later buried.

Conclusion Dali has been one of controversial artists of all times. From the very beginning, he became the most renowned artist of the 20th century. With his talent and imaginations, he used different techniques and developed several methods that not only made him a leading figure of the surreal movement, but also played a critical role in the financial success and fame that he managed to gain. As a result, Dali has been regarded as one of the most successful artists of all times.

Works Cited Bokay, Antal. “Psychoanalysis and Surrealism: Dali’s visit at Freud.” International Journal of Art and Design 3.1 (1997): 44-48. Print

Creed, Barbara. The Monstrous-Feminine, Routledge: London, 1993. Print

Dali, Salvador. The Secret Life of Salvador Dalí, New York: Dover, 1942. Print

Freud, Sigmund. The Interpretation of Dreams, Budapest: Helikon Kiadó, 1993. Print

Genzmer, Herbert. Dali, Budapest: Vincze Kiadó, 2000. Print

Gibson, Ian. The Shameful Life of Salvador Dali, New York: Norton, 1999. Print.

Hesse, Hermann. A Little Theology, Madrid: Cartaphilius, 2001. Print

Rodriguez, Perera. Geniuses of Art: Dali. London: Sage, 2001. Print.

Target, Mary. “Phantoms of the Unconsciousness.” Thalassa, 3.9 (2000): 112-123. Print

Torok, Maria. “Hidden Mourning and Secret Love.” Thalassa 1.9 (1998): 123-157. Print


Marijuana, heroin and prescription opiate abuse and how are they related to the society Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Table of Contents Summary of the article

Core issues and the wider context framing these issues

Analysis of main arguments

Quality of content

Connection with relevant readings in the course



Summary of the article The article explores abuse of prescription drugs in the United States. It starts by asserting that opioid addiction levels are quite high in the country. Consequently, it compares the level of abuse of opioid to that of marijuana. The article goes on to state that addiction to opioid is quite predominant in the country. Therefore, drug abuse is a major concern. The article gives record of drug abuse in the past decade, which is quite alarming.

In addition, it provides statistical records of abuse in the recent past. This shows a correlation that raises concern on drug abuse in American society. The article attributes these changes partly to modifications in prescription practices, increased access, and alterations in formulations. Of great concern is the use of internet, which has brought drugs close to potential abusers. Moreover, long-term use of opioid for treatment has also attributed to addiction or abuse by some patients.

In this regard, the article explores significant areas of research that have the capability of minimizing addiction or abuse of prescriptive drugs. Moreover, it looks at modes of detecting and managing addiction in time to avert potential abuse of drugs by patients. Likewise, it encourages works to develop opioid analgesics with capability of reducing the chances of possible abuse.

Moreover, the article explores the possibilities of developing analgesics, which are non-opioid but effective and safe to users. However, given the high rate of drug abuse in teenagers, the article recommends urgent research on the best treatment modes for pain that is observed in most adolescents. Besides, it explores ways of initiating urgent research on methods of acquiring preventive approaches that would minimize abuse and addiction.

The article considers it essential that drug abuse among adolescents be given priority in finding ways of prevention since they are the most affected group. The article concludes by recommending urgent research on ways of preventing addiction and abuse of drugs in order to save the future of American society (Compton


The realities of Tourism and Economic Development Research Paper writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

A Focus on Tourism

Global Impacts of Tourism

Economic Impacts of Tourism

Economic Reality of Tourism

Negative Impacts of Tourism from an Economic Perspective



Introduction According to Harcombe (2012), tourism can be defined as travelling for business, pleasure or recreational purposes. Different scholars have advanced many other definitions of tourism to introduce or cover different components of this activity. However, in all these definitions, it is evident that tourism is an activity that individuals engage in to escape the daily routine of life.

In the modern world, we relate tourism to accommodation in five stars hotels, a vacation in exotic islands with sandy beaches, camping and driving in national parks and game reserves, as well as visiting famous places of the world, such as the Taj Mahal, the Pyramids of Egypt, the Grand Canyon and so on.

From this description, people always tend to believe that tourism is an activity of the modern days. This assumption is however wrong. Tourism has been existing since the early days of civilization. There are historic reports of wealthy people travelling around the world for fun and expeditions.

In ancient Rome, for instance, the wealthy people used to visit Baiae, a coastal region with beautiful beaches. However, it is after the Renaissance then the Industrial Revolution that people of the middle class began to be actively involved in tourism (Harcombe, 2012). Given these facts, this paper will focus on the impacts that tourism has on the growth and sustainability of the economy.

A Focus on Tourism The level of tourism has increased at a tremendous rate after the end of the World War II. This trend has been attributed to the increase in disposable income and the rise of the middle class within the population who had disposable money to spend on luxury.

At the same time, the improvement in the transportation sector, presence of luxurious hotels and other accommodation facilities, improvement in security and hospitality and most importantly, the presence of many tourist destinations capable of meeting the needs and desires of different groups of individuals have also played a critical role in enhancing tourism.

It is because of these factors that governments all around the world have been aiming at enhancing tourism in their countries, through respective tourism ministries, boards and agencies.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Tourism has many effects on the society. For instance, tourism has played a critical role in achieving environmental sustainability. Tourism relies on natural resources mainly. Beaches, wildlife, and geological features are some of the factors which tourism is based on. Therefore, through tourism, these resources are managed in an effective, efficient and sustainable manner to ensure that the present and future generations benefit from them.

Consequently, tourism has social and cultural implications. Through the tourist-host relationships, individuals tend to meet, interact and share their values and morals. Tourists usually interact with the natives. In the process of interaction, they tend to borrow some aspects of their cultures. More than often, tourists return home with souvenirs that they bought in foreign lands.

At the same time, some tourists adopt the dressing, cuisine and to some extent the religious beliefs of the native communities that they have visited during vacations. Natives also experience the same trend since they also acquire some aspects of culture and behaviors of the tourists. Due to this fact therefore, it has always been stressed that individuals should adopt and pass on the values and practices that are moral to enhance the sustainability of tourism.

Most importantly, tourism has great economic benefits. According to Stynes (2011), the number of international tourists recorded in 2011 was approximately 983 million. This is one of the highest figures ever been recorded in the history of international tourism representing a growth of 4.6% as compared to 2010. In the same year, international expenditures in tourism were recorded at over $1 trillion (Harcombe, 2012).

In Canada, for instance, tourism had a revenue of $55 in the year 2000 accounting for approximately 5% of the country’s GDP. At the same time, tourism during that year employed 547,000 individuals within the nation. Therefore, tourism has become one of the major earners of revenue in the economies of many nations. Tourism also provides employment and leads to the development of infrastructure. These are essential components in ensuring the growth and sustainability of the economy of a given nation.

Global Impacts of Tourism In the year 2010, tourism accounted for 5% of the world’s GDP (Bull, 2010). From this analysis and the facts that have been presented in this paper so far, it is evident that tourism plays a critical role in the growth and development of the global economy. It is as a result of this fact that many nations in the world try to enhance their tourism sector as a move to achieve high economic growth and development.

Tourism supports the economies of nations by acting as a source of foreign exchange. At the same time, tourism provides employment to the native communities of the host nations either directly or indirectly. Furthermore, tourism brings about the growth and development of infrastructure to support the service.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The realities of Tourism and Economic Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As a result, tourism activities play a critical role in bringing about modernity, especially in developing nations. For tourists to enjoy their stay in a given destination there needs to be effective transportation and communication services, hospitality services, security, a stable banking system and other amenities. On these grounds therefore, governments need to develop these infrastructures and amenities in order for their nations to be regarded as the leading tourist destinations in the world.

However, according to the studies that have been conducted, the impact that tourism has on the economy of a given nation is diversified. For instance, in his book, Bull (2010) asserted that tourism plays a critical role in supporting the national economy of developing countries as compared to the economies of developed nations.

The report presented by the Organization for Economic Co-operation (OECD) stated that although 70% of the global revenue received in the global tourism sector originates from developed countries (OECD, n.d.). Despite this fact however, these nations still do not regard tourism as a profitable venture.

The economies of developed nations are usually based on the industrial sector and the service industries. Given the fact that these nations have a strong internal market and their export markets are viable, their balance of payments is usually high. The scenario is however different in the case of developing nations where the economy is predominantly based on agriculture.

In these nations, the wealth difference between the rich and the poor is always high due to uneven distribution of wealth and national resources. As a result, the domestic industry of developing nation usually lacks the purchasing power required to support local industry, hence increasing the level of international imports to sustain the economy. As a result, these nations usually have a negative balance of payments where the cost of imports exceeds the revenue of exports.

As it has been stated in this paper, developing nations need to transform their economy to be based on industry and the service sector to achieve medium to high economic levels of growth. To achieve this goal, the governments of these nations need to encourage and sustain a lot of investments to sustain industrial growth. At the same time, the government needs to improve on its service industry. This includes developing service industries such as banking and finance, transportation, healthcare and so on.

To achieve all this however, developing nations need to have strong financial backing to support the capital investments that are required to establish and maintain these industries. Seeking for foreign aid and loans has been one of the main avenues that the governments of developing nations have turned to in order to achieve these development needs (Bull, 2010).

At the same time, developing nations have turned to tourism as a source of foreign exchange and revenue to sustain their economic plans (Bull, 2010). Developed nations also have turned to this scheme to enhance economic growth but on a local level, especially in rural economies that have abundant natural resources and scenic views.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The realities of Tourism and Economic Development by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The fact that developing nations rely a lot on tourism as a source of foreign exchange has played a considerable role in the development of tourism in the last 30 years (Stynes, 2011). Most nations in Africa, South East Asia and Latin America rely on tourism for economic sustainability a lot.

It is as a result of this fact that tourism countries such as Kenya have become the main foreign exchange earner surpassing traditional exports from agriculture and other industries (Stynes, 2011). Therefore, the governments of developing nations set up and sustain economic investment projects to achieve the short, medium and long-term goals and objectives while using the revenue earned from tourism.

Due to the viability of tourism and its high potential, many developing nations have come up with policies that help enhance the growth and development of the tourism sector. As a result, tourism has become one of the leading industries that support the economies of most developing nations in the world. This is because, tourism not only earn developing countries the much needed foreign exchange but it also acts as a source of employment.

Unemployment is one of the major economic problems which developing nations are facing. In developing nations, unemployment affects mainly the youths that move to urban areas in search for employment opportunities. Rural-urban migration in developing nations reduces the work force that is required to sustain agricultural activities that are mainly based in rural areas.

As a result, this movement not only reduces the level of agricultural exports in the nation, but also reduces food availability. Consequently, a high influx of unemployed individuals in urban areas leads to the development of poverty, and rise of social ills, such as prostitution and insecurity.

Thus, the fact that tourism offers employment either directly or indirectly in developing nations has played a critical role in solving some of the economic problems that developing nations are facing. Through tourism, individuals are employed as tour guides, national park and game reserve managers, and as hotel employees, tours and travel staff.

Tourism also offers indirect employment, especially in supporting industries developed by local communities such as curio shops. Consequently, the money raised from tourism is used to support local projects especially in rural areas through building schools, hospitals, roads and other public amenities. Thus, the level of poverty in developing nations has been reduced considerably with the aid of tourism.

Economic Impacts of Tourism Apart from providing foreign exchange to the economy of a given nation, other features of tourism play a critical role in sustaining the economy of a given nation. Being a service industry, tourism offers invisible services to its consumers.

The nature of the tourism industry therefore can be compared to that of the transport industry, healthcare industry or the banking sector (Bull, 2010). Therefore, the services offered by the industry occur at the point or the country where they are produced. In the process therefore, consumers enjoy the service at their tourist destination sites at the minimum price possible.

The price associated with tourism is set on the free on board (FOB) basis. However, if tourism could be exported to the home countries of the consumers, then the service would cost much more given the fact that the prices would include the cost, insurance and freight (CIF). Additionally, the service would incur several taxes such as custom duty before reaching the final consumer.

It is as a result of this fact that most imported goods cost more in destination countries as compared to the countries that they are manufactured in. Therefore, given the fact that the cost of tourism is set at FOB, the service is usually offered at the best price in the market. Due to its affordability, the demand for tourism has always been increasing. This phenomenon has made tourism to be one of the most profitable ventures in the world comprising about 5% of the worlds GDP in 2010 (Bull, 2010).

Consequently, tourists need to utilize additional services and amenities to enhance the holiday experience in their destination areas. Therefore, host nations need to ensure that they have adequate facilities that can sustain the wants and needs of the tourists who have visited their nations.

Tourists require effective accommodation services to enhance their stay in a given area. At the same time, for tourism to be sustainable, it needs to be supported with effective and efficient transport facilities, healthcare services, retail services, banking, finance and insurance services and so on.

Therefore, the introduction and development of tourism has not only enhanced the economy of the host nations from the revenue that is earned from the venture, but has also facilitated the growth of other industries as well. Given the rapid expansion of tourism, host nations, especially developing countries, find it difficult to meet the needs, desires and wants of tourists with their available facilities and infrastructure.

In this respect therefore, it was important for these nations to build new infrastructures and develop existing ones to meet the needs and desires of the tourists who were visiting their nations. This move has not only supported tourism in these nations, but it has also played a critical role in the modernization of host nations, as well as enhanced the process of economic growth and development.

With effective infrastructures in place, other processes and industries within the nation are improved. An improved transport system improves the efficiency of transporting goods and services within a given nation. A strong security force protects a nation from internal and external threats.

Consequently, the presence of a strong and reliable banking industry will result in the availability of credits and enhance a saving culture that will assist in the growth of small and medium scale enterprises (SMEs). Thus, facilities that were developed to sustain tourism end up in developing and supporting other industries resulting in the economic growth and sustainability.

Economic Reality of Tourism In this paper, it has been identified that tourism plays a critical role in growth and development of the economy of a given nation, especially in developing nations. Tourism achieves this by earning foreign exchange, triggering the development of the infrastructures of the host nation, providing employment and supporting the development of trade and other industries.

However, this is just a vague description of how tourism affects the economy of a given nation. Thus, to understand exactly how tourism affects the economy, it is essential to conduct a multiplier analysis (Harcombe, 2012).

The impacts that tourism has on the economy of a given nation cannot be measured by the amount of money they spend or the benefits they receive, but through the impact this revenue has on different realms of the economy. When a tourist spends money in a hotel for example, part of that money is used by the hotel to pay its employees, to purchase goods and services that are required to sustain the operations of the economy and so on.

Consequently, employees will use their salaries to pay rent, basic expenses such as school fees, food, and so on. The landlord on the other hand will invest the money earned in other activities, probably in a welfare association or a local housing scheme. This is just but an example of how the money from tourism penetrates into the economy of a given nation.

According to the multiplier effect, the expenditure by a tourist to enjoy the goods and services of a host nation is regarded as Frontline expenditure (Harcombe, 2012). Here, the tourist is engaged in spending activities such as transport and accommodation, food and entertainment, clothing, gifts and souvenirs, healthcare and other miscellaneous expenses. According to this analysis, this form of expenditure has direct effects on the economy of a given nation.

Therefore, this expenditure as a form of expenditure is referred to as a direct multiplier since it has a direct effect on the economy. For economic growth to be achieved, the value of Frontline spending of tourism should always be higher than the cost required to import the goods and services to sustain the tourists’ experience (Harcombe, 2012).

On the other hand, hotels, travel agencies, national parks and game reserves receive money directly from tourists. However, these agencies and organizations need to purchase goods and services within the local economy to sustain their operations. For instance, a travel agency will need to employ a workforce in different departments to sustain the needs and requirements of tourists while they are at their discretion.

The firm will also need to purchase tour vans, fuel and service them and most importantly, pay taxes to the government. This level of expenditure is referred to as indirect multiplier effect since the money earned from tourism is spent indirectly within the economy. At this point, it is essential to state that not all the money earned from the Frontline spending is analyzed in the indirect multiplier effect since some of this money might be lost in the form of savings, taxes, import and excise duties.

The induced multiplier effect is the final level of this analysis. Induced spending is used to refer to the money that is spent on paying the wages of employees who work in the firms and agencies that are involved in tourism. Additionally, these firms pay out the profits earned to their shareholders in the form of dividends. Some of this money is put into savings. Thus, the expenditure of the employees, shareholders or any other individual at this level also triggers economic activities within the economy.

From this analysis, tourism plays a critical role in enhancing and maintaining the economy of a given nation either through direct, indirect or induced multiplier effects. On these grounds therefore, it is evident that through tourism, many other economic activities with a given economy are initiated and sustained.

Thus, the assessment of all these realms of expenditure is essential for the true economic impact of tourism on a given economy. Multiplier analysis is an effective tool to ascertain the overall performance of the tourism industry. The data and information gathered from this analysis are essential, especially in the process of decision making to determine the short term and long-term policies and strategies that can be implemented to sustain the tourism industry of a given nation and its economy at large.

Negative Impacts of Tourism from an Economic Perspective This paper has effectively covered the positive impacts that tourism has on the economy of a given nation. However, this is not always the case as tourism has effects that might be detrimental to the economy of a given nation. One of the main problems that have been associated with tourism is the increased need for importing goods from overseas to meet the needs of the tourists. Tourists always want to have a home experience in their travel destinations.

As such therefore, host nations need to provide perfect conditions to meet the needs and wants of the tourists. For instance, tourists might require luxurious hotel rooms, their home cuisine and additional amenities in the course of their stay at their host hotel. To meet all these demands, host nations have to import all these goods since they might not be locally available as in the case of small tourist islands. Thus, the cost-revenue margin from tourism is highly reduced.

In this paper, it has been identified that tourism plays a critical role in developing and sustaining the global economy. Due to this fact, there are governments that strongly depend on tourism as the main source of revenue in their economies.

This trend is mainly experienced in developing nations that regard tourism as the main source of foreign exchange hence supporting their economic goals and objectives. High risks have always been linked with the dependence on one industry to achieve economic sustainability. The world experienced a high level of inflation between 2008 and 2010.

During this time, the amount of disposable income has been greatly reduced while the price levels including the costs associated with tourism increased. As a result, the revenue earned from tourism has been reduced during this period. At the same time, tourism is a seasonal industry. During the low season, the revenue earned in this industry is usually low leading to firing employees to reduce operating costs.

Consequently, to ensure that tourism become a profitable and sustainable venture in a given economy, the host nation needs to develop its resources and infrastructures. However, a huge proportion of the profits that might be accrued from these investments usually leaks out of the host nation hence reducing the viability of tourism.

Conclusion Over the years, tourism has grown to become of the leading global economic activities. As a result of its success, tourism plays a critical role in the growth and development of the economy at local, national and international levels.

The venture not only earns host nation’s revenue, but also plays a critical role in providing employment, developing infrastructures and sustaining the growth and development of other industries. Despite its shortcomings, tourism plays a critical role in modernization and economic development. Therefore, measures need to be put in place to ensure that this venture is profitable and sustainable in the short run and in the long run.

References Bull, A. (2010). The Economics of Travel and Tourism. Melbourne: Longman.

Harcombe, D. (2012). The Impacts of Tourism. Web.

OECD. Economic Impacts of Tourism. Web.

Stynes, D. (2011). The Economic Impacts of Tourism: A Hand Book for Tourism Professionals. Chicago: Sage.


China’s Economic Growth Since 1978 Essay essay help online

Table of Contents Article summary

China’s economic growth since 1978

Works Cited

Article summary The article by (Li and Chow) develops a detailed account for china’s economic development and growth from 1952. In doing so, the article focuses on areas such as total factor productivity, capital, and labor. Official data on the economic status of the country, the authors develop an estimation of Cobb-Douglas productivity function. The article is an extension of earlier works by Gregory Chow and there are two main aims that the authors pursued.

They include establishing whether the earlier parameters of production function changed and using these parameters to make projection of growth in GDP up to 2010. Data on essential parameters such as national output and labor force were readily available. The only parameter that had changed was the Chinese national accounting income system. It had changed from the old definition of accounting national income accounting system to a new definition that uses the standard measure of GDP.

The article by Wang and Yao, examines the sources of China’s economic growth from 1952 to 1999. The authors note the remarkable performance of Chinas economy within the period. In addition, the country has also made significant effort in reducing poverty. However, in order to establish the source of this immense growth, the authors examine factor accumulation and productivity.

Most studies focusing on China’s economy fail to incorporate data on its annual human capital stock (Wang and Yao). This leaves a huge omission and biasness in the studies rendering them inaccurate. The article by Wang and Yao, however, sought to use data of China’s human capital stock to analyze the economic growth of the country. In addition to the human capital stock data, the authors also identify the significance of using factor productivity in analyzing China’s economic growth.

China’s economic growth since 1978 Ever since China implemented economic reforms in 1978, the country has continued to witness impressive economic growth that leaves many economic analysts in the western world wondering the factors that drive this growth. On one end of the spectrum, the situation has increased fears that China will soon become a powerful country and a threat to well established western countries.

On the other end, there are those who choose to become pessimistic about China’s economy (Holz). However, one thing remains, irrespective of what end of the spectrum one chooses to stand China’s economy has grown at a rapid rate ever since they began implementing economic reforms. Gross domestic product has been on an average annual rate of 9.6 percent.

In terms of economic size, the country currently is ranked second to the United States after surpassing huge economies such as Japan, Germany and UK. The Share of China’s economy in the global economic growth has is currently ranked the highest. Basically, it contributes to approximately 25 percent of the global economic growth while the United States is estimated to contribute only 20 percent (Holz 1668).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The interest in China’s impressive economic growth has drawn many researchers to analyze the factors that drive the economy. Other researchers have focused on China’s largest industries which contribute a significant share to its overall GDP while others examine the prospective of China’s firms on the global spectrum. Theories that explain China’s economic growth tend to emphasize on the economic transition.

As part of the economic reforms, China opened its market to foreign investors (Holz). A cumulative figure of the overall foreign direct investment in China had reached $100 billion by the year 1995. However, this figure was negligible prior the economic reforms of 1978.

Annual inflows of foreign investments increased from 1% in 1978 to 18% in 1995. With the increase inward foreign investment, the government has been using the money to create technological transfer, connect the country to international market, create job opportunities, and to build factories.

With the growing power and global presence of China in the world economy, there is no doubt that it is gaining foothold as the world’s strongest economy (Chow). Critics argue that the economic superpower of China can be attributed to its ability to embrace the market economy using utterly brutal means.

Capitalism and one-party communism are some of the factors that enabled the Chinese economy to address effects of the financial crisis. There is no wonder that the Chinese suffered from the effects of economic ideologies put forward by Friedrich Hayek given the levels of ease in accessing Chinese credits and embarking on overambitious projects. According to Hayek, bad investments lead to hard economic recoveries and this explains the woes that are currently being experienced in China.

China’s involvement in the global economy subjected it to the effects of the economic downturn. The rate of economic rate declined steadily from 14%, 9%, and 6.1% in 2007, 2009, and at the first quarter of 2009 respectively. The Chinese economy suffered external shocks from the free fall in international demand and the collapse of commodity markets. For the past two decades, foreign direct investment and international trade accounted for US870 billion and US$2.56 trillion respectively.

Equally, $1.95 trillion of Chinese foreign reserves is invested in foreign agency and government bonds. An estimated 25 million employees in the Chinese labor market, work for foreign companies operating in China (Holz). With all these factors, there is no doubt that the Chinese political and economic health is reliant to the global economic markets. These interconnections mean that any undesirable developments in global markets present undesirable effects to the Chinese economy.

We will write a custom Essay on China’s Economic Growth Since 1978 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More During the global financial crisis, assets were devalued, financial markets became turbulent, unemployment levels rose, and access to credit became limited during the crisis. The onset of the financial crisis marked the end of the highest growth cycle experienced from 2003-mid-2008China suffered the pains of the credit crunch in other ways.

The shrinking international trade resulted to a reduction in China’s involvement in international trade. Small-and mid-sized manufacturing and trading companies collapsed leading to job losses for over 20 million migrant Chinese workers (Holz). Chinese trade relations with the European Union and the US were impacted significantly. Majority of these markets formed the largest consumers of Chinese exports, and the effects of the credit crisis led to slowed purchases of Chinese goods.

Political responses in response to the effects of the credit crisis included a call for rejecting economic reforms in favor of the centrally-controlled economy implemented by Mao. Another possible political response included the adoption of a protectionist/nationalist approach to Chinese growth investments. In efforts aimed at addressing the external shocks associated with the credit effects of the credit crisis, the Chinese government announced a number of macroeconomic policies.

Among these policy response was the 4 trillion Yuan (US$586 billion) stimulus package to be implemented for the duration 2008-2010 (Chow). This stimulus package was aimed at stimulating domestic demand. This translated to the inflation of China’s fiscal deficit from 0.1% in GDP to 2.9% of GDP in 2010. While this stimulus package targeted three economic pillars (funding mechanism, industrial policy, and investment plan), the stimulus package was criticized for relying heavily on physical infrastructure.

Also included in the stimulus package plan was the innovation and competitiveness plan that targeted 10 additional factors. Contrary to their believe of the Keynesian economy as a general theory aimed at defending capitalism, the Chinese government headed by Wen Jiabao and Hu Jintao embraced Keynesian prescriptions (Chow). The leadership regimes of Li Keqiang and Xi Jinping are expected to suffer the investment effects described by Friedrich Hayek (Chow).

Another policy response has been the implementation of the expansionary fiscal policy by exiting from its tight monetary policy. The new expansionary monetary policy enabled the government to cut interest rates and minimize bank reserve requirement ratio to improve the liquidity volumes on the banking system. The effectiveness of several industrial policies implemented to promote the growth and recovery of particular sectors in the economy is yet to be evaluated.

The stimulus package is likely to increase China’s reliance on investments that depend on the growth model because inappropriate use of money on key sectors.

The Chinese stimulus program is criticized for relying heavily on imbalanced and unusual investment burst through bank lending, enhancing the role of the state at the expense of the private sector, and exacerbating china’s dependence on exports. The stimulus package is also criticized for neglecting consumption because the package was aimed at expanding investment demand.

Not sure if you can write a paper on China’s Economic Growth Since 1978 by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Chow, D. “China’s response to the global financial crisis: Implications for US-China Economic relations.” Global Business Law Review (2010): 47-81. print.

Holz, Carsten. “China’s Economic Growth 1978–2025: What We Know Today About China’s Economic Growth Tomorrow.” World Development (2008): 1665–1691. print.

Li, Kui-Wai and Gregory C Chow. “China’s economic growth: 1952-2010.” Economic Development and Cultural Change (2002): 247-256. print.

Wang, Yan and Yudong Yao. “Sources of China’s Economic Growth, 1952-99: Incorporating human capital accumulation.” The world bank (2001): 1-17. Print.


Drug Abuse and Current Generation Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Drug abuse remains one of the social problems affecting a huge number of people around the world. It has been estimated that there are over one hundred and ninety million people around the world who use drugs, and that drug use among young people has always been on the increase, with most victims being below the age of thirty years.

Generally, drug abuse is caused by a wide range of factors and poses a host of negative effects, which can be prevented. This essay explores how some of these factors contribute to drug abuse, its effects, and possible solutions.

Drug abuse is caused by a series of factors, which can be classified as social, economical, biological, and environmental among groups. It is believed that the family plays a major role in shaping the behavior and character of young people, since they consider elder members of the family as role models.

As a result, dysfunctional families have been blamed for the increasing cases of drug abuse. Parents have the responsibility of setting a good example in the society because children tend to emulate their behaviors. This is to say that parents, who use drugs, largely influence their children since they assume that whatever they do is healthy and acceptable in the society (Barnard 39).

Besides children mimicking their parents’ behavior, psychologists argue that absentee parenting equally contributes to deviant behavior like substance abuse among young people. In most cases, children spend a lot of their time alone, far from parents because of career commitments.

They therefore lack the opportunity to instill morals in their children due to limited contact time (Barnard 39). Additionally, children tend to find comfort in drugs especially when parents are abusive. Such decisions are taken as a way of rebellion or expressing dissatisfaction with the action taken by parents in either correcting them or promoting good behavior.

Another cause of drug abuse among young people is low self-esteem. In some cases, young people feel rejected by the family, based on the kind of treatment accorded by senior members. As a result, they become self-insecure because of the uncertainty prevailing or self-doubt within oneself (Barnard 39).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For those in schools and colleges, failure to achieve targeted goals may lead to these feelings. When a child is plagued with these emotions without intervention, drug abuse is always their best option, without considering the long-term effects of some of the drugs used.

Peer pressure has also been cited as one of causes of drug abuse. In most cases, teenagers prefer indentifying themselves with certain behaviors, fashion and lifestyle. However, some of the practices upheld by a given group of young people may promote deviant behavior among members its members, since majority would want to fit in the group by conforming to its culture.

In other cases, young people try drugs to escape boredom or please their peers and be considered as heroes. Notably, boys and girls may influence one another especially in cases where they are in an advanced relationship, spend a lot of time together, and influence each other’s behaviors through interaction.

Another major cause of drug abuse is the media. In this general, it is hard to watch a television for ten minutes without being exposed to adverts promoting alcohol and other drugs. These adverts influence children in various ways, especially in cases where parental guidance does not exist.

Additionally, most of the advertisements are done by celebrities who further influence the perception of children towards drugs. Most of the children who are exposed to such adverts work towards becoming particular celebs by resorting to drug abuse. The situation may worsen in the case of a dysfunctional family set up.

In discussing the issue of drug abuse in the society, it is equally important to look at some of the effects of drug abuse, which necessitate mitigation measures as soon as possible. There are numerous effects of drug abuse, ranging from behavioral, emotional to health-related complications, some of which are fatal.

For example, most commonly abused drugs have serious health effects, which may turn out to be expensive to cure or incurable. The use of marijuana has been linked to heart-related problems due to alteration in heartbeat and blood pressure. Among other dangerous effects, increased heartbeat may cause permanent brain damage, resulting into impaired memory.

We will write a custom Essay on Drug Abuse and Current Generation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, some drugs like tobacco can cause lung cancer, while others may lead to terminal illnesses (Maisto, Galizio and Connors 154). In line with this, drug abuse has also been linked to rising cases of HIV/AIDS among young people. In essence, young people under the influence of drugs are prone to risky sexual behaviors, which expose them to high chances of contracting the virus. Besides HIV, young girls may conceive unwanted pregnancies and other venereal infections.

Drug abuse also causes a range of emotional effects like stress, schizophrenia, and suicidal feelings. Young people have been found to register the highest level of depression, emanating from the use of different drugs (Maisto, Galizio and Connors 154). Besides this, some drugs may worsen mental problems to become dangerous and fatal. A good example is marijuana, which accelerates anxiety and depression among its users.

Drug abuse also breeds an array of behavioral problems among young people, which may affect their suitability to fit in the society. Deviant behaviors like bullying and violence are common among drug users. Other behaviors, which may make one to become a social misfit, are theft and harassment of peers.

Based on the negative effects of drug abuse, it is essential to erect measures aimed at curbing this scourge. For instance, public education and awareness is highly recommended since some people abuse drugs without knowing the negative side effects.

This can be done through public lectures or incorporation into the education curriculum to equip learners with relevant information on effects of drug abuse and how to overcome addiction. Laws should also be tightened to prevent easy access and distribution of certain drugs, which are commonly abused by the public (Barnard 135).

More recreational facilities ought to be developed to eliminate boredom among people. This would allow them to spend their leisure time in a meaningful manner. Additionally, media control should be enhanced through filtration of materials and programs aired, some of which encourage the use of drugs (Maisto, Galizio and Connors 422). Above all, is the responsibility of parents to watch over their children and help them to deal with social issues like peer pressure and media influence.

In summary, drug abuse is a major scourge affecting the current generation. However, the problems associated with this menace are contributed by the society. It is important to underscore the fact that drug abuse is caused by a wide range of factors and poses a host of negative effects, which can be prevented through varied approaches.

Works Cited Barnard, Marina. Drug Addiction and Families. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2007. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Drug Abuse and Current Generation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Maisto, Stephen, Mark Galizio and Gerard Connors. Drug Use and Abuse. Connecticut: Cengage Learning, 2010. Print.


Interracial marriages and relationships in Asian American communities in the US Essay college essay help

Interracial marriages have become common in the US ever since it was legalized by a Supreme Court decision in 1967. The population of multiracial Americans continues to increase even though they only form less than 5 percent of the entire US population.

Issues surrounding interracial marriages have been perceived differently through two main points of view. This includes cultural conservatism and egalitarianism. The views of cultural conservatism are mainly held by the older generation who consider interracial marriages to be socially unacceptable.

However, the younger generation leans towards egalitarianism, where interracial marriage is seen as an acceptable phenomenon. Among the Asian American community, many view the issue of interracial relationship and marriage as a natural progression of the community to be integrated into the mainstream American culture. On the contrary, other members of the Asian American communities think otherwise about the phenomenon.

They consider interracial marriages and relationships as a way of renouncing the cultural identity of the community. However, the last two decades have witnessed changing trends in interracial marriages and relationships of Asian Americans. This paper seeks to explore the changing trends and explains the reasons behind the changes.

The differing views on the issue are best supported by statistical data on the current trend regarding interracial relationship and marriages within the Asian American community in the US. According to data from the Census American Community Survey, there has been a decline in marriages involving White Americans and Asian Americans between the year 2006 and present (Kenally).

A different survey conducted by Pew Research Center also reported a decline in interracial marriages among the Asian American community (Kenally). However, the survey indicated that the Asian American community is more likely to marry outside their race than the other races. Despite the tolerance of interracial marriages among young people in the community, more young people still choose to marry from their own.

Interracial marriages and relationships among the Asian American communities show the extent in which they have been assimilated into the American society. A growth on interracial marriages suggests an improvement in race relations within the American society. All the minority groups in American have experienced an increase in interracial marriages with members of the White American community since the 70s.

However, within the period from the 70s to date, there has also been an increase in marriages with immigrants (Kenally 8). The phenomenon has left no guarantee for further increase in interracial marriages among various minority groups. Immigrants from Asia specifically have expanded the pool of marriage with US-born co-ethnic minorities.

It can be argued that the reason for early increase in intermarriages among the Asian American community was because of the lack of marriage partners from their own community. However, increase in the population of immigrants from Asia raised the supply of potential marriage partners.

In effect, this also explains the decline in interracial marriages and relationships among Asian American community. Each year, immigrants from Asia and Latin America enter United States legally. Over the past decade, the number of legal Asian and Latin America immigrants has risen to approximately a million (Qian 275). This attributes the changing trends in interracial marriages within the two American communities. There is a general strengthening of racial endogamy as interracial marriages decline.

According to Seong-ku (55), there is a significance difference in interracial marriages among Korean women and Korean men. She further says that the difference needs to be explained in a cultural perspective.

The author asserts that Korean women have subscribed to an egalitarian mindset when it comes to the issue of marriage and relationships. Most Korean women prefer to intermarry with White Americans (Seong-ku). She further notes that White American men have a general fancy for Asian women as opposed to the white women fancying Asian men.

The media has been used to portray a negative image of Asian men. The impact therefore reduces fascinations for Asian men by other races. In addition, most Korean women prefer to marry outside their race because they largely seek for white men. Seong-ku also agrees to the notion that interracial marriages are critical to the process of assimilation within any society. It is an effective way in which two cultures can be merged to create a well-blended society.

According to Qian (263), interracial marriages and relationships not only vary by race but also by sex. This supports the findings of Seong-ku, who says that Asian American women out-marry more than their male counterparts. In his article, Qian sought to examine interracial marriages among different communities in America between 1980 and 1990.

Using log-linear models, Qian explored both the sex and racial composition of interracial marriages. Within the time frame of 1980 and 1990, Qian managed to find a general increase in the number of interracial marriages within Asian American community (Qian).

However, despite the increase, racial endogamy remained strong. Qian establishes that interracial marriages between Asian Americans and White Americans are the most common. Breaking the barriers that prevent interracial marriages is less difficult for Asian men who have attained higher education than for women with higher education. This means that Asian Americans who have attained higher education prefer not to subscribe to segregated racial communities.

Another similar study that sought to examine the changing patterns of interracial marriages within the multiracial American society used data from the 1980 census to 2008 census. The study by Qian and Lichter reports a decline in interracial marriages among Asian Americans. Interracial marriages and relationships among US-born Asian women and immigrants, however increased (Qian and Litcher).

In a study conducted by Herman and Campbell, majority of white Americans endorse interracial marriages with both the Asian American and black American community. Out of all the respondents interviewed, less than 30 percent think otherwise by rejecting any possibility of out-marrying to other races (Herman and Campbell).

However, white Americans do not have any problem with dating from outside their race. Their major concern is bearing children interracially. According to the study by Herman and Campbell, most American white males have a receptive attitude towards females of outside races especially Asians. This concurs with the findings of Qian and Litcher that reports an increase of interracial marriages between white men and Asian women.

The general attitude and perception towards interracial marriages and relationships have little to do with actual interracial marriages. Interracial dating among young Asian American cohort has been identified by Herman and Campbell to be most common. However, these relationships never proceed to marriage as the young cohorts always prefer marrying from their own. Interracial dating is perceived by young people to be part of growing up, especially in an environment that embraces diversity.

Researchers argue that the major reason for the decline in interracial marriages among the Asian American community is resurgence of traditional culture and language interest. Young Asian Americans are reconnecting back to their roots by gaining interest in their traditional language and culture. They tend to feel that interracial marriages would prevent them from reconnecting with their roots by killing the resurgent interest into their culture (Herman and Campbell).

The media also has an influence on the issue of young Asian Americans marrying one of their own. Contrary to the findings of Seong-ku the media has changed its depiction of Asian men from the “low life” henchmen and houseboys to hunks. There are a lot of Asian men being shown in the media in some impressive ways that make them attractive to Asian American women. This effect, however, can also be argued to increase the attractiveness of Asian men among women from outside races (Seong-ku).

Conclusion From the results of the literature materials analyzed in this paper, it is apparent that interracial marriages within Asian American community have decreased mainly due to the resurgence of interest in reconnecting with their roots. A surge in the population of Asian immigrants has further contributed to the decline by increasing the supply of potential marriage partners within the community.

Racial boundaries are gradually breaking down. However there are new boundaries forming as a result of the breakdown. One such as boundary is that of nativity among co-ethnics. Even though the decline in racial intermarriages among the Asian American society is still projected to continue, it is not associated with bold racial lines. It is only linked to a possibility of nativity among Asian American community.

Works Cited Herman, Melissa R. and Mary E. Campbell. “I wouldn’t, but you can: Attitudes toward interracial relationships.” Social science research (2012): 343-358. print.

Kenally, Jeff. “Interaccial Marriages.” The Messenger magaine 4 June 2003: 8. print.

Qian, Zhenchao and Daniel T. Litcher. “Changing Patterns of Interracial Marriage in a Multiracial Society.” Journal of Marriage and Family (2011): 1065 – 1084. print.

Qian, Zhenchao. “Breaking the racial barriers: Variations in interracial marriage between 1980 and 1990.” Demography (pre-2011) (1997): 263-275. print.

Seong-ku, Ha. “Interracial Marriage and Residential Well Being: Consequences of Interracial Marriage for Korean Women in the US.” Asian Journal of women studies (2002): 55. print.


USA and the illegal immigrants Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Immigration reform causes a need for an issue-defining frame. There are problems that this frame defines. First, the US Government has failed to control its borders completely. Secondly, millions of people pass across the borders without granted permission just to make money in the US.

Finally, once they are inside, they sometimes forge documents to get work, going against the laws of labor and lying to employers who follow the labor laws (Lynch and Woodyard.). They end up taking jobs meant for the ordinary American citizens and the immigrants who got in legally.

They also bear children who will have to be American citizens and be forced to use local services including schools and hospitals. However, the biggest issue is whether or not these illegal immigrants should receive social services such as Medicare, welfare, and food stamps (Skogan 168). Illegal immigrants who work hard to support themselves and their families prove to be better human beings and therefore should receive the social services.

These issues concentrate entirely on the immigrants and the agencies responsible for overseeing immigration laws. Lakoff uses the strict father of a family model to demonstrate the issues of morality in politics. Freedom of action can be understood as freedom to move. Because of this, boundaries of morality are sometimes and more often seen as impediments of freedom (Lakoff 45).

This implies that people who force their beliefs and values on other people are seen to impede their freedom. It is human nature to move freely in search of security and better life. Immigrants crossing the borders into US from other countries are uncomfortable with the nature of things happening in their country and they are in pursuit of a better life.

Lakoff states that without incentives of punishment and reward to a child, important values such as self discipline would vanish. And to avoid this from happening, a sense of authority and competition must be exercised. He further says that competition is important in a moral world.

Immigrants come to the US and take up labor jobs meant for low waged Americans and accept to be paid much lower wages so that they can make a living. They participate in tax payment. Their kids are in school in America. They plan to raise their families in America. And for the most part of their lives, they are swallowed in to the system in America (Skogan 175).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Those who work hard to build the economy of America should be rewarded and not be denied necessary documents that would guarantee them their basic human rights such as being entitled to the services provided by both the local and federal government. However punishment should be upon those who do not want to work and constantly engage in unlawful activities such as drug dealing (Skogan 170). The overall authority has a responsibility to maintain order work for the benefit of those under their authority.

Illegal workers are important components of America’s macro and micro economies. It is projected that the American labor force is aging fast and the working illegal immigrants play a critical role of replacing the ageing labor force at a lower cost (Lynch and Woodyard.). They should therefore be granted access to social services. Since most of the unauthorized workers contribute to tax revenues, they should also benefit from social services.

Works Cited Lakoff, George. Moral Politics: How Liberals and Conservatives Think. Chicago: The University of Chicago Pres, 2002. Print.

Lynch, David and Chris Woodyard. “Immigrants claim key role.” USA TODAY 11 Apr. 2006. usatoday.com. Web. .

Skogan, Wesley G. “Policing Immigrant community in the United States.” Sociology of crime LAw and Deviance (2009): 167-189. Print.


Psychoanalytically Interpreting Genesis Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Examination of Adam and Eve

Death as the Loss of the Meaning of Life

Oedipal Conflict and God

God as the Mother and Father Figure

Significance of the Tree of Life and the Fruits

Moral of the Book of Genesis


Works Cited

Introduction Why did God have to create Adam and Eve only to throw them out of the Garden of Eden, their home? Where did hostility and death come from? Does it make sense for God to create life and death? These questions introduce an immense suspense between an individual’s capacities to define God and His ways.

In this perspective, it is also crucial to question the origin and meaning of life. As the bible reveals, “The LORD God formed the man from the dust of the ground and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life, and the man became a living being” (Genesis 2:7 NIV).

Compared to other living things such as trees and animals, the form of life that was given to man is special in terms of how the book of Genesis explains. The question is whether this forms the genesis of the differences between man and other living things. In this paper, it is argued that the account of creation portrayed in the book of Genesis gives a deeper meaning of life than it appears at face value.

This revelation is clear when the book is read from a psychoanalytic approach as opposed to the religious dimension. Interpreting the book of Genesis psychoanalytically often calls for consideration of theory of existentialism, oedipal conflicts, and presentation of Thanatos and Eros as destructive forces, which when evoked, led to the eating the forbidden fruit of the tree of knowledge by Adam and Eve and hence the dawn of conflicts in man.

Examination of Adam and Eve In the book of genesis, Adam and Eve provide good examples of the interaction of Thanatos and Eros. In the context of the story of Adam and Eve, Thanatos refers to the fear that life lacks meaning. On the other hand, Eros refers to the opposite of this: aspirations of hope and meaning of life (Green and Groff 32).

The tree of knowledge provided the means through which Adam and Eve could come to an ample understanding of right and wrong (NIV Genesis 2:9). The serpent deceived Eve to eat the fruits by making her understand that the reasons why God had warned them not to eat them are attributed to some perceived fear that it would reveal to her the knowledge that is desired to make them select the right and the wrong from a variety of alternative possible actions.

Arguably, the evoked desire and the decision to eat the fruits are attributed to the need to struggle and understand the meaning of their existence or life. This means that, something was hidden to them. They wanted to unveil it, a case that is somewhat analogous to the people’s constant struggle to understand ones uniqueness and the degree to which he or she is special.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Consistent with this argument, it is arguable that the serpent evoked the desire for Eve to seek an understanding of why God was more special than they were. It is this understanding that would give them a true meaning of life and why they were different from other animals and living things in general. In fact, after they ate the fruit, when God called out for them, Adam replied, “I heard you in the garden, and I was afraid because I was naked” (NIV Genesis 3:10).

With the recognition that Adam was naked, he developed a feeling of meaning. This implies that he was able to come to terms with what he actually was and with the things that are meaningful in life such as clothing. Therefore, without these things, life is meaningless since he would not accept to face God directly because He (God) would see that he lacked something that was part of his life.

The capacity of mind to influence and be exposed to dogmatic reasoning and interpretations comes out conspicuously in the dialogue between the serpent and eve. The serpent asked eve “did God really say, “You must not eat from any tree in the garden?” (NIV Genesis3:1). Eve replied that God said, “You must not eat fruit from the tree at the middle of the garden, and you must not touch it, or you will die” (Genesis3:2).

What did the tree signify? If it was to bear fruits, which were not to be eaten, why did God include it in the garden? Arguably, this question means that the tree was incorporated in the garden to serve some hidden agenda. Indeed, the contextualization of the above two questions create two quite similar but different meanings, all constructed to expose the mind’s capabilities of understanding and decision making to prejudice.

This prejudice led to making decisions that were contradictory to the command given to Adam and Eve with regard to what they should do and what they should not. Eve choose to eat the fruit besides giving some to her husband in the desire to experience what it feels to be like God.

In the context of existentialism theory, these decisions correspond closely to the existentialism arguments that the best way of interpreting people’s actions is by studying their behaviors (Appignanesi and Zarate 36). For Eve and Adam, behaving like God, as the serpent argued, entailed having opened eyes that made it possible to differentiate between the “good and evil” (NIV Genesis 3:5).

Death as the Loss of the Meaning of Life Considering the psychological argument that the mind is the center for decision-making based on the appropriateness or inappropriateness of action, it is questionable and doubtful whether God having “…created mankind in his own image…male and female…” (NIV Genesis 1:27), could deprive him this noble element of his life.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Psychoanalytically Interpreting Genesis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is clear from the book of Genesis that God gave information about the repercussions of eating the forbidden fruit. How then could they fear the repercussions if they did not possess knowledge of the repercussions? Back to the Eros and Thanatos, God inculcated obedience by inflicting the fear of death.

As used in the book of genesis, life may be interpreted beyond the face value as entangling the realization of the true nature of both Adam and Eve. To evidence this argument, God cautioned Adam and Eve, “You must not eat fruit from the tree that is in the middle of the garden, and you must not touch it, or you will die” (NIV Genesis 3:3). However, they actually ate the fruit.

Death is the only anticipated answer here. Unfortunately, “The Lord God made garments of skin for Adam and his wife and clothed them” (NIV Genesis 3:21). Therefore, death implied recognition of ones status and physical situation. In the psychoanalytic interpretation of death, the death discussed here is consistent with Thanatos because it is arguable that, to God, death meant loosing the Garden of Eden.

On the other hand, Thanatos sees death as loss of meaning of life as opposed to not living anymore. Arguably, in the context of Adam and Eve, death implied gaining recognition of the meaning of life. Therefore, Eros and Thanatos were the conflicts between man and God. The degree of correctness of these inferences is based on the understanding of the circumstances that resulted to eviction of Adam and Eve from the garden Eden.

Oedipal Conflict and God Oedipal conflict comprises the idea and emotions possessed by the mind based on the dynamic repression for the desire to have an attachment with ones father and mother (Klein 12). In the book of Genesis, God serves as both the mother and the father figure. The attachment between mother and father often prompts feelings such as pity and sympathy.

Was this the case for God, Adam, and Eve? No. disobedience meant an end of the relationship between God and man. Can such a situation happen between mother, father, and son or daughter living in a society guided by Freudian Oedipal complex? In the book of Genesis, it is written that God cursed the woman (Eve), telling her, “I will greatly multiply thy sorrow and thy conception…in sorrow thou shalt bring forth children” (NIV Genesis 3:16).

Surprisingly, this happens to be the explanation of the Judeo-Christian creation theory for the pains encountered by women during childbirth. The worry is that this curse extends punishment to people who never committed never disobeyed or even were aware of the said disobedience (eat the forbidden fruit) in the book of Genesis.

The question that remains is whether this is acceptable and reasonable. Contemplation of this question often leads to doubting the accounts of creation provided in the book of Genesis, something that leads to treating the book and interpreting it as furthering and justifying myths of Judeo-Christian creation theory.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Psychoanalytically Interpreting Genesis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More God as the Mother and Father Figure The book of Genesis writes, “The lord God formed man of the dust of the ground (NIV Genesis 2:7). Articulation of this proposition with the origin of life is in conflict with facts of normal and practical life since a child is a product of two persons, a man and a woman.

However, in the case of the accounts of the origin of life in the book of Genesis, God, the father and the mother figure creates man, the child, from mud. What this implies is that the origin of man is from a non-living thing. This opposes the argument that is anything living can only emanate from something that is living.

Furthermore, what the account of creation means is that the only value of life of the child (man) in the eyes of the master (the Lord) is mud. Consequently, the meaning of life is mud. The book of Genesis continues to inform that God took a rib from the man and created a woman out of it. Arguably, this is a myth of precedence of creation similar to the myth that hen originates from an egg. It gives and justifies man’s superiority over woman, his supremacy, and his capacity of being the property of the earth.

God cursed Adam and kicked him out of the Garden of Eden because of disobedience. From a psychoanalysis perspective point of view, search for obedience impairs human mind’s capabilities. From a psychological point of view, human mind is the tool that controls and gives human beings different traits in comparison to other animals and living things in general. It forms the basis for making decisions (Green and Groff 52).

Does subjecting the minds of Adam and Eve to preconditions give them the freedom to make well-informed decisions that are based on reason? Apparently, it is arguable that Adam and Eve ate the fruits due to the need, though not based on reason but influence, to acquire the freedom of mind.

Significance of the Tree of Life and the Fruits The book of genesis ties this freedom to a tree, a living thing that is much less endowed with intelligence than man. Man is the most intelligent among all things created by God. Therefore, is it justifiable and reasonable to deny him knowledge and constrain it on a tree?

Knowledge is a property of mind, which is developed from experience. Is it then sound to argue that it is possible for one to acquire it at once as implied by the book of Genesis when it claims that, by merely eating the fruits from the tree at the center of the garden, Adam and eve would acquire knowledge to be equal to God? From a different perspective, after eating the fruits, Adam and eve acquired the capacity to appreciate and recognize the true meaning of life. This meaning made them perceive themselves as incomplete.

The relevance of material possession as the true meaning of life becomes apparent. Upon eating the fruit, they recognized that they were naked and could not feel free to appear before God. By linking the consequences of Adam and Eve’s disobedience with the realization of the freedom of mind, man becomes what he is simply by “what he conceives himself to be” (Appignanesi and Zarate 17).

In this context, the book of Genesis may be interpreted as theorizing and confirming the principles of existentialism. For instance, by arriving at the decision to eat the fruits that were forbidden, the act explains the present day constant sufferings of man in the Judeo creation story. Consequently, “man is nothing else, but what he makes of himself” (Appignanesi and Zarate 23).

Additionally, the willingness of man to be better day after the other becomes apparent in the book of Genesis when Eve contends to the Serpent’s advice that, if they (both) eat the fruit, they would become similar to God. The decision to eat the fruits was thus propelled by the desire and the wish of being like God.

Moral of the Book of Genesis Under the paradigms of existentialism, the choice of what one wishes to be is influenced by conscious decisions made on having prior perceptions of the right cause of action desired (Appignanesi and Zarate 29).

This argument is implied in the book of Genesis when it informs that Eve ate and even gave some fruits from the forbidden tree to her husband after realizing that they were appealing and imperative of gaining wisdom. Therefore, people’s decisions are guided by reason, which makes them different from all other living things. The consequence of disobedience is represented in the book of Genesis as a means of justifying dominance of men against women.

Does this also provide the reason for denying all women equal freedom of mind with men? The response to this query is provided by the book of Genesis when it informs, “thy desire shall be to thy husband, and he shall rule over thee” (NIV Genesis 3:16). Supporting this as the basis for the domineering of men over women and children is a neurotizing and misleading myth, which often depicts women as not having a mind of their own. This creates the wrong impression that their mind has to be excited to work by the man’s mind.

Conclusion People are always in a constant struggle to define themselves and the meaning of their life. In this paper, the meaning of death has been argued from the context of Judeo-Christian creation theory documented in the book of Genesis.

It is held that the fear that people have for death is articulated to the conception that their life may lose meaning, which is the concept of Thanatos. The conflict between man and God revealed by the Judeo-Christian creation theory is discussed as an attempt for man to struggle to have freedom of mind hence seeking to understand the meaning of everything around him.

The involvements of the serpent in the creation accounts of the book of Genesis is argued as introducing mechanisms of explaining how the human mind is prone to deception if reason fails to act as the guiding principle of decision making. From these discussions, through interpretation of the book of Genesis psychoanalytically, the paper presents the book as a quest for justification of moral disorders such as domineering of one sex against the other and exploitation of children and women by the man figure.

Works Cited Appignanesi, Richard, and Oscar Zarate. Introducing Existentialism. Cambridge, UK: Icon, 2001. Print.

Green, Douglas, and Richard Groff. Early psychological thought: Ancient accounts of mind and soul. Westport, Connecticut: Praeger, 2003. Print.

Klein, Martins. “The Oedipus Complex in the Light of Early Anxieties.” International Journal Of Psychoanalysis 26.4(1975): 11-33. Print.

NIV (The New International Version). Ed. Susan Jones. New York: Doubleday, 1985. Print.


Social Status Anxiety Essay essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Status anxiety in the social network

Socrates reaction


Works Cited

Introduction Status anxiety is the perception that somebody is socially inferior because of their background. Status anxiety is further complicated by the idea of the American dream and the desperate way in which we strive to achieve it. Those who have not achieved it are deemed inferior. Coping with status anxiety is imperative, and it is even more important to have a positive outlook on life despite the negativity around.

Status anxiety in the social network Facebook was designed for the elite, and only those who had Harvard e-mail addresses could get access. At its inception at Harvard University, it was already a case of exclusivity and an attempt to keep up with the elite.

The film, ‘The Social Network’, depicts Mark Zuckerberg as a loser who falls short of the elite club and makes desperate attempts to get social acceptance which eventually destroys his friendship and he also loses his girlfriend. The pain of a loss and the status anxiety that came with being inferior to other students at Harvard instigated the urge to revenge and brought a desire to achieve success. He decided to seek solace and had ambition that resulted in having a million dollar business.

This film describes a case of an individual who suffered status anxiety but used the negativity as a motivation. It is psychologically proven that our reaction to negative social comparison exceeds the negativity in reality. It is important to learn how to reframe these negative perceptions and as much as being concerned, it is unavoidable it should never be our personal rating. Negative perceptions are self-destructive and should be curbed but still maintain motivation (Curley, Yates and Abrams 230).

Socrates reaction Socrates reacted to negative perception and status anxiety by standing out of the crowd and subjecting himself to more ridicule. This resulted in a ricocheting effect of his exaltation as one of the greatest Greek philosophers. This action shows freedom from status anxiety; he does not care what other people thought about him. Instead he had his own view of himself which was positive and deeply engraved in his judgement and rating of himself. It is possible to say that Socrates was the best friend to himself.

The compulsion to compare oneself with others disappears with time, and the older ones grow less status anxiety than they had before (Horowitz, 212). Dealing with status anxiety by subjecting himself to ridicule, Socrates depended on the overcoming power of time. He took the risk and accepted the shame of losing his social status. Socrates was wise to choose his competitive realms; the people criticising him were merely low class citizens who were not worth being envious to.

When publicly called a gadfly, Socrates showed his acceptance of the new status. He reinforced his undeterred nature by saying that the gadfly only annoys mules. With this comparison Socrates had indicated the low social status of his critics and showed that they were both in the same social status. This is a psychological strategy of adapting to criticism by demeaning the opponent to make you feel better. The resilience with which Socrates faced his critics stands out and is a major factor for his status as an icon.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Conclusion Status anxiety is a negative view of oneself when compared to other people. It is common to be judged based on financial status or other dimensions, but the reality of one’s judgement should be positive as we are all superior in our own ways. Motivation can be derived from the envious nature of status anxiety and this will drive us to prove superiority. It is possible to counter the destructive nature of status anxiety by having positive attitude as Socrates did. In some time, the comparative nature diminishes and status anxiety lessens.

Works Cited Curley, Simon, Yates Fredrick, and Abrams Richard “Psychological sources of ambiguity avoidance.” Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes, 15 (2006): 230. Print.

Horowitz, Frances Degen. “The relationship of anxiety, self-concept, and sociometric status among fourth, fifth, and sixth grade children.” The Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 65.3 (1962): 212. Print.


Importance of the Benefit Package for Employees Proposal college admission essay help: college admission essay help

A benefits package is necessary for the well being of employees in an organization. Employee benefits can be defined as non-monetary rewards which employees gain apart from their salaries and wages. These benefits are meant to improve the quality of life of employees working in an organization.

Some of the benefits offered will be either mandatory or discretionary. Mandatory benefits are benefits which an employer has an obligation to provide to his employees as stipulated by the law. Discretionary benefits are those benefits an organization offers its employees out of its own volition. The benefits packages offered will fall in the two categories. They are meant to improve the welfare of all employees working in this organization.

The first category of benefits to be offered will be in form of retirement benefits. These benefits are mandatory by law because the government values social security of all working people. All employees in the firm employed on a permanent contract are required to remit monthly payments in specific retirement schemes.

Employees will have a specific amount of money deducted from their monthly earnings depending on the amount of salary each individual earns. The money will be held in a pension fund from which an employee will be able to obtain his savings upon retirement.

Health insurance is important because workers need to have adequate medical cover whenever they fall sick. Workers who have families will have four of their nuclear family members covered by the health scheme. Employees’ salaries will be deducted and the funds obtained will be remitted to health service providers.

This benefit is mandatory because an organization with healthy employees has the ability to produce high levels of output. Sick employees will be granted sick leave to allow them to get treatment. The company will also offer maternity leave to pregnant female employees. Health benefits will improve the living conditions of employees that work in this firm.

Housing benefits will also be offered to all employees in the organization. These benefits are discretionary. The criteria to be used will influenced by the level of status an employee holds in the organisation. Employees in a specific pay grade will be offered a uniform housing allowance every month on top of what they earn. All employees will get additional monetary compensation on top of the salaries they earn monthly.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A transport allowance will be offered to interns at the organization to help them reduce their commuting expenditure. This is a discretionary allowance which will ease the burden of commuting costs on interns about to become full time employees.

Employees will be encouraged to join optional life insurance plans with various insurance providers. These plans will be easily transferable and will offer compensation depending on the length of time an employee is willing to subscribe to them. The insurance plans offered will yield annual interest depending on the amount of premiums an employee contributes.

An insurance risk cover for employees working in hazardous environments will be introduced. The company will also implement safety measures which guarantee the wellbeing of employees. Employees who get injured accidentally while performing their duties will be offered monetary compensation for injuries sustained.

This benefit will only apply to employees who get injured inside the company. They will have to provide evidence that shows the injuries they sustained were accidental. The compensation offered will be commensurate to the type and severity of the injury suffered. Employees who are found to have used intoxicating substances in the form of alcohol and drugs at the work station will not qualify for compensation.

Other benefits to be offered will depend on the individual situation of each employee. These benefits will be offered depending on the performance appraisals of each employee in the company. There will also be benefits that will be offered to employees going through difficult times to help them recover and continue with their duties at work. These benefits make the organization to be responsive to the needs of its employees.

The recruitment and staffing policy in the organization will focus on hiring competent individuals who are suitable for the organisation’s staffing needs. The organization will be divided into four departments all of which will coordinate closely. These departments are: finance, sales and marketing, production and human resource.

The production department is critical for the company’s survival and it will have the largest number of staff. The sales and marketing department will also need several support staff that will represent the company in its target markets. The finance and human resource departments do not require large personnel teams.

We will write a custom Proposal on Importance of the Benefit Package for Employees specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The company is to be headed by a Managing Director who will oversee the operations of all departments headed by their respective managers. This position fits a person with a long term growth strategy for the firm and good leadership skills. The finance department will be under the finance manager who will be responsible for computing and analyzing financial issues in the firm.

A person with good book keeping skills combined with good financial analytical skills will be suitable for this position. Seven accountants and an IT officer working under him will be responsible for maintaining and updating the firm’s financial records.

The production department will be headed by a production manager. This will suit a person with effective technical knowledge on suitable equipment and production processes to be used by the organization. The production manager will be responsible for planning work shifts for staff under his department.

He will liaise with the marketing department to determine the level of output which needs to be produced to satisfy existing demand in the market. He will work with three line managers who will supervise support staff in the firm. The support staff will be operating production machines. Employees in this department will be offered a risk cover because of the hazards they are exposed to in their working environment.

The human resource department will be headed by a human resource manager. A person with a thorough understanding of labour issues and efficient human resource practices will be suitable for this position.

The human resource manager will be responsible for recruitment, staffing and preparing organizational procedures to be followed by the firm’s employees. He or she will work closely with other support staff including front office staff, drivers, secretaries and security officers. These employees will assist the organization to run its operations smoothly.

A marketing manager will watch over sales and marketing functions in the organization. A person that can effectively analyse existing market opportunities and their potential will be suitable for this position. He will be responsible for initiating marketing strategies and plans that help to increase the company’s market share.

He will be assisted by sales executives who will be liaising with distributors to meet the set sales targets. Sales executives will also be required to conduct market research to gather important information and data which reveal more about the market.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Importance of the Benefit Package for Employees by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The recruitment criteria for employees to fill these positions will be influenced by their skills, suitability and experience. All recruited candidates will have to undergo rigorous interviewing processes to determine their suitability. The finance, production and marketing departments need employees who have college education.

The interviewed employees will have to do aptitude tests to evaluate their skills, personalities and knowledge. Employees selected to work in production will undergo induction programs to make them conversant with technical procedures involved. The organization has a clear communication structure which all employees are required to follow when they are performing their duties.

Cafeteria plans will be included in the benefits policy being formulated. Employees will be able to purchase meals during lunch and tea breaks. The cafeteria program will be subsidized and employees will pay a small fee for the service which will be deducted from their gross salaries.

There will be schemes that reward employees who surpass established performance parameters. These individual incentives will be influenced by impressive performance outcomes. These employees will be given bonuses, holiday benefits and gifts to motivate them. A study leave paid for by the company will be offered to talented employees who desire to acquire more skills and knowledge in their areas of expertise.

In conclusion, these benefits will help to improve the welfare of all employees who work in the organization. All employees will be made aware of these policies to make them conversant with organizational procedures.


“Blade runner” as an Interesting Representation of a Possible Future Essay (Movie Review) college essay help near me

The movie “Blade runner” is an interesting representation of a possible future that humanity may enter into within the coming years and brings to light several ethical dilemmas that we as a species will eventually face. As technology continues to progress, it may very well come to pass that the “replicants” depicted in the movie may eventually become as common as television sets, however, it thus becomes questionable as to whether or not something that looks human will be treated in a humane way.

Even though the replicants showed the desire to live, depicted various forms of human emotion and complex thought processes they were still disposed of and thought of as nothing more than mere appliances. Despite the fact that the aforementioned characteristics are one of the defining traits of sentience and being “human”, the apparently dystopian society that humanity lives in within the futuristic setting depicted has come to consider such aspects as being nothing more than a byproduct of a manufacturing process.

This can actually be considered as a subtle attempt at having people question just how much emotion can be vested into what is considered nothing more than an appliance. The film thus becomes a form of critique against the continued development of technology without sufficient care and morality. Not only that, the film also heavily implies that humans are beings whose needs can be artificially met.

Evidence of this can be seen in the scene involving Sebastian wherein he lives with artificial companions and the fact that the escaped replicant Zhora was able to get a job in a strip club. This shows that not only can a person’s need for friendship and companionship be satisfied through artificial means (i.e. manufactured companions) but their sexual desires can also be equally met as seen in the case of Zhora.

When taking such factors into consideration the film thus delves into the moral dilemma of whether specific forms of technological advancement should even be enacted given the possible social, moral and ethical consequences. From a cinematographic perspective, the movie is somewhat drab when compared to modern day science fiction films that are practically laced with CGI and other forms of graphical enhancements.

However, when taking into consideration the fact that the film continues to illicit numerous questions from modern day viewers (i.e. whether Deckard himself is a replicant, or whether his romance with Rachel would even work out) shows how the acting, story and directing were able to create a timeless masterpiece that questions numerous aspects of human nature and the consequences of technological advancement. It should be noted though that the film does have some rather questionable elements.

For example, in the scene involving Deckard and Rachel where he forcibly stops her from leaving and forces himself on her, such a scene can be considered equivocal to rape when placed into the current context of present day society.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Yet, it also creates a rather strange question: can an act be considered rape if the person being raped is not even human? Overall, the movie is an excellent view into one of the possible futures that humanity may find itself in. Combing science fiction with moral dilemmas, the film helps to shed light on the deficiencies of humanity as a whole and how such aspects can impact our views on what is right and what is wrong.


Movie Response- Blade Runner Essay (Movie Review) best college essay help

Blade Runner is a 1982 movie by director Ridley Scott. The movie was a follow up to his 1979 science fiction hit Alien. The movie is a blend of science fiction and detective noir genres. Blade Runner is one of the most significant science fiction movies that were made in the 1980s.

It has since grown in popularity. Initially, the film did not perform well financially. In addition, movie critics were divided with some giving it positive reviews while others castigated it. This dismal performance has been at times blamed on the fact that the movie’s release coincided with the premier of Spielberg’s monster hit E.T. This paper will discuss the film’s style, visual aspects, acting, music, and its accolades.

The film’s style is quite captivating. The film was futuristically set in 2019’s Los Angeles. This futuristic design was conceived by renowned artist Syd Mead. The design was inspired by other designs used in movies like the 1927 Metropolis and the 1968 Space Odyssey. Due to its stylistic success, the film has served as an inspiration for several other movies.

Other movies that have tried to copy its cyber punk, dystrophic look include the 1989 Batman, The Fifth Element of 1997, and the Matrix of1999. This style mostly features science fiction and detective genre combinations. In addition, there is the use of the alienated hero with a questionable morality. There is also the use of dark locations and high tech gadgets.

The film’s theme is mortality versus immortality. The main character is called from retirement to hunt down Android beings who have escaped from their planet. While the Androids possess great abilities, their lifespan is only four years. This is why it is feared that their mission on earth is to try and prolong their life.

The immortality theme was also expounded in the theatrical release poster that read, “Man has made his match, now it is his problem”. This was a popular theme in the 1980s when humanity was making tremendous progress in discovery. Other successful films of the time carried similar themes.

The acting in the Blade Runner is very satisfying mostly because the film’s narration does not dictate the actors. Unlike in most cases, even the police officers in the film are more relaxed. The tough acting that is synonymous with such characters was not used in this film. In addition, the android beings are not so obvious. They act more like human beings and they are less predictable.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The movie’s soundtrack consisted of songs, technological sounds, and short sentences. Due to the film’s dependence on visual imagery, the soundtrack did not carry much weight. The narration also absorbed most of the soundtrack’s purposes. However, even with its little significance the soundtrack does not disappoint.

One of the controversies surrounding the release of the Blade Runner was the fact that the initial director’s cut was ignored. The executive producers hijacked Ridley Scott’s project and changed most of his decisions. The executives added a narration, changed the soundtrack, altered some shots, and gave the film a happier ending. Recently the director’s version of the film was released and it had better reviews than the previous version. Overall, Scott’s film was much better than the executives’ version.

Blade runner was not very successful on the awards circuit. The film was nominated for only two Academy Awards. Moreover, it was overlooked for an Oscar nomination. Eventually, it won no major awards.


“What is the Definition of Terrorism? And why is the White House Afraid of Using the Term?” by Timothy Kelly Essay (Critical Writing) essay help: essay help

The author of this article is Timothy Kelly. Kelly argues that the White House evades from giving a concise definition of the term “terrorism.” He reviews several exchanges between two secretaries to the White House and different reporters to show how the White House evades using this term. Hence, the purpose of Kelly’s document is to show how Obama’s government refrains from using the term “terrorism” and possible reasons that promote this behaviour.

Since Obama became president in 2009, his government has refrained from using the term “terrorism” (Kelly par. 1). This is in the belief that failing to acknowledge terrorism will lessen cases of terror taking place in their state. Besides, using the term terrorism may create anxiety among people, and thus place the burden of duty on the government, an obligation that they are not ready to accept.

The earliest case that showed Obama’s government refrained from using the term terrorism was during a 2009 press conference with Robert Gibbs, the former Press Secretary to Obama’s White House (Kelly par. 2). The conference took place after killings that occurred at Fort Hood in Memphis. Jennifer, who is a reporter, interviewed Gibbs to find out whether Obama’s government categorized the Fort Hood tragedy as an act of terrorism.

From the interview, it is clear Obama’s government avoids using the word terrorism or groups that relate to terrorists such as al Qaeda. Rather than answering questions posed by Jennifer, Gibbs says that the issues are still under Federal Bureau Investigation (FBI). For instance, Jennifer asks, “Has there been a determination about whether it was terrorist — an act of terrorism?” Gibbs replies “I think the FBI is the best place to discuss that” (Kelly par. 3).

Some moments later, another reporter interviews Gibbs to find out whether Obama’s government regards the suspect as a terrorism suspect. Similar to how Gibbs answers Jennifer, he says that the FBI should answer that question.

Another reporter called Mara asks Gibbs to explain how Obama’s administration defines an act of terrorism. Gibbs avoids this question by saying that the question can get a right answer from a law enforcement official. However, Mara insists that he only wants to know whether there is a definition for the phrase. This time, Gibbs becomes furious and talks rudely.

The last reporter interviews Gibbs on how Obama’s administration defines terror. He first provides him with probes on the definition of terror. He describes terror as an act of an organized group that instills deep fear and may involve force or violence. He then asks Gibbs whether he can define terror in this way since the people at Fort Hood experienced all these feelings. Still, Gibbs says that he cannot answer that question since he is not a law enforcement official.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He evades this question by expressing his shock and sending condolence to the victims of the incident and their relatives. From the exchanges between the four reporters and Gibbs, it is clear that Obama’s administration tries to evade the term “terrorism” in all aspects of their communication.

According to FBI’s Code of Federal Regulations, terrorism is “the unlawful use of force and violence against persons or property to intimidate or coerce a government, the civilian population, or any segment, in advancing political or social objectives” (Nia 149). The FBI also classifies terrorism as either international or domestic.

FBI defines domestic terrorism as the illegitimate use of violence by a person or a group that has businesses in the United States. Another definition of domestic terrorism includes Puerto Rico devoid of foreign direction devoted, against persons or possessions, to threaten the government or the national population (Kelly par. 9). Conversely, the FBI defines international terrorism as acts that endanger human life, or violent acts that contravene criminal rules of the United States and other nations.

Thus, FBI gives clear descriptions of the word terrorism. The cause and goals of the terrorist groups are some aspects that influence these definitions. Nevertheless, the White House Press Secretary cannot describe the term terrorism, sufficiently. This means that Obama’s government refuses to define the word deliberately because there is no way that government officials could be unaware of the meaning of such a word. Therefore, I support Kelly’s argument that Gibbs is not willing to define this term due to strange reasons.

In October 2012, Jay Carner, who is the current Press Secretary to the White House, became interviewed by Jack Tapper, a reporter at ABC. The interview sought to find whether Obama’s administration described the attack on the U.S. diplomatic mission in Benghazi as an act of terror. Although Carner tried to describe the act as terrorism during the interview, his descriptions seemed imprecise and incoherent since they did not get support from the rhetoric that the phrase encompassed.

For instance, he explains that basing on the assessments the incident had some extreme elements. He also reported that the President described the event as an act of terror two days later. When asked whether the President believed that the event could be described as terrorism, he first said that President only believed that it was an act of terror. However, he later agreed that the incident could be defined as terrorism since it involves the assault of a diplomat.

Similar to the views of Kelly, it is clear that Obama’s administration refuses to define the word terrorism. Rather, this government plays a game of interchanging words like “act of terror” and “terror acts” (Kelly par. 11). Numerous efforts by the press to get the administration define this word have borne no fruits.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on “What is the Definition of Terrorism? And why is the White House Afraid of Using the Term?” by Timothy Kelly specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More While describing the attacks on Benghazi Mission, during a presidential debate, many people expected that Obama would give a concise definition to this term. However, the President just played with words and refused to give a technical meaning to the word “terrorism.”

Although, on one side, I acknowledge the benefits that may arise from failing to define or use this term, on the other side I feel that this may create tension, suspension and mistrust in Obama’s government. I suggest that Obama’s government should not evade using the term “terrorism”, but should give a concise definition of the term, which corresponds to the defini

tion by FBI. Besides, the government must prepare to handle any consequences, or expectations that may arise due to use of this term. This case demonstrates how some politicians and people fail to give technical meanings of words for the sake of some benefits. Obama’s administration expects that failure to use the word “terrorism” will lessen cases of terror taking place in the United States, and preventing feelings of anxiety and concerns about terrorism among citizens.

Works Cited Kelly, Timothy. “What is the Definition of Terrorism? And why is the White House Afraid of Using the Term?” ForexTV.com. N.p., n.d. Web.

Nia, Mahdi. “From Old to New Terrorism: The Changing Nature of International Security.” Globality Studies Journal 18 (2010): 149-165. Print.


HIV/AIDS among African Americans Research Paper best essay help

Introduction The prevalence rates of HIV/AIDS vary from on ethnic group to another in the United States. The epidemiology of this global menace has evolved with time since it started by affecting the white people and is now affecting the black people. Epidemiological data indicates that in the modern society, black people have high prevalence rates of HIV/AIDS.

One of the many ethnic groups experiencing worst cases of this disease is the African Americans because they have high prevalence rates when compared to other ethnic groups. For example, this disease is more prevalent among African Americans than among Asian Americans and Hispanic Americans.

Stone, Ojikutu, Rawlings, and Smith (2009) record that within a period of 20 years, viz.1985 – 2005, the rate of infection of HIV/AIDS doubled from 25 per cent to 50 per cent among African Americans.

This change means that more African Americans are contracting the disease, living with it, or are under treatment than ever before. Additionally, statistics indicate that HIV/AIDS infections have gender orientation, as rates of infections are higher among women than among men (National Alliance of State


The Length of the Working Day and Class Struggle Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

The significance of each workday time-span According to Marx, there are some levels of significance attached to the length of each working day. In fact, the power and quantity of labor should normally be purchased and consequently traded at a price that matches its worth or value. The final value derived from a product accrues from labor power. The value results from the time taken to make a product.

However, it is true that the quantity of labor force that is required to offer subsistence is hardly equivalent to the duration of each working day. The time taken to complete task and create value is more than the required workforce time. This is what translates into surplus labor as Marx claims. Therefore, the length of each workday ought to be considered as a variable quantity that adjusts in accordance with the quantity of excess labor force.

The period used in every workday can however just fluctuate within definite confines. From the capitalist system’s nature, there will always be certain levels of surplus labor. Whereas this surplus labor may approach zero limits, it cannot be an absolute zero in as much as real limits do not exist. The employees’ maximum working days are constrained or limited by both the moral constraints as well as the physical limitations, including the necessitation to accomplish other duties.

Thus, with respect to the length of working days, capitalists appear to derive some mutual benefits when they compel the labor force to toil an extra mile to generate additional product value. This implies that, all capitalists will normally materialize as capital embodied. The essence of capitalists will just resemble the capital soul, and it will not assume any other attribute.

Regardless of being aware of the needs of each labor force, capitalist are less concerned about the benefits derived by workforce when they extend the span of time worked every day. Capital has a distinctive attribute. Its drive is to compel the production means to absorb excess quantities of labor force to produce surplus values. Capitalists will hence strive to derive the highest possible returns or benefits from the labor force use-values.

The labor forces have their personal observations as regards to the length of time they should carry out their tasks. For instance, the power or energy used by workers is unlike that which accrues from other services or products. Indeed, the power generated from labor can be used to create value in products and services.

From the perspective of labor force, the demands made by capitalists reveal the excessive use of workers power. For instance, entrepreneurs may potentially exploit loads of workforce energy in a single day. Nonetheless, the same labor force might take approximately four to five days in order to reinstate the consumed energy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The capitalists use labor-power and spoil the same labor. To be honest, if capitalists were workers, they might not be able to employ five days worth of their workforce energy in a single day, and just pay themselves only a single day’s worth. Therefore, just as capitalists demand product values, the labor force should be reimbursed based on the generated commodities value. This necessitates that the length of each working day should be a factor to be considered when paying the labor force.

Why Harvey sees the workday time-span tension as class struggle In the work of Marx, the central subject relates to class tension whereby class conflict defines the history. The present time is not an exception of this. In fact, in the contemporary era, class conflicts are described by the stress present amid employees and entrepreneurs. Class struggle emerges because of the asymmetry amid the exchange values of workforce power and the derived user values.

The strongest class in the struggle is that of the capitalists. That is, the time span for each workday is a factor that should be considered when paying workers. Nevertheless, the capitalists use their class to define and exert extra force when implementing what they think the labor force should be paid.

Whereas capitalists are the strongest class, they are not just given superior bargaining command against the workers. Most societal organizations including chattel bylaws were defined to support and protect the desires of capitalists. The production mode is made to look as if it belongs to the capitalists’ economic system.

These modes of production continuously support capitalists to an extent that they destroy the essence of the workforce. Despite the surplus value generated by labor force after working for longer hours, it is difficult to find that the capitalists are behaving differently. The amount given to workforce as a representation of their efforts remains the same, hence causing tensions amongst these two groups.

Gaining surplus values and improving products worth are the desires and essence of the capitalists. All capitalists realize these goals via exploiting the workforce through failing to offer them the recommended payments for the complete value package on what has been produced.

As a result, there is a structural struggle involving capitalists and labor force given that capitalists are compelled to exploit to survive. Any system that belongs to the capitalists necessitates the exploitation of the workforce. There are measures taken to reduce the hardships faced by employees.

We will write a custom Essay on The Length of the Working Day and Class Struggle specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More These include welfare and minimum remuneration packages. Nevertheless, these measures are just assumed as financial aid. In reality, the financial aids are not meant to cover the time taken to generate surplus value. It is hard to change what capitalists think or believe, and so is it the case with the labor force.


The Political Economy of Germany Report best essay help: best essay help

Overview of the political economy of Germany According to Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development, Germany is one of the strongest economies among the countries that form the European Union (16). During the last quarter of the year 2011, the real gross domestic product of Germany stood at $ 3.479 trillion (Global Finance 1).

This denotes positive economic development. The country was affected by the global financial crisis (Janning 1), which resulted in a fall of GDP growth of the country by 5.1%. The fall in the GDP of Germany during the crisis was attributed to the position that it occupied in EU trade.

Being an exporter of numerous technological goods and machineries across the European Union, the country had a low return from trade. The trading environment in Europe shrank because of the decreased financial sector in most of the European countries. The economic strength of Germany has been enhanced by the reunification of East and West Germany. Germany has an active political landscape (Lange 2).

The political landscape of Germany is marked by rational politics. The country has a federal government which is led by a Chancellor. The country is subdivided into different regions. The current head of the federal government is Chancellor Angela Merkel. Germany is headed by a coalition government which is composed of three parties; they include the Christian Democratic Union, Christian Social Union and the Free Democratic Party (Schwarzer 3).

Economic policy areas of Germany in relation to the European Union Germany is amongst the strongest supporters of the European Union. The country has exhibited support for economic integration of Europe through the European Union. To that effect, the country has pursued many policies in regard to its incorporation into the European Union. Germany highly advocates for economic integration of the European Union because of the benefits that accrue to the functioning of the union.

The economy of Germany is highly supported by exports. A third of the national output of Germany emanates from exports. The EU presents many export opportunities to Germany. Current policies of Germany on European Union integration began in the early years of the 1990s. This is the time when the country began seeking for real economic identity in Europe. The European Union was uncovered as the main tool that would help Germany to keep pursuing its economic goals (Janning 2).

The fiscal policy in relation to the global economic crisis The current government of Germany is pursuing numerous economic policies. The fist economic policy that is being pursued concerns the elimination the budgetary deficit in the coming years. Deficits in the budget of a country are argued to have been aggravated by the financial problems in the European Union (Schettkat and Langkau 10).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The government has focused on bringing together all the public finances so as to raise enough capital to bail the country from the crisis in order to improve the trading environment in the country, and the attainment of favorable figures in the balance of payments. The balance of payments is often depended on the rate at which a country participates and gains from exportation of products. As the country focuses on raising revenue generation, it must also assess the performance of the European Union.

The reason for this is that the EU forms the immediate foreign market that comes with many economic benefits to Germany. The benefits accrue to the level of integration that has been attained in the EU. Internal economic policies in highly economically integrated regions are often affected by forces from the Union (Schwarzer 2).

The common agriculture policy of the European Union – impacts on the economy of Germany The European Union has what is known as a Common Agricultural Policy. The policy seeks to protect farmers in all countries forming the union. Farmers in Germany and other European Union countries are efficient. However, there are a number of factors that limit the farmers. They hinder them from competing effectively in the international market.

These factors include input, land and cost of fuel. Through CAP, extra funds are provided to farmers in order to help them subsidize the high costs of production. Tariffs and quotas are imposed on agriculture products that are imported into the union. According to the policy, Germany and other EU countries are barred from offering any other support to their agricultural sectors. Being a beneficiary of the CAP, the responsibility of the Germany government is to ensure that funds that offered by CAP are managed effectively.

Germany is one of the strong advocates of the policy. It was among the first signatories of the treaty that officiated this policy. With improvements in the framework on which CAP is administered, Germany and other EU counterparts are deemed to remain competitive in the international market (European Commission 1).

Positive and negative aspects of EU membership on Germany Belonging to a regional economic body has both positive and negative effects to countries. Germany has derived a lot of economic benefits from its membership in the European Union. Germany is an active exporter of different commodities.

Its presence and membership in the European Union has enhanced its exportation capacity. A lot of cross border trade barriers have been eliminated from the EU giving Germany the opportunity to thrive in the EU market (Schwarzer 2). On the other hand, participation in regional trading blocs results in negative effects for participant countries.

We will write a custom Report on The Political Economy of Germany specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Inasmuch as the country benefits from the reduced trade restrictions, it also faces increased importations from other countries. As a strong economy, Germany has managed to use its economic power to export more, thence, offsetting the deficit that is brought about by imports.

Foreign investment in Germany by countries which do not belong to the EU Germany has a large economy. The economy of Germany is argued to be decentralized in the sense that internal economic policies are pursued regionally (Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development 16). The country possesses a favorable investment climate for foreign investors.

The country has a stable political environment which has been witnessed since the reunification that took place in the last decade of the 20th century. Germany has a stable government which oversees economic development. It has cultivated a strong economic environment that is supportive of continued investment. As of today, there are a substantive number of foreign firms that control their production in Germany.

The high rate of economic development of Germany is backed by investment in technological development. According to Legler, Licht, and Spielkamp (5), technological development backs industry in the country hence encouraging productivity. Nearly all industries in Germany utilize high technological production methods helping in positioning the country not only in Europe, but also in the entire world.

All these factors denote the presence of an active economic base in Germany. The wider economy and a relatively high population denote the present of a market and labor force for foreign investors (Adekola and Sergi 258). Foreign investors need to assess the role and benefits of Germany in the European Union. This presents an indirect but beneficial aspect. By investing in Germany, non- EU countries can get an opportunity to market their products in Europe without incurring excessive expenses.

Political stability in Germany is a positive factor of influence on economic development. Any foreign investor in the country would find a conflict free zone in which to establish a business. Good governance is also a positive feature in Germany (Lange 3). It Presents a favorable business climate by eliminating business vices like corruption. Investors are required to go through the stipulated procedures. The complexity of the procedures is reduced by the favorable business landscape.

The other supportive factor, which is an advantage to foreign investment, is the presence of numerous foreign companies in the country, some of which come from outside the European Union. Foreign investors can adopt to business entry practices that have been used by benchmark foreign firms operating in Germany.

Viitala (38) observed that the main disadvantage of foreign investment in Germany is the presence of a highly competitive economic environment. The competitive pressure resonates from goods and services from other EU countries that trade with Germany. The EU countries have a competitive edge over other countries or firms from other countries.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Political Economy of Germany by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The advantage comes from the fact that EU based firms are exempted from numerous trade procedures and costs. The argument here is that irrespective of the presence of internal incentives for investment in Germany, firms originating from outside the EU are often disadvantaged. The disadvantage is seen in cases of access to the EU market.

Works Cited Adekola, Abel and Bruno S. Sergi. Global Business Management: A Cross-Cultural Perspective. Burlington, VT: Ashgate, 2007. Print.

European Commission. Common Agricultural Policy (CAP). 2012. Web.

Global Finance. Germany Country Report: GDP data and GDP forecasts; economic, financial and trade information; the best banks in Germany; country and population overview. 2012. Web.

Janning, Josef. Europe: Germany’s Dilemma. European Policy Center. 2011. Web.

Lange, Thomas. The Political Economy of German Unification. Providence u.a.: Berghahn Books, 1998. Print.

Legler, Harald, Georg Licht, and Alfred Spielkamp. Germany’s Technological Performance: A Study on Behalf of the German Federal Ministry of Education and Research; with 28 Tables. Heidelberg: Physica-Verl, 2000. Print.

Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development. Oecd Economic Surveys: Germany. Paris: OECD, 2012. Print.

Schettkat, Ronald and Jochem Langkau. Economic Policy Proposals for Germany and Europe. New York: Routledge, 2012. Print.

Schwarzer, Daniela. The Political Economy of Germany in the Sovereign Debt Crisis. Bruegel: Petterson Institute for International Economics. 2011. Web.

Viitala, Tomi. Taxation of Investment Funds in the European Union. Amsterdam: International Bureau of Fiscal Documentation, 2005. Print.


The Political Economy of Great Britain Report college admission essay help

Table of Contents The Political Economy

Great Britain and the Economic Recession

Great Britain and the EU

Foreign Investment in Great Britain


Works Cited

The Political Economy This paper seeks to discuss the political economy of Great Britain. Great Britain is made up of England, Wales, and Scotland. Great Britain is ranked number four in Europe in terms of population density. A majority of the inhabitants of Great Britain are English making up 80 per cent of the present population. The remaining percentage is made up of the Scottish, Welsh, and Irish people. Great Britain is part of the G8 meaning that it has a stable economy (Gorton and Schmid 4).

Great Britain has achieved economic prowess despite the fact that it has to import most of its raw materials. On top of that, Great Britain imports 40 percent of its food supply. The country’s economy relies heavily on the exportation of manufactured goods. The major exports include “machine tools, automobiles, aircraft, electronic and communications equipment, clothing and textiles, and chemicals” (Washington Post Press 1).

More than two thirds of the GDP are derived from the services industries which are made up of the banking sector, insurance sector and business services. These sectors have employed close to 70 per cent of all employees in Great Britain. In addition, “Great Britain is a constitutional monarchy” (Washington Post Press 1). The constitution of Great Britain is a collection of statutes, judicial decisions, usage, and tradition.

In Great Britain, sovereignty is vested in parliament. Parliament is made up of the House of Commons, the House of Lords, and the crown. Furthermore, the British system of corporate governance supports the principle of shareholder sovereignty (Anglo Saxon model of capitalism); the returns of the corporations’ stakeholders are given priority (Evans 23). The British company law contains mandatory rules on neither of these matters, though it prohibits neither feature and seems sufficiently flexible (Mallin 4).

In Great Britain, institutional investors are exceptionally powerful because of the level of their ownership. According to as report produced by the Office of National Statistics in 2005, institutional investors own the majority of the Great Britain equity, with insurance companies such as the Standard Life owning 17 percent of the Great Britain equity by the end of 2004 (Mallin 6).

Policy makers argue institutional investors are extremely important in ensuring that corporate governance best practices are followed. This has resulted into a sea of change in the Great Britain’s corporate ownerships.

These changes have led to a shift of share ownership from individual ownership to institutional ownership. Office of National Statistics has reported that in 1963, individual investors in the Great Britain owned 53 per cent of shares (Mallin 7). The percentage of individual share ownership has fallen steadily in the last forty years. In 1989, it had fallen to 21 percent. Amazingly, individual share ownership had fallen to 14 percent in 2004.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In contrast, institutional ownership has increased steadily over the past five decades (Mallin 8). Most of the institutions that own shares are large insurance companies and pension funds. The Office of National Statistics has indicated that the percentage of institutional ownership has grown from 10 percent in 1963 to 17 percent in 2004 (Edwards and Banks 67). On top of this, the corporate industry of the Great Britain has realized a dramatic increase in the number of foreign institutional investors (Rahman and Bullock 68).

Great Britain and the Economic Recession Like other European nations, Great Britain was significantly affected by the global financial crisis. Great Britain started feeling the heat of global recession in January 2009. The Office of National Statistics announced that the GDP had fallen by 1.5 per cent during the final quarter of the financial year of 2008 (Brown 1).

In the first quarter of 2009, the GPD fell by 2.4 percent, and by June 2009, Great Britain’s economy was 5.5 per cent below its peak (Brown 1). The recession that occurred in Great Britain was as a result of the larger global financial crisis that began in August 2007. The most hit sector of the economy was the banking sector. Banks accumulated huge debts having invested earlier in assets that later turned out to be unsafe, illiquid and worthless (Vaitilingam 5). As a result, domestic and foreign investors withdraw their capital.

The housing sector was the other hardest hit sector of the economy. The economic crisis led to a significant drop in the prices of houses in Great Britain. As a result, potential sellers withdraw their houses from the market (Vaitilingam 5). In addition, the employment sector suffered a huge blow. By the end of 2009, 573,000 jobs had been lost representing the highest number of job losses since 1971(Brown 1).

Great Britain and the EU The European Union is made up of 27 European nations, which share political and economic privileges. The EU has various supranational independent institutions, which form a link between the cooperating nations. These institutions offer a channel through which intergovernmental decisions are met.

The European Commission and the council of the European Union are the chief institutions of the EU. Others include the European central bank, the European council and the European parliament. In addition, the court of Justice of the European Union is a key legal institution of the EU. The Europe parliament is involved in the formation of laws which govern the EU’s member states.

The EU has established a single market by formulating well defined laws. Under this system, most of the barriers which hinder trade between member states have been abolished. As a result, there is free movement of goods and services between member states. The most significant legislations are related to immigration, foreign investment, and foreign exchange. The EU has established a single currency for all its member states.

We will write a custom Report on The Political Economy of Great Britain specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As a member, of the European Union, Great Britain benefits in a number of ways. The concept of single market has made companies operating in EU member states to lower the prices of their products so as to become more competitive (DTI 3). This concept also makes its easier for companies from Great Britain to conduct business in other EU member states.

In addition, the concept of single market ensures that no customs duty is paid on goods being exchanged between EU member states. Great Britain also benefits from the policy of free movement of citizens between the EU member states. This policy allows Britons to live, study, work and travel to other EU member states. Statistics indicate since 1995 more than 100,000 students have studied in other EU member states (DTI 3).

These statistics further indicate that close to 3.5 million jobs in Great Britain is a result of Great Britain’s EU membership (DTI 3). The only disadvantage of joining the EU is that a country might lose its sovereignty (DTI 3). However, the pros for joining the EU are much greater than the cons.

Foreign Investment in Great Britain Great Britain boasts of a number of features which attract investors (Trade and Investment 1). First, any business that operates in Great Britain is guaranteed of fast, easy access to the European market. Secondly, Great Britain has close to 28 million skilled workers. As such, any business that operates in Great Britain is likely to get the right people for the job. Third, Great Britain has low utility costs.

Fourth, Great Britain has established a regulatory environment that promotes growths and profits. Fifth, Great Britain has low corporate and personal taxation. Sixth, Great Britain is a center of world class research, design and development. On top of that, Great Britain has eliminated most barriers which hinder foreign investments.

Conclusion In summary, Great Britain is made up of England, Wales, and Scotland. Great Britain is ranked number four in Europe in terms of population density. A majority of the inhabitants of Great Britain are English making up 80 per cent of the present population. Great Britain has achieved economic prowess despite the fact that it has to import most of its raw materials. On top of that, Great Britain imports 40 percent of its food supply.

The country’s economy relies heavily on the exportation of manufactured goods. Like other European nations, Great Britain was significantly affected by the global financial crisis. Great Britain started feeling the heat of global recession in January 2009. The Office of National Statistics announced that the GDP had fallen by 1.5 per cent during the final quarter of the financial year of 2008.

The hardest hit sectors include the banking, employment, and housing sectors. Great Britain boasts of a number of features which attract investors: a business that operates in Great Britain is guaranteed of fast, easy access to the European market, Great Britain has close to 28 million skilled workers, low utility costs, and low corporate and personal taxation. In addition, Great Britain has eliminated most barriers which hinder foreign investments.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Political Economy of Great Britain by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Brown, Cooper. “The Global Economic Recession”. UK Times 15 Dec. 2010: 1-10. Print.

Department of Trade and Industry (DTI). Implement – from Quality to Organisational Excellence. March 2008. Web.

Edwards, Jehnan, and Fischer, Khan. Banks, Finance and Investiment in the UK. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996. Print.

Evans, Joel. Decision processes, monitoring, incentives and large firm performance in the UK. Aberdeen: The Rober Gordon Univerity Press, 1995. Print.

Gorton, Garry, and Schmid, Anthony. Universal banking and the performance of UK firms,Workingpaper. Pennsylvannia: University of Pennsylvannia Press, 1998. Print.

Mallin, Claw. International Corporate Governace: A case Study Approach. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishing, 2006. Print.

Rahman, Saul. and Bullock, P. Relationships Between Soft TQM, Hard TQM, and Organisational Performance. March 2002. Web.

Trade and Investment. Benefits of Investing in the UK. October 2012. Web.

Vaitilingam, Romesh. Recession:Britain. London: ESRCPress, 2010. Print.

Washington Post Press. “Great Britain”. The Washington Post 23 May 2008: 1-10. Web.


Walmart Canada Company Overview Essay online essay help: online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


The company’s operational management

The company’s value and supply chains

The company’s performance measures

The company’s competitive advantage

The company’s services’ and goods’ designs



Introduction Walmart Canada was established in 1994. Its inception was as a result of the collapse of Woolo, a subsidiary of Woolo Canada, which was renovated and given a Walmart banner. In addition to taking its place, Walmart Canada also retained all the former employees of Woolo. This then marked the beginning of operations for this company. Walmart Canada has since grown considerably and has emerged successful in management, marketing, service provision and expansion.

Walmart Canada has many discount stores distributed all over Canada and its environs. Their sizes vary from 51000 up to 15000 square feet. The stores house general merchandise and a wide variety of foods stuffs. In addition to the food, most of these stores also have;


Garden center

Tire and lube express

One hour photo processing lab

Bank branch

Portrait studio

Optical center

Fast food outlet

Limited grocery outlets

The Walmart Canada discount stores include full service supermarkets that have poultry and meat, bakeries, frozen foods, garden products, dairy produce, delicatessen and seafood. In addition to these, most of the discount stores also have pharmacies, pet shops and garden centers. The stores ensure that their clients are provided with virtually every service they may need once they visit. This is an ingenious way of harnessing all the business opportunities that may exist when a client visits these outlets.

This resulted from studying the markets and evaluating the specific needs of clients and their determination to have all their requirements provided at only one stop. After evaluating all the specific needs of clients, the stores began offering other supplementary services like video rentals, vending of cellular phones and hair and nail services. Quite a number of alcove shops also sprung up around the stores to capture that market too.

On the 8th of November, 2006, the concept of Walmart Supercenter was introduced in Canada. This concept had succeeded in the United States of America. This was the reason why it was brought to Canada since there were great chances of its survival and subsequent success here. Just as was forecasted, the concept grew rapidly as it attracted an overwhelming crowd of customers. Within a couple of years after creation, the concept had already brought enormous profits to the corporation.

Body Walmart Canada embraces quality of services, innovation and utter customer satisfaction. All the goods and services provided in its stores are exactly what its clients need. This implies that the stores capture a wide range of the available markets in a bid to maximize on their profit margins.

This is done through effective market study and exemplary managerial skills that make good use of the available resources to capture a good percentage of the market share. Many have wondered how the organization manages to handle the wide range of services while registering huge profits in the process.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The organization manages this by paying particular attention to its management of operations. It focuses on a number of key factors including employee training in a bid to equip their workers with exceptional skills to handle their clients and provide explicit services to all of them.

This organization also embraces the application of technology which has a wide range of benefits. It uses technology for management efficiency and entertainment too. Absolute customer satisfaction is the key idea behind making new customers and retaining existing ones. For this reason, Walmart Canada uses technology to appeal to all the five senses of its clients (Jones,


Type I Diabetes Research Paper college essay help

Table of Contents Definition

Pathogenesis of type 1 diabetes

Clinical manifestations

Laboratory diagnosis

Latest treatments

Prevention and prognosis of the disease

Works Cited

Definition Type1 diabetes occurs when the body’s own immune system destroys the insulin-producing beta cells found in the pancreas (National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases). In such cases, the body’s immune system reverses its action on attacking various cells within the body, instead of fighting against disease causing pathogens. This makes it difficult for the transfer of sugar into the cells of those suffering from type 1 diabetes due to absence of insulin.

Such scenario causes severe build-up of sugar within the blood stream, hence making the body cells deprived of nutrients, which leads to weakening of other bodily functions due to lack of nutrients. However, there is need for through understanding of the immune-detailed process, resulting in type 1 diabetes before application of any kind of therapy. Such processes involve accurate identification of the children suffering from the disease (American Diabetes Association).

Pathogenesis of type 1 diabetes Causes of type 1 diabetes can be linked to human leukocyte antigen (HLA), capable of contributing to favorable conditions for the disease development within the body. However, genotypes which combine the two susceptibility haplotypes DR4-DQ8 and DR3-DQ2 are identified to be at the greatest risk of contracting type 1 diabetes.

The haplotypes are prevalent among children under the age of 10. At the same time, those who are close to affected children are at high risk of contracting type 1 diabetes based on genetically motivated make-up. Besides such presence of insulin genes in the body, chromosomes can also contribute to the disease. The disease’s susceptibility is associated with shorter forms of variable number tandem repeated within the insulin promoter which is contrary to longer forms capable of natural protection (Shulman and Daneman 680).

Issues related to increased expression of mRNA within the thymus of those identified to have longer protective repeats present one of the most potential mechanisms required in type 1 diabetes. Studies have identified over ten loci, related to the disease, in which the genes associated with activation of T-cell have been identified (National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases).

Studies on genetics have defined crucial reasons behind large and well-characterized populations in the process of identifying susceptibility genes for type 1 diabetes. Some genes are known to have less impact on the susceptibility of the disease and used in providing clues for future preventive measures.

Vitamin D and intercellular adhesion molecule gene are utilized for the purposes of providing body protection against the disease. Children diagnosed with rickets at the early stages of life are identified to have high risks of contracting type 1 diabetes at the later stages of their life (National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Type 1 diabetes is the most prevalent disease in young children. This form is considered to appear as a result of environmental changes children are subjected to at early stages of life. The process seems too rapid to be associated with genetic alterations. The cause is further explained by the concomitant widening on the HLA risk profile caused by increased environmental pressures on susceptible genotypes (National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases).

These are caused by disease causing pathogens, specifically identified as rubella. Young children under the attack of congenital rubella are considered to have high chances of contracting type 1 diabetes. Exposing children to dirty environment full of microbes and pathogen leads to innate immune responses containing some allergic reactions to the disease casing organisms (National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases).

Clinical manifestations Type 1 diabetes takes longer time to manifest due to the fact that the process of destroying insulin-producing beta cells is always long and insidious. This leads to accumulation of insulin production leading to sudden appearance of type 1 diabetes. However, warning signs of type 1 diabetes seem numerous.

These include frequency in urination among children, uncontrolled thirst for sweet things, including cold drinks, dire weakness of the body tissues and muscles also leading to extreme fatigue, blurred vision and frequent cases of irritability and acute symptoms involving nausea and vomiting. In some cases, it is possible to identify some other warning symptom, such as deep and rapid breathing, experiences of dry skin and mouth, frequent stomach pains and flush looking face (National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases).

Laboratory diagnosis Type 1 diabetes is rarely diagnosed, especially among young adults. According to research, the disease increases its presence from birth to adolescence between age eleven and twelve. The disease is at times linked to heredity though some patients normally have no disease family history.

Patient’s medical history is a requirement of the diagnosis process alongside clinical features (American Diabetes Association). Such clinical features include examination of urine for glucose levels, checking of blood pressure, thorough examination of certain body parts, especially the feet, etc. Foot sores are at times ignored owing to senselessness within the feet nerves.

Detailed analysis of the blood is required to establish the level of glucose in patient’s blood. However, glucose tolerance tests which are normally performed involve taking lots of water with 75 grams of glucose, and then blood is tested two hours after the dose has been taken.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Type I Diabetes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In such a case, impaired glucose tolerance is indicated with levels ranging from 140mg/dL to 200mg/dL (American Diabetes Association). Diagnosis is done through laboratory testing by undertaking such processes as suppressing blood glucose level. The performance of random blood glucose level is carried out to detect levels higher than 200 mg/dL and accompanied by increased thirst, fatigue and frequent urination.

Another test used is referred to as oral glucose tolerance test and hemoglobin A1C test. Levels of hemoglobin which are less than 5.7% are normal, while those between 5.7% and 6.4% indicate signs of pre-diabetes where any level higher than 6.4% identifies presence of diabetes (American Diabetes Association).

Latest treatments Those diagnosed with type 1 diabetes should adopt the habit of taking insulin on a daily basis. This is since insulin has the capability of lowering blood sugar level by making it possible for sugar to leave bloodstream and enter into cells. Insulin is injected under the skin since the doses are not available in pill form.

Health care providers normally give patients the necessary prescriptions on the type of insulin as well as the timing the dose is to be taken. The differences occur depending on speed of action and length of time the injection lasts in the body. However, there are cases when mixture of insulin is used for the purposes of obtaining the best blood glucose control. Injections should be administered from two to four times daily.

Basically, child injections require parental assistance unless the child is over 14 years old (Levitsky and Misra n.pag.). Those suffering from type 1 diabetes are advised to take meals about the same time daily, with the meal comprising almost the same kinds of foods. Undertaking regular exercises assists in controlling blood sugar level and also burning extra calories and fat within the body.

Prevention and prognosis of the disease There are still no clear prevention measures against type 1 diabetes. However, the ongoing research provides clear perspectives on the direction toward therapeutic interventions required for the solutions. Physicians can apply various preventive measures as prescribed through proven research works, such as initiation of auto-immunity and making some adjustments on beta cell regeneration.

Other possible prevention measures involve identification and elimination of environmental risk factors surrounding children. There is also possibility of re-educating children’s immune system by exposing them to the so-called beta-cell antigens which are taken orally (National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases).

Tolerance can as well be induced through insulin since it provides the required auto-antigen therapy. The immune system can also be regulated by the use of T-cells within the field of beta cell differentiation. As explained, objective regeneration of beta cells may provide other preventive strategy against type 1 diabetes which includes detailed distinction of pancreatic and non-pancreatic components.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Type I Diabetes by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The prognosis of type 1 diabetes focuses on the likely outcome of the disease. These comprise duration, complications of type 1 disease and the probable outcome. Proper medical attention ensures appropriate control of the disease. However, the disease may result in some complications, such as kidney disorders, eye infections and problems with the nerve fibers and circulatory system (American Diabetes Association).

Works Cited American Diabetes Association. “Standards of medical care in diabetes.”Diabetes Care, 34(2011):S11-S61. Print.

Levitsky, Lynne L and Madhusmita Misra. Management of type 1 diabetes mellitus in children and adolescents. 2011. Web.

National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Disease. Your guide to Diabetes: Type 1and type 2. 2010. Web.

Shulman, RM and D Daneman. “Type 1 diabetes mellitus in childhood.”Medicine,38 (2010):679-685. Print.


The Hurt Locker Report (Assessment) essay help

The movie Hurt Locker was released in 2008 at a film festival in Italy. Hurt Locker is an American action film directed and produced by Bigelow Kathryn. Just as the movie was criticized for the reckless nature of the uniformed soldiers, it went ahead to win many accolades from army veterans. The movie was produced at a time when the Middle East peace process was a global issue. Hurt Locker was shot in Jordan, some miles away from Iraq.

This was because the situation in Baghdad was unpleasant and insecure for the cast and Crewmembers. However, the scenes used in the film were typical of an Iraqi style. Natives from Baghdad acted as refugees in the film. This gave the film its major storyline just as the producer described. Hurt Locker won many awards for best movie director, best screenplay, best war action movie to mention a few. To date, the movie remains the best film that portrayed the life of a combat soldier in Iraq (Horton, 2009).

The hurt locker was an outdoor film, the producer took time to show the harsh environments that existed in the Middle East and the dangers an average citizen of Iraq encountered on a daily basis. Unlike many other action movies that were produced in a room, Hurt Locker portrayed a harsh and terrible life conditions. There was nothing intriguing about the interior decoration, it was purely a war movie, and it was done outside.

The landscapes used in the movie were the rugged mountains and deserts, which was typical of an Iraqi terrain (Horton, 2009). The dry lands and the rough roads that were filled with dusts and stones provide the natural costumes for the movie. Hurt Locker was quite different from other movies because there was really no need for the beautiful costumes instead the movie was characterized with hard lines, blood, and explosions. The movie was fully packed with breathtaking scenes that made the audience love the film.

The external decoration was well coordinated in such a way that made the actors and cast comfortable. The men were armed to the teeth, and that alone provided the feeling of real combat, and the ability to perform exemplary. Ordinarily when a person is dressed in a camouflaged uniform, he/she becomes aware of the enormous responsibility attached (Horton, 2009).

The movie was loosely based on the testimonies of Mark Boal, a journalist attached to an elite bomb squad that operated in Iraq between 2003 and 2004. The transcripts of Mark’s testimony were used to act in the film. Kathryn Bigelow wanted to explore the inside story of an elite team in the heart of a major war. Although many news agencies tried to show and report stories from major conflicts at that time, Kathryn believed that, their stories fell short of a vivid account of each elite unit in a war situation.

Kathryn believed that the reporters that covered war actions in real situation had limitations and could only describe what they feel at certain times without physically taking pictures of the area. In addition, an elite team will not allow a photographer to go that far in trying to cover their major actions in real combat.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Unlike other comedies or action movies that were shot in a quiet atmosphere, Hurt Locker was produced in Jordan at a time that refugees from Iraq were resident in Jordan. The movie cast performed well in the film and this contributed to the reason why the movie was chosen as the best movie in 2009.

The movie did not show the rich class individuals and their extravagant lifestyle, instead it portrayed a society without the rule of law, and a society where survival was best served hot. The environment used in the film reminded the audience that peace was far-fetched in Iraq and the inhabitants were at the mercy of the tyrants and warlords. Although it was a war movie, the settlements used were modern buildings that portrayed civilization of Iraq in modern times.

The social status of the inhabitant’s mostly average class was observed throughout the film. Though non-racial in nature, the characters were mostly Americans, and those who portrayed Iraqi citizens were not natives of Iraq. Except for the refugees who were natives of Iraq, the remaining casts were not from Iraq.

Hurt Locker went on to win many awards even though it had much criticism. Some army veterans argued that the reckless behavior of some of the officers of the elite bomb squad did not represent in true life the real state of an average marine. The co-ordination between the soldiers was poor.

The interaction between members of the team was poor, and not befitting for such an elite team (Horton, 2009). In some instances in the movie, the zealous captain of the bomb squad gave himself a mission that was not sanctioned by the American command. This scenes over heated the argument of how this classic movie should be rated.

The characters in the film were not specially treated unlike other movies, they never had a perfect room, or a private space or a kitchen filled with stylish furniture. The producer created a typical scene that will remind the audience it was wartime and not bedtime fantasy.

The entire cast had to perform in extreme temperatures and had to work day and night just to maintain a perfect storyline. Most of the cast were at their best in the movie, but the major role played by Williams James was controversial. James was a reckless soldier that could have killed his entire team because of his conduct.

We will write a custom Assessment on The Hurt Locker specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Nevertheless, James was best at bomb disposal, his précised timing and controls of his environment provide him with the support he needed to discharge his duty as a solider. His rugged attitude was a problem to his assistant Sanborn. Sanborn was a soldier with a humble background and was ready to serve his country. His allegiance to his country became a tough call when he planned to eliminate James because of his behavior (Horton, 2009).

Most of the characters and Crewmembers in the film were American citizens. Although the film was non-racial, some people argue that the cast should have been Iraq natives. The boundary of racism is yet to be broken in Hollywood’s movies; many producers have tried to bridge the gap.

Like in most movies, the enemies are made to wear Arab attire. This means that wars are majorly between the West and the Middle East. The movie is excellent and a thriller with heart pounding suspense. Every second that went by was considered the last for each member of the unit. Hurt locker remains a movie to see if you are looking for real action.

Reference Horton, A. (2009). “Review: The Hurt Locker”. Army of Dude. Retrieved from http://armyofdude.blogspot.com/2009/07/review-hurt-locker.html


Washington’s Farewell Address Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Time was running fast and the period that George Washington was to be in office had come to an end. Being the first president and having seen what the country needed, Washington felt obliged to leave the country in a peaceful state.

Citizens were in a state of confusion, unable to imagine a government without Washington. To help in restoring people’s confidence in the succeeding regime, he decided to sensitize the public that leaders cannot achieve anything on their own. Moreover, he touches on various issues that are critical for prosperity of America.

Addressing the nation, Washington begins by insisting on the importance of unity to the American people. He warns the Americans that unity of all states is paramount in protection of their freedom (Washington, 2004). He continues by stating that the greatest enemy of America will be the person whose main agenda will be to divide Americans along any ideologies.

In this regard, Washington wants all Americans irrespective of religion, gender, ethnicity or race to work towards enhancing the culture of togetherness. Citizens should first of all consider themselves as Americans before grouping themselves along other aspects. It should be noted that Americans are not exhorted to stick together in good times only, but also in hard times for example during credit crunch (Whitney, 2003).

It is upon every citizen to avoid any person who seems to interfere with the unity of the American States. The west will need some products from the east same with the south and the north. Washington enumerates the benefits received so far through combined effort, and the many more that are expected. Additionally, he highlights the dangers of a divided nation.

In addition, Washington points out the dangers that can occur if political parties are used wrongly. The Federalist Party, which selectively promoted interests of some people, adds to the weight of Washington’s point that political parties can be manipulated.

He argues that political parties are necessary in any human society, but warns that they should be accepted with a pinch of salt (Washington, 2004). Washington emphasizes that the tendency of political parties to take sides in foreign matters like War is harmful to the country. According to him, the country will be better off if it remained neutral regarding foreign matters.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In his view, America should refrain from making permanent friends or enemies since this will lead to partiality which is not good for the nation. Washington warns that political parties are only beneficial in dictatorial governments. However, they must be placed under control in democratic governments since they have a tendency of diverging attention of governments from critical issues.

Furthermore, Washington coaxes Americans to always protect and uphold the new constitution. He tells them that though the constitution might not address every issue that they would have wanted, it is a mile stone in steps towards controlling the nation.

In this regard, Washington urges Americans to protect the constitution from power hungry politicians, who will seek to weaken it for their selfish interests in the name of developing the nation (Hargrove, 2000). Though he categorically states that he does not think he has been a good president, Washington warns that human beings get intoxicated by power. Consequently, he warns Americans to be careful with whom they choose to lead them.

Stressing on the importance of the constitution and the negative impacts of political parties, Washington points out the benefits of decentralized method of governorship (Whitney, 2003). Americans are encouraged to ensure that too much power is not concentrated in one office, because this will lead to despotic and diabolic dictators whose main agenda will be serving personal interests.

Moreover, he wants the succeeding governments to avoid public debts. While he accepts that debts are sometimes inevitable, he wants governments to pay back as soon as possible because debts enslave nations. However, Washington goes ahead to state that this does not imply that the nation should not offer financial assistance. Most importantly, Washington stresses on the importance of peace by outlining the effects of rebellions.

Washington emphasizes on the role of religion in society. He says that religion is a fundamental ingredient in enhancing morality. He argues that it is difficult for a leader to brag of good leadership qualities without a religious background. Religiosity instills good behavior in people and thus will play an important role in ensuring that there is unity and harmony among citizens (Washington, 2004).

On top of that, Washington underscores the importance of education in development of a nation. He tells Americans that the nation will prosper only if the average level of education is increased.

We will write a custom Essay on Washington’s Farewell Address specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Having been a president, Washington knows what the country needs for prosperity. He points out what he thinks has made his time in office successful. Though he is leaving office, Washington wants Americans to know that they are moving in the good direction. Lastly, Washington is aware of the fact that his advice might not be taken serious at that point in time, but he hopes one day people will reflect on what he says for guidance.

References Hargrove, J. (2000). Washington’s Farewell Address: History Speak. Dayton: Lorenz Educational Press.

Washington, G. (2004). Washington’s Farewell Address to the People of the United States. Washington: Government Printing Office.

Whitney, G. (2003). American Presidents: Farewell Messages to the Nation, 1796-2001. Lanham: Lexington Books.


“Vertigo” by Alfred Hitchcock Essay (Movie Review) online essay help

Introduction The word vertigo refers to a medical condition that is characterized by lack of a balance in an individual’s body system. A person with vertigo experiences some form of unsteadiness. The person feels a spinning or whirling movement. This feeling occurs when the person is stationary. A common symptom of a person with vertigo is dizziness. The movie title Vertigo indicates the condition suffered by the protagonist John Scottie.

John Scottie was a former police officer. In one of the operations, he happened to chase a suspect on a rooftop together with his colleague. The experience was traumatizing and caused him discomfort after running on the high height up the rooftop. He developed acrophobia which is some extreme fear of heights. His colleague died in the operation of chasing the suspect. The movie, Vertigo, by Alfred Hitchcock is characterized by twists and turns of events.

This could have been indicated by the spirals and swirls that appear at the top cover of the movie. This is illustrated by Scottie’s deep possession for Madeleine. After the tragic death of Madeleine, he searched for his lost love by trying to recreate it. In the process, he discovered that Madeleine’s death had been a hoax. When he tried to relive the traumatic incident that had led to Madeleine’s “death”, her real death occurred.

The purpose of this study is to evaluate the moral of the story in the movie Vertigo by Alfred Hitchcock. A look at love, trust, understanding, irony and real life experiences are some of the highlights that review the movie Vertigo by Alfred Hitchcock.

The role of beliefs in the society

Every person is entitled to some form of belief. Beliefs control a person’s behavior. They guide the actions that any particular person is likely to undertake. They are the foundation towards a person’s way of life and his attitudes. Gavin Elster believed that people can be possessed by spirits of the dead.

When his wife started to portray questionable behavior, he began to believe that she had been possessed by the spirit of Carlota Valdes. By hiring John Scottie to investigate his wife’s actions, it was a clear indication that he had related all that the wife had done to the possession of an evil spirit. Madeleine’s actions like laying a wreath on Carlota’s grave and visiting the museum to watch Carlota’s portrait confirmed her husband’s fears.


The movie illustrated a tragic love story. After John Scotties resigned from the police force, he decided to concentrate on his former fiancée. When Gavin hired him as a private detective for his wife Madeleine, Scotties fell in love with the wife of Gavin. After the death of Madeleine, Scotties met Judy who resembled Madeleine and fell in love with her too. Love is natural and plays a significant role in a person’s life.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Love offers companionship. When nurtured with integrity and trust, it brings fulfillment. It is important to limit love and create some boundaries for it may end up ruining other activities which could also be important like careers. From the movie, Scottie was obsessed with love for Madeleine. He did not accomplish his mission as a detective because of love.

Self control and maturity should be exercised in relationships. Love cares for one another. Additionally, love deserves mutual respect between those involved in it. When Madeleine wanted to commit suicide by jumping into the ocean, Scottie saved her. This is an indication of true love and care. On the other hand Madeleine may have felt disrespected after that incidence for she woke up to find herself nude.

This could have caused the tension that followed thereafter. After the death of Madeleine, John Scottie went to an extent of recreating Judy to fit his perception of Madeleine. It is an indication that he had not accepted that his love for Madeleine had been disrupted by her death. Love has boundaries. Love that is exercised beyond certain societal and religious boundaries is considered immoral. The love between Madeleine and Scottie was immoral. Madeleine was married to Gavin and John Scottie also had a fiancée.

Trust and understanding

Several incidents in the movie portray lack of trust for one another. Gavin’s family lacked trust for one another. If proper communication existed in the family, he could have tried to find out the problem that had been affecting his wife before employing a detective.

Employing a detective signified lack of trust for his wife. Judy on the other hand knew very well that she was the “real Madeleine”. She knew that she was cheating Scottie. At one time she wanted to disclose the truth. She wrote a note stating the facts intending to give it to Scottie but later changed her mind and did not give the note to him.

Deceit may not last forever. Scottie sported jewelry from Judy. He recognized it as Madeleine’s. He discovered that Judy’s personality was a hoax and she was the real Madeleine. This also illustrated confusion in the love story and in John’s life for he was not able to distinguish between reality and dream.


Scottie forced Madeleine’s character in to Judy’s. He wanted the latter’s speech to be similar to Madeleine’s. He bought her clothes similar to Madeleine’s. Judy changed her hair style to blonde so that it appeared similar to Madeleine’s. Judy acted all that with full knowledge that she was the real Madeleine.

We will write a custom Essay on “Vertigo” by Alfred Hitchcock specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Real life experience With the challenges encountered in real life today, many people find themselves in similar situations like the ones experienced by John Scottie. Some difficult situations may arise in one’s job making him to quit. The person may find himself constantly in difficult situations and possibly due to frustrations, he may find himself relating to people he may have loathed before.

Scottie found himself rejuvenating his former love with his no nonsense fiancée. Scottie ended up acquiring the same belief that Gavin had acquired regarding possession of an evil spirit. Many people end up moving from one love relationship to the other just as Scottie did. This may end up making life more complex. Scottie went down into depression because of frustrations of love.

This is also a reality today. Most depression cases are usually as a result of complications in love affairs. Others may completely change their way of live because of love. This is well exhibited by the character of Judy in the movie Vertigo. Some moral and immoral love affairs end up tragically. In cases of infidelity, the aggrieved partner may end up harming the other. Some end up committing suicide. An example of a love affair that ended up tragically was the case of Princess Diana of Wales in August, 1998.

Conclusion It is important to deal with all forms of fear. People can take advantage of another person if they realize that he or she lives in fear. Gavin had realized that Scottie had acrophobia and decided to use him to conceal his wife’s murder by feigning Madeleine’s suicide. People who live in fear may have the strength to get out of it. Scottie illustrated this by conquering his acrophobia when he went up to the tower to relive Madeleine’s death.


Same-sex Couples and Marriage: Causes and Claims Essay essay help free: essay help free

Same sex marriage is a moral issue that has raised controversies in many parts of the world. It is popularity referred to as homosexuality. Homosexuality is a condition in which an individual is sexually attracted to members of his or her gender. In a number of countries, same sex marriage has been legalized while some countries are still opposed to the issue.

Homosexuality is perceived as a sexual orientation characterized by romantic or sexual desire towards members of own sex. A gay is a male homosexual while a lesbian is a female homosexual. Scholars of sociology observe that a number of factors cause homosexuality (Gary 21). A study conducted in the US in 1940 concluded that individuals decide to engage in sexual behaviors with members of their own sex because of social and psychological factors.

For instance, the early experiences of homosexuality might predispose an individual to homosexual behaviors. Research shows that children who are abused sexuality have high chances of becoming homosexuals. Moreover, poor relationships with parents might force children to engage in homosexuality. Some homosexuals claim that they were born that way meaning that their sexual behavior is influenced by genetics.

Some individuals are influenced by friends to become homosexuals while others become homosexuals due to unusual sexual experiences in children, such as excessive masturbation, exposure to pornography, personalized sex, group sex, and bitter experiences in relationships. Cultural factors can as well influence an individual to become a homosexual. Presence of homosexuals in the family can influence young members to follow the same way. In most Asian countries that subscribe to Confucianism, homosexuality is tolerated.

Even though homosexuality is considered abnormal in most countries, some countries have legalized same sex marriage. Countries that condemn homosexuality do not crack down on homosexuals, but they have tough laws that prohibit same sex marriage.

In some countries such as Uganda and Zimbabwe, homosexuals are perceived as people with low self-esteem and are ranked lower than dogs and pets. Same sex marriage is prepared because heterosexuality is believed to be oppressive to women. Feminist scholars observe that men are always unfair to them in heterosexual relationships. From a human rights perspective, crusaders of homosexuality note that same sex marriage is an individual freedom.

Denying individuals to marry partners of their choice amount to discrimination and injustice. In this regard, human rights movements have been pressurizing states to allow homosexuality and same sex marriages (Layte 78). In fact, the UK and the US slapped economic sanctions to countries that will discriminate homosexuals. In the modern society, homosexuals are treated in the same way as other minorities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Since an individual has the right to privacy, same sex marriage should be allowed because grownups should be allowed to practice things that satisfy them. As long as people agree to have consensual sex, the state or society should not interfere. However, the act should always be done in privacy. Some observe that same sex marriage and homosexuality is a human innovation that leads to happiness.

Homosexuality is human creativity that can increase happiness among individuals. Since homosexuality is genetic, some scholars note that homosexuals should be allowed to marry. Various studies show that homosexuality is a condition that cannot be controlled. Therefore, allowing homosexuals to marry will be doing justice to them. Even though various groups have raised several claims, many states are reluctant to allow same sex marriage.

Works Cited Gary, John. Same-sex Couples and the Gay, Lesbian, Bisexual Population: New Estimates from the American Community Survey. New York The Williams Institute on Sexual Orientation Law and Public Policy, 2010. Print.

Layte, Rubin. The Irish study of sexual health and relationships. Dublin: Crisis Pregnancy Agency, 2006. Print.


“American Grace” by Robert Putnam and David Campbell Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Robert Putnam and David Campbell’s book is an informative overview of the cultural developments, evangelism, feminism, liberalization, homosexuality, premarital sex, and the religious institutions in America. The authors have provided a commendable insight into the religious landscape in the US. America has undergone numerous milestones in religious development to date.

This is a charming and dependable book which offers a wide-ranging evaluation of the transformations and the function of religion in American modern world. The authors have shown their competence in developing the book. Personal biases have been avoided by the authors in developing the book, where a high sense of honesty has been adopted in producing this respectful fashion about religion in America.

Robert Putnam and David Campbell are renowned scholars and authors in the fields of religion, international affairs, governance, and sociology. Putnam is the public policy professor at Harvard University.

He is the founder of Saguaro Semina which is a prominent program on civic engagement in the US. Robert Putnam has built his fame through a series of academic works and writing in the field of governance, sociology, and religion. He is highly praised for his commendable work in writing on the topic of government, where he was a co-author. David Campbell is also a renowned scholar who has majored in political science. Campbell is a political Science professor at the University of Notre Dame.

He has shown great passion in the study of American democracy. In this book co-authored by Campbell and Putnam, the two professors have demonstrated their competence in the fields of politics, government, international affairs and religion in America. The experiences of these two authors have enabled them to jointly come up with this fascinating book which is a choice of many readers in the field.

America is a unique nation in the global scene due to its deep religious practices, tolerance and religious diversity. The Putnam and Campbell discovered that personal interfaith ties are in a rapid growth in the current American society. This is despite the several shocks and polarization of people on the basis of religion mostly conservatives and secular liberals.

Putnam and Campbell have found out that religious identities are rapidly becoming fluid and interfaith marriages are taking the stage. As a result of these changes, religious based tensions are fading out and people are becoming friendlier with others from different faith or non believers. Based on the findings of the authors, interfaith tolerance is facilitated by the close personal ties of people from different faiths. Despite of the high religious diversity of America, a high sense of tolerance has been demonstrated.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Putnam and Campbell have made it clear that Americans are very devoted to religion despite of the social changes which have loosened religious commitment. It has been noted that religious devotion affects all sorts of life far from the haven. Based on the study, Americans are generous people, neighbourly, and civically engaged.

Importantly, religion has divided the American society on political lines. This new cultural fissure is attributed to the Christian right. Liberal congregations have been identified as most politicized in the American population. From the study, America is one of the most religious countries across the country. This is based on the statistical data provided by Putnam and Campbell.

Based on the study, over 83% of the population are religious. Around 40% of the population goes to a church almost weekly while 80% believe there is a God. The study shows 59% of the population pray weekly, which demonstrates the devotion of Americans in religion. These statistical inferences concur with the idea that America is among the most religious nations in the world.

The study showed that Americans are more prone to change their religion than any other population in the world. The high levels of tolerance between religious are because many Americans have friends in other religions. Putnam observed that Americans are very religious and at the same time tolerant to their friends in other religions. Americans have shown a high regard on interfaith marriages, hence boosting tolerance.

American population exhibits high level of tolerance in spite of the varied religious landscape. This is associated with the interfaith marriages and friendship ties of people across religions. Religion has been shown to be greatly linked with civic engagement. This is an important insight offered by the authors which finds its use in public policies and governance. From another perspective, Putnam and Campbell argue that morally intense and nonreligious social networks give a powerful effect in the social setup.

The ideas offered in the book are based on massive research by Putnam and Campbell. The authors have combined their synergies in examining the various issues entailing the religious framework in the US. Putnam and Campbell have studied how religion influences different social and cultural orientations.

The two authors conducted a comprehensive research which incorporated 3,000 Americans in 2006. The authors also re-interviewed the participants in 2007 before establishing their conclusions. Majority of the ideas offered in the book is based on the two surveys conducted in 2006 and 2007.

We will write a custom Essay on “American Grace” by Robert Putnam and David Campbell specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The first survey comprised of 3,108 participants while the second comprised of 1,909 participants. By carrying the surveys twice, the authors were able to come to a valid conclusion. This is because they were able to evaluate the first and second results. Putnam and Campbell utilized both quantitative and qualitative research and analysis which helped in making their conclusion.

This sociological approach is very important to American religion. The inferences developed by Putnam and Campbell using this monographic approach to sociology study are essential in offering a guide and analysis of the religious practices. The sociological approach used by the authors helps in understanding the changes and future trends in American religion.

The authors have helped in illustrating the factors responsible for changes in the religious landscape, characteristics of religious people, factors responsible for devotion, diversity and tolerance. By examining these factors, the authors give important insights for enhancing the religious sector. This sociological approach is effective in the sense that it has exhausted on the topic by addressing all social cultural issues influencing religion thus offering a guideline for change and improvement.

The findings by Putnam and Campbell on American religion are clearly and admirably presented in the book. The statistical instruments and data used by the authors are explained in an explicit and accessible manner. The insights offered in the book are supported by substantial research carried out by the authors. This adds to the authenticity of the ideas in the book following their honesty in addressing the topic. The book is amazing following the superb job done by the authors.


Asian Hospitality Trends Research Paper writing essay help

Asian hospitality is specific due to cultural peculiarities of the place. No matter which country one visits, the hospitality is going to be at the highest level. Being one of the main source of revenue, restaurant and hotel hospitality play important role in the development of Asian economics.

Being the third constituent of the world economics after oil and auto industry, Asia successfully develops this sector of its economics to continue profitable business in a complicated economic situation. Productivity, profitability, and sustainability are the main variables on the way to success in Asia.

Being involved in the competitive strategies, industries where hospitality is crucial try to develop and renew this sector. Human resource management also plays an important role in this sphere of services. Asian hospitality services are directed at customer. Having the motto to serve the customer all the services he/she required. All Asian and even international hospitality organizations work on meeting all the customers’ needs, both intrinsically and extrinsically.

Some Asian countries may face a number of difficulties due to their unawareness of the principals of hospitality. However, such places as Hong Kong, Singapore, Macau and Thailand rarely have such difficulties, however, the issues connected with organization of communication among staff may be crucial (Ali, Afzal, Shahzad,


Adoption of Cloud Computing in the Company Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Cloud computing is one of the latest technological developments. Cloud computing refers to the use of computing resources in an external network. The internet is the major method of accessing the external network. Companies are slowly embracing this new technology. Most companies prefer to use external clouds in hosting IT services that are not critical.

On the other hand, companies prefer to host critical IT services in their internal cloud. The hybrid approach presents several management challenges to the organization. It is vital for the clouds to integrate with each for proper management of the IT services. In addition, the organization must manage legacy systems and workflow of data across the clouds and IT systems (Grimes 1).

The level of complexity of platforms that manage hybrid clouds is increasing at a rapid rate. This is because hybrid clouds involve different technologies and vendors, and require continuous development of new capabilities. Therefore, it is critical for an organization to choose the right management platform.

In addition, a company should choose its vendors carefully. A company should consider the licensing and contract terms of the vendor, track record, and security performance of the vendor. Companies should strive to reduce the number of vendors, as this would minimize risk exposure and complexity of the management platform (Grimes 1).

A company should first transfer low-risk applications and data to the external cloud after entering into an agreement with the vendor. Therefore, should a breach occur, the company will not lose sensitive information. The company may gradually transfer high-risk applications to the control of the vendor after building confidence in the vendor’s capabilities (Grimes 2).

Data security is not the major concern of companies. A survey on users of the top 5 cloud services – Drop Box, Google Drive, SugarSync, iCloud, and Box – showed that some of the major concerns of users of the cloud computing were capacity, missing files, and ability of the cloud to support various applications.

Among the users of Google Drive, missing files was the main concern. Users of SugarSync cited the inability of the cloud to support ‘Quickbooks’ – an accounting software – as one of their major concerns. In addition, a sizeable percentage of the users of SugarSync cited high pricing of storage space as one of their major concerns (Mearian 2). The survey shows that cloud service providers still have various areas of improvement. Development of new technologies would help in the tackling some of the above problems.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Adoption of cloud computing may face stiff resistance from the employees of the company. This is because employees may view cloud computing as an outsourcing opportunity that may threaten their careers. Therefore, it is vital for the management of the organization to change the mindset of the employees to enable them to recognize and appreciate the benefits of cloud computing to the organization.

In addition, the management of the organization should ensure that IT professionals appreciate how new technologies would provide new functions that would enable the professionals advance their careers (Grimes 2).

The rapid pace of innovation on cloud computing is expected to continue in the near future. Therefore, it is vital for organizations to understand the developments in order to keep their hybrid clouds operating at optimal levels. Rapid technological changes necessitate organizations to adapt technologies that can easily adapt the technological changes (Grimes 2).

Works Cited Grimes, David. “Meeting the challenges of hybrid cloud computing infrastructures.” CIO, 2012. Web.

Mearian, Lucas. “The top 5 issues with the top 5 cloud storage services.” CIO, 2012. Web.


Taking a Glance into the Heart of Darkness: The Ambitions and Failure of the Civilization Essay college essay help online

Rethinking the historical events is one of those tasks that inevitably bring people to realizing their past mistakes and drawing experiences so that these mistakes would not be made further on in the future.

On Conrad’ Heart of Darkness, the lead character, Marlow, at first considers the reasons behind the Europeans who were heading to the wilderness of Central Africa as “civilized” and rather noble; however, further on, Marlow becomes disappointed about these reasons. After re-evaluating the ambitions of the people exploring the African continent in such an impudent manner, Marlow realizes that the true reasons behind the Europeans’ travel were far more egotistic than he could ever imagine.

Indeed, the goals of the people, heading for the terra incognita of the distant and savage lands are not quite clear; wisely enough, Conrad does not disclose the aims of the travelers from the very first page – eh only hints at the possible aims which the travelers might pursue: “But these chaps were not much account, really. They were no colonists; their administration was merely a squeeze, and nothing more, I suspect” (Conrad 9).

However, when it comes to discussing the reasons that made Marlow join the ranks of those exploring the uncharted lands, Conrad makes it obvious that Marlow’s intentions were most innocent: “Now when I was a little chap I had a passion for maps. I would look for hours at South America, or Africa, or Australia, and lose myself in all the glories of exploration.” (Conrad 11).

It seems that for Marlow, only the passion for adventures and new experiences was the true motivation. Nevertheless, even Marlow has hard times with learning about the continent and its inhabitants:

After all, that was only a savage sight, while I seemed at one bound to have been transported into some lightless region of subtle horrors, where pure, uncomplicated savagery was a positive relief, being something that had a right to exist — obviously — in the sunshine. (Conrad 122)

Finally, he also lets some of the madness which the rest of the crew was infected with reach his heart, filling it with darkness as well: “I had to beat that Shadow — this wandering and tormented thing. ‘You will be lost,’ I said –‘utterly lost.’” (Conrad 137).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, the readers are left with guessing what the Europeans heading for the new lands are going to do. On the one hand, it might seem that the mission of these people could be quite noble; starting with bringing common knowledge to the pagans, it could expand further on to establishing relationships with the people inhabiting the uncharted places, which will supposedly include not only cultural, but also economical and even political ties.

However, Conrad clarifies the given issue pretty soon, explaining that the causes bringing the Europeans to the uncharted lands are far from being noble: “They were conquerors, and for that you want only brute force — nothing to boast of, when you have it, since your strength is just an accident arising from the weakness of others” (Conrad 9).

As Conrad’s lead character, Marlow, continues telling his side of the story, it becomes clear that the Europeans ware aiming only at cashing in on the inhabitants of the wilderness: “They grabbed what they could get for the sake of what was to be got.

It was just robbery with violence, aggravated murder on a great scale, and men going at it blind — as is very proper for those who tackle a darkness” (Conrad 9). The author stresses that the goals of a new European presence were to use the lands, the people and their resources and then leave the place, barren and forgotten.

Thus, the question of what the European people were targeting at when heading for the wilderness of the continent remains open. While there are some specks of humanity left in some of the characters, including Marlow, the narrator, it is still clear that the story focuses on the lowest of the low and their efforts to grab every single thing of the slightest market value.

The darkness within the man who came to conquer started to grow: “It had taken him, loved him, embraced him, got into his veins, consumed his flesh, and sealed his soul to its own by the inconceivable ceremonies of some devilish initiation” (Conrad 92).

The above-mentioned, therefore, triggers the question whether these are the wild pagans, the gloomy forests of the continent or the wretched souls of the European conquerors where the darkness is born. It is quite peculiar that all characters portrayed in the novel pursue their own goals, though their goals seem to revolve around the same core, i.e., the desire to get their own profit out of the situation which they have trapped themselves in.

We will write a custom Essay on Taking a Glance into the Heart of Darkness: The Ambitions and Failure of the Civilization specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Hence, it seems that none of the characters reach their goals in the end; the attempt to conquer the wilderness ended up in a complete failure. Marlow’s point seems sadly legitimate enough. Driven by the supposedly huge economical and financial profit, the European travelers were defeated not by the threatening darkness of the African continent. It was the darkness of their souls that trapped them – the darkness of the people making their way over corpses.

Works Cited Conrad, Joseph n. d., Heart of Darkness. PDF file. 17 Nov. 2012. .


Lifespan of Adults of Dementia in Developed Countries Compared to Developing Countries Research Paper argumentative essay help

Introduction Background Information

Aging of the world’s population, along with the fast-growing life expectancy, results in increased expenditures spent on health care services.

Older age is closely associated with high rates of chronic diseases. In this respect, dementia is considered to have had a serious impact on the quality of life, as well as on the economic burden that family should take. At the current moment, dementia treatment refers to advanced medicine and novel approaches to cope with the increasing number of cases. However, the ineffectiveness of treating dementia has a negative impact on life expectancy in aging societies.

The global trends in aging undergo significant changes due to the influence of external factors, including economic, political and social challenges. This is of particular concern to the evident difference in the distribution of adults with dementia in developing and developed economies.

The recent explorations of the problem have indicated the tangible impact of environmental factors on dementia development (Prince, 2000). In particular, because the mental disorder is considered a significant problem in the developed world with increased rates of aging population, it has considerably higher rates in the developing economies. The evident distinctions, as well as demographic transitions, have negative consequence for the dementia spread among the developing world’s population.

The research studies by Wang et al. (2008) have recently discovered that dementia is the core reason for economic burden among the aging population in developing countries. Such a situation is explained by insufficient education, as well as poor health care services tailored to the patients’ demands. Attention should also be given to the cross-cultural survey of people with dementia in the third world.

Research studies in such developing regions as Latin American, Africa, China, and Southeast Asia are indispensible to define how lack of education, poor health care network, and community perception affect dementia diagnosing (Prince et al., 2003). Considering culturally and economically sensitive environments of the developing countries is vital for evaluating the differences in incidence and prevalence of the disease among the identified populations.

Purpose of the Research

Although the developed world recognizes dementia as a serious threat to the aging population and overall demographics, little comparative analysis has been done on the assessment of the situation in both developing and developed worlds to define what external and internal processes influenced the lifespan of adults with dementia.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is of particular concern to such issues as cultural diversity, economic impact, political situation and education serving as the comparative tools of the analysis. Therefore, the purpose of the research lies in defining what underpinnings influence greater lifespan of people with dementia in developed region, as compared to the developing world.

Main Discussion Influence of Dementia on Life Expectancy

Numerous researches have been dedicated to the analysis of the connection between dementia and life expectancy. In this respect, Xie (2008) states,

People with dementia have markedly decreased survival rates compared with those without dementia and are two to four times more likely to die at a given age than those of the same age without dementia (p. 259).

Even minor cognitive disorders can have a negative impact on the survival mechanisms of individuals and, therefore, it has direct relation to the risk of mortality. The degrees of mortality of people suffering from dementia are largely predetermined by such characteristics as sex, age, demographic characteristics, type of dementia, and genetic information. Higher risks of mortality are observed among older people (Xie, 2008).

Gender characteristics are considered less important in defining the impact of dementia on life expectancy. The studies produced by Routree et al. (2012) have also provided evidence concerning the strong dependence between greater probability of dementia disorder among males of older age and slower pre-progression rate.

The evident connection between the age of the patients and survival rates explains the survival mechanisms and the necessary health care assistance. Within this context, the lifespan rates among the patients will largely depend on economic and political realms within which these patients are placed (Waring et al., 2005). In this respect, the overall impact of dementia is closely associated with the quality of health insurance, economic and social conditions under which the individuals are treated.

Analysis of Economic Aspects Influencing the Lifespan of People with Dementia in Developing and Developed Countries

On the one hand, the previously discussed studies point to the direct influence of age on life of people with the disease. On the other hand, the survival probability can significantly be increased with the introduction of advanced technologies, medication, and quality of health care delivery. In this respect, Kalaria et al. (2008) have defined that, although mortality rates predetermined by poverty, communicable diseases, and human conflicts, number of individuals with dementia have augmented in the developing world.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Lifespan of Adults of Dementia in Developed Countries Compared to Developing Countries specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The current evidence suggests that age-predetermined dementia observed in individuals under the age of 65 is higher in such developing regions as Latin America and Asia than in India and sub-Saharan Africa (Kalaria et al, 2008). Moreover, education is considered the decisive factor in development of the disease because illiteracy increases the potential risk for dementia emergence.

Rapid expansion of patients with dementia in the developing countries is strongly associated with the financial resources invested in treatment and prevention schemes. In particular, the costs spent on treating dementia in the developing countries reach about $ 73 billion annually (Kalaria et al, 2008).

However, the actual care demands for social protection are much higher than the actual budgeting. Therefore, lack of sufficient financing in developing economies constitutes the core reason for the increased rates of dementia among patients, as well as their shorter level of life expectancy (Rooij et al., 2011). As a result, greater demand for residential care should be introduced in the future to prevent the expansion.

In contrast to the economic environment in developing countries influencing dementia treatment, the developed world manages to spend significant part of financial resources to cope with the problem (Rooij et al., 2011; Xie, 2008).

However, provided aging has become the major challenge for dementia development, the prosperous economies can face serious problems in dealing with the patients suffering from the disorder. Greater ratios of older people in the developed world, therefore, can prevail in number over the ratio of older people in the developing countries.

To enlarge on the issue, Wehling and Groth (2011) have introduced the statistics counting, “…number of people aged 65 years and above will grow from 600 million to 2 billion (increase of 330 %) and the 80 generation will increase by more than 400 % from 105 million to 400 million” (pp. 275-276). Therefore, the increase in life expectancy levels presupposed by the socioeconomic progress explains the ratio of older people in the developed world. However, these improvements contrast with the rapid decrease in birth rates.

In case the established pace of life expectancy continues growing in the course of the 21st century, most children born in 2000 are likely to reach the age of 100 (Wehling


Media Bias in the U.S. Politics Research Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Executive Summary Media refers to lopsided reporting rather than inaccuracy of presenting information. Media bias in favor of corporate groups is as a result of ownership. Media bias requires that both sides who claim bias be considered because most of the time if favored sides consider the media biased against them at some level. In the U.S. politics, it is considered that liberal journalists reduce their aggressiveness when handling conservative groups to avoid being labeled as biased.

However, the bias streams because they set double standards when a Democrat is being interviewed. The main cause of media bias apart from the influence of power is the profit-maximizing objective. Matters that are weird are considered unexpected, and exciting. A touchy visual impression is also considered as newsworthy. This makes the selection of topical issues, and photos to be biased towards cuteness.

Introduction The media refer to whole groups of materials that used to pass information to the masses. They include printed material such as newspapers, and magazines. They also include electronic materials such as TV, film, radio, video, videogames and the Internet (Sanson et al. 7)

Media bias does not mean that the reporting is inaccurate or dishonest but preference to cover one side of a story. The main reason given by Groseclose


Goodbye, Norma Jean: The World’s Most Famous Documentary Director about the World’s Most Beloved Movie Star Essay custom essay help

When it seemed that there was nothing else people never knew about Marilyn Monroe and when the entire world started to forget about the way an unknown starlet Norma turned into the most famous star the humankind has ever known, Liz Garbus came into the spotlight, promising to shed even more light on the actress’s life and untimely death. Thus, Love, Marilyn was created. And, to the director’s credit, it was a kind of an unexpected movie to come out.

It is important that a lot of actors play themselves in the movie, which makes the documentary all the stronger. In addition, the fact that the focus of the story is in the interactions between Marilyn and other people is rather refreshing. Watching her act with the people around, the audience will get a better idea of what kind of person she was and how hard she worked on becoming who the entire world remembered her as.

It is also quite inspiring that in the movie, several actresses play Marilyn. Indeed, to show every single stage of her development both as a personality and as an actress, a single performer is not enough. The idea with using only Marilyn’s letters, notes and the existing recordings is rather wise as well – without the forced dialogue, the movie becomes even more realistic.

One of the most striking details about the movie was that, according to Garbus, every single line which Marilyn says in the movie actually belongs to her; as Garbus explained, the movie is based off of the memories of the people who interacted with real Marilyn Monroe, the actress. Thus, the movie offers a peculiar cadence of images and scenes which tell about Marilyn more than any biography can.

The most important thing about the movie is that it does not rely on the traditional legends surrounding Marilyn’s personality; nor does it create a recognizable image of Marilyn based on the already existing ones. For instance, the movie shows certain scenes which portray Marilyn as a childish and innocent person, yet Garbus does not want the audience to relate to Marilyn only as a woman child.

Garbus shows in a rather graphic way that there were far more facets in Marilyn’s personality; the actress is portrayed not only as innocence itself, but also as a woman obsessed with the stage, a woman hooked on drugs and even a femme fatale.

In addition, the emphasis in Garbus’ interpretation of Marilyn Monroe’s personality is obviously on a woman who achieved everything she had on her won. Garbus ruins the stereotypical image of Marilyn, making people see her as a human being, which is exactly why the given documentary works so well.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Actually, it is unusual to see a woman directing a movie about a woman in such an uncompromising and at the same time true-to-facts manner; without either whitewashing the actress’s story or adding even more gruesome facts to raise the shock values, Garbus actually manages to tell her variant of the famous story in a very new and inspiring way.

Portraying Marilyn as a three-dimensional character, admitting her numerous flaws and revealing her good sides, Liz Garbus shows the Marilyn the world has never seen – not an actress, not a woman child, but a human being.


The Reflections on the Quran Essay essay help online: essay help online

Introduction The Quran is the main book of reference to Allah and his teachings among the Muslims. It is remarkably influential among Muslims and non-Muslims. It is also an impressive piece of literature that utilizes the Arabic language (Allen, 2000). It has several interconnected verses (ayat), which bring out 114 chapters (suras).

The chapters have different lengths and are classified into Meccan and Medinan. These are the places where Mohammed got his visions from Allah. Various sources say that the Quran’s composition dates back to a period between 609 CE and 632 CE (Wansbrough, 1977). This paper is a reflection on some of styles and key ideas that make the Quran unique.

The Concept of I’jaz Al-Qur’an and its Superiority in Terms of Style and Content Ijaz refers to the inimitability of the Quran. The term signifies that something is inherently impossible. Ijaz highlights the uniqueness of the Quran and one’s inability of imitating it. In order to understand the uniqueness and inimitability of the Quran, one must understand the scripture as a piece of literature. The Quran has gained acceptance among Muslims and non-Muslims because of its content and style (Shorroch, 1988).

There are certain features, which show the uniqueness of the Quran. For example, Fawaatih us suwar (Al huroof al muqatta’a) implying mysterious letters, represents such exceptional features. Many of the surahs of the Quran start with letters that had not been witnessed before in the Arabic literature and language. For instance, the words alif lam meem in Surat al baqara.

Many authors and some Muslims have tried to explain the terms in the Quran in broad terms, all in vain. There are allegations by many Muslims that only Allah knows the meaning of these words. Grammatical shift (iltifaat) also makes up the inimitability of the Quran (Yusuf, 1989).

The Main Stylistic Features of the Qur’an This refers to the arrangement of texts in a way that brings out the intended meaning of something. Roger (2000) asserts that the Quran’s author utilized a mixture of poetry and prose. Indeed, the two styles are used in a way that connects each surah and verse to another. The main features include; prose which employs rhythm and rhyme, variations in styles, stylistic distinction, alliteration, assonance, metaphors, hyperbole, rhetorical questions, stress and synecdoche.

Saj or prose This is a style which employs both rhythm and rhyme. The rhythm is not consistent. Saj used in the Quran has an accent-based rhythm, use of rhyme at the end of words and continuous usage of rhetorical phrases and questions. Rhythm is whereby there is a recurrence of words or statements. The author utilized this style in the Meccan suras. In these suras, it is characterized by tendencies of mono rhymes and inexact rhymes as seen in the following phrases;

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Inna aAtayna kal kawthar

Fasalli li rabbika wanhar

Inna shani-aka huwal abtar

The other features include alliteration or repeating the first sounds of neighboring words as used in Quran 33:71 and 77:20. Assonance is a case where an author repeats the vowel sounds. It is evident in Quran 88:25-26. Metaphors are direct comparisons of things or situations. For instance, a statement like Ahmed is a lion shows that Ahmed is brave. Good examples in the Quran are in chapter 21:18 and 16:103. Hyperbole, which means exaggerating something, appears in 7:40 and 39:71-72.

Rhetorical questions are questions in which the author does not require an answer. They communicate a point and make the reader think deeply about a phrase. A typical example is in Quran 55:60 and 37:91-92. Stress is a feature whereby something is said repeatedly so as to emphasize a point. It can be seen in Quran 29:62 and 33:92. Synecdoche is the use of a part of something to represent a clear picture of the whole. It is evident in Quran 90:12-13.

The Difference between Meccan and Medinan Verses The meccan and medinan verses of the Quran’s surahs vary considerably (Yusuf, 1989). Most of the Surahs depict the life of Mohammed in Mecca, and the rest show Mohammed’s life experiences in Medina. The Medinan verses are longer and more precise than the Meccan ones. It is imperative to note that the difference comes out as a result of the different kinds of life that Mohammed lived in these two places.

When he was in Mecca, there was a lot of pagan worship especially in the Kaaba. He got visions while he was there that urged him to tell people about Allah. His main objective was to influence Jews and Christians, and gather followers of Islam from Jews and Christians. Living in Medina, Mohammed showed that the Christians and Jews were quite different from Muslims (Watt, 1956). Many medinan verses speak ill of the Jews.

We will write a custom Essay on The Reflections on the Quran specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More All these differences can be seen in Surah 29:46 of Meccan passages, 5:73 and 9:30 of Medina. Another significant difference is that only the Medinan verses show the remarkable name given to Jesus, namely, Messiah. The meccan verses do not contain such a name.

Conclusion In essence, the Quran is an indispensable reference book among the Muslims, similar to the Bible among Christians. It has gained acceptance all over the globe due to its uniqueness. It addresses the messages given to people by Mohammed with a lot of reference to Allah. Because of its acceptance, some Christians continue to use it in the disciplines of comparative religion, as well as theology. Thus, the influence of the Quran and its unique style cannot be underrated.

References Allen, R. (2000). An Introduction to Arabic Literature. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Shorroch, A. (1988). Islam Revealed: A Christian Arab’s View of Islam. Nashville, TN: Thomas Nelson Publishers.

Wansbrough, J. (1977). Quranic Studies. New York: Oxford University Press,

Watt, M. (1956). Muhammad at Medina. New York: Oxford University Press.

Yusuf, A. (1989). The Holy Qur’an (Revised Edition). Brentwood: Amana Corporation.

Yusuf, A. (1989). The Meaning of the Holy Qur’an. (10th ed.) Beltsville, MD: Amana Publications.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Reflections on the Quran by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Ethical Dilemma Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Introduction Professional counselors should establish good relationships with their clients to provide the therapeutic healing that these clients require. They should keep a boundary in the way they relate to the clients to ensure that their relationship with the client does no harm or pose potential harm to the clients. While relating to the clients, counselors should anticipate potential risks of misconduct and take action before it is too late.

This may include reporting the case to the authorities or in cases where the damage is already done, an informal approach should be used to address the issue at hand. On other occasions, informal approach may not be appropriate. Therefore, the ethics committee is involved in order to deliver a verdict. The case can be dismissed and a sanction issued, or charges can be pressed against the accused (Welfel, 2012).

One ethical dilemma that has been experienced in the past is the issue of counselors engaging in sexual relations with their clients. This is a serious form of misconduct clinically, ethically, and even legally. This form of conduct is harmful to the clients, destroys the work of therapy, and damages the profession itself. There is a challenge as to whether counselors exhibiting such misconducts should be criminalized (Gutheil


Week 13 Discussions Essay custom essay help

The duty of a leader is to empower people as it is important for achieving some progress that employees start believing and following their leader in executing the underlying tasks. However, sometimes, this task is difficult, or even impossible, to achieve if the leader fails to empower his or her followers.

There are various reasons as to why a leader may fail to empower the others. Some of these reasons may be either intentional or unintentional. According to Maxwell (2007), leaders may fail to empower their followers if they act insecure. From this perspective, the leader is never ready to relinquish his/her powers to his/her subordinates. For example, a leader does not want his/her juniors to execute their duties with freedom and authority.

Empowerment of other workers by leaders may be determined by the leader’s empowerment ability. However, the lack of such ability can be seen when a leader does not provide resources and responsibilities to the others. If leaders do not portray goodwill to their subordinates, then it will be impossible to motivate other workers. For example, a leader should show commitment and always be ready to give credit, where it is due.

Appreciation of other people’s achievement is significant in motivating them to always work hard. However, showing other people that they do not deserve credit and rewards for their hard work can be an example of a case that leaders lack empowerment ability. Moreover, a leader’s lack of empowerment ability may be a result of inability to have a proper influence on his/her followers. Some leaders fail to empower their followers since they are yet to build trust among their followers.

The character of a leader can be an obstacle in ensuring that his/her subordinates achieve satisfaction from their work. In this case, the followers will be negatively impacted by a negative character of a leader and, as a result, show their dissatisfaction and resistance in supporting and adopting his/her ideas

It is true that teaching what is right is easier and simpler than acting right in practice. It takes a lot of effort and self-improvement in order to do what is right. Of course, many leaders are burdened with the responsibility of making sure that their followers act right and perform their duties well.

However, unless such actions are taken by the leaders, their followers will be the least to show any diligence in their work. An example of such leaders can be seen in Henry Ford, who was not interested in improving the company he founded. Consequently, the same was evidenced in the company executives, who never worked hard to salvage the company that nearly collapsed.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hard, saying what is right and then showing it on one’s own example is considered very convincing. An example of a leader who portrayed such pattern of behavior and workers’ management is Ray Kroc, the owner of McDonald’s chain of restaurants. Kroc was an effective leader, and his followers emulated him.

The McDonald brothers had a vision, which they could not translate into reality and showed little to improve their effectiveness in the business. However, Kroc was able to share his business idea with his workers and transformed the business as a result.

Power is a factor that can affect and compromise ethics. While analyzing Ford’s leadership in the Ford Company, one realizes that the leader had too much power and reserved all the authority, giving too much freedom to his workers.

From this context, the leader undermined the others as his decisions were not reviewed by the company’s executives. It is, therefore, easier to make unethical decisions considering that the company leadership authority is reserved to one individual, whose decision may either improve or destroy a company.

Reference Maxwell, J. (2007). The 21 irrefutable laws of leadership workbook: Revised


The Question of Diaspora and Its Role in the Society Essay best essay help: best essay help

Although the modern global community develops according to the principles of globalization, the question of diaspora and its role in the society remains to be the controversial point for discussing.

Nicholas Van Hear explores the problem of diaspora in relation to its types and specifics of the development in his article “Immigration and Asylum: From 1900 to the Present”, and Robin Cohen presents his vision of the question in his work “Comparing Diasporas”. It is possible to discuss Cohen’s work as a kind of a summary for the views presented by Van Hear.

Thus, Van Hear and Cohen concentrate on the particular features of the diasporas’ development in the society, accentuating the history of the emergence and typical concepts developed as the part of the diaspora members’ common vision. In their works, the authors are inclined to analyze the types of diaspora and their influence on the society and globalization processes with references to the definite character of the interactions between the diaspora and the host society affected by the history of the certain diaspora.

Van Hear presents the discussion of several types of diaspora, determining the ‘classical’ and ‘new’ types. If several decades ago it was possible to concentrate on the development of victim diasporas, imperial diasporas, and labor diasporas the members of which were unchanged, today the global community can observe the results of migrations of Afghans, Shrilankans, and Somalis. The author accentuates that the reasons for these nations’ migrations are the same as for the ‘classical’ diasporas.

These reasons are wars, social and political conflicts, and the search for work. It is possible to agree with the author in relation to explaining the nature of diaspora where victims diasporas are associated with the definite catastrophes, imperial diasporas are the results of the colonists’ influence, and labor and trade diasporas are historically correlated with the notion of slavery.

Furthermore, Van Hear states that diasporas can be discussed as the positive and negative social phenomenon. The reader can agree with the author that there is no single vision of the role of diaspora in the society because professional migrants and refugees can contribute to the host country’s economy and society as well as to influence them negatively. From this point, it is possible to refer to Cohen’s view that labor diasporas often develop without the permission of the host country’s authorities and can affect the country’s economy negatively.

Cohen pays much attention to the discussion of the victim and labor diasporas in his article, but it is also important to focus on his analysis of the concepts typical for characterizing diasporas which are the myth about the homeland with references to idealization of the native country, the notion of return, solidarity in relations with the representatives of the same ethnicity in the host country, but the troubled interactions with the population’s majority. Thus, it is an interesting trend to idealize the homeland, to develop the ‘myth’ about the life conditions there.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The author also successfully associates the main idea of the return movement with the people’s ability to concentrate on the imagined past in the homeland. The stated idea of imagined past provides the reader with the possibility to think about the reasons for the diaspora representatives’ striving to return home.

Van Hear and Cohen’s articles are important for organizing the readers’ knowledge about the notion of diaspora and the associated concepts. Thus, the ideas presented in the articles help to form the vision about the diaspora types, the history of their development, and the role for the society in the context of such modern social tendencies as globalization.


Attitude Reflects Leadership: a Look at Leadership in your Professional Portfolio Research Paper best essay help

Introduction An attitude can be defined as a disfavor or favor that is openly expressed towards a place, a person, a thing, or an object. In fact, Allport refers it as the most indispensable and distinctive concept of the contemporary social psychology (1935, p.789) particularly within the area of management.

One can identify the attitude of his/her leader through evaluation. One can evaluate how leaders display certain tendencies in favoring or disfavoring certain objects. Chaiken and Eagly verify this when they say that attitude is a psychological predisposition, which is displayed through assessing a certain entity with inclinations of favor or disfavor (Eagly, 1998, p. 269).

Positive attitude is a crucial component of good leadership in management. In his theories of leadership, Chemers (1997, p.3) argues that leadership is a process that involves social influence where one person enters the will to assist and to support others to accomplish a particular task. A leader is a manager at a certain level. Therefore, the attitude of the leader is likely to determine the kind of leadership that he/she exercises.

Burns asserts that, for a leader to be transformational to his/her people, he/she must portray good personal relations. He/she must be creative and charismatic (1978, p.27). This paper seeks to explore on how attitude reflects leadership as it applies to professional development in management. Can a leader perform while his or her lousy attitude bars him or her from inspiring, motivating, and even instilling confidence on others?

Attitude and Likeability When addressing the issue of professional development in management, one cannot avoid the subject of leadership. A leader with a bad attitude is a poor leader and manager. Leadership is mostly perceived as a contest of likeability. In most instances, leaders are seen as the most liked and respected people.

A leader who scores highly in likeability is accorded the full faith and even trust by the stakeholders. Any organization led by such a leader also experiences the warmth of a positive relationship. Such leadership portrays good attitude among the staff as the gap between the leader and the stakeholders is reduced. A leader who scores lowly in likeability faced self-inflicted obstacles. Such obstacles become a barrier to effective leadership in any organization.

In fact, Chemers (1997, p.4) argues that leadership development thrives through influence. It is therefore imperative that managers and staff at large should base any good leadership within an organization on the roots of good attitude. As a leader, ones likeability must always be high. A manager with a good attitude towards his or her stakeholders and his work is likely to score high in likeability.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is therefore important for a manager to always ask them whether the people, project, and or organization he/she manages have confidence in him/her based on his/her performance. In fact, in likeability, a leader ought to ask whether people would have elected him or her to the same position willingly were it not for his/her appointment.

Attitude and Pessimism A leader with a pessimistic attitude is likely to become a bad manager. If a leader always sees the negativity of events, innovations, and even steps of growth that people take, he or she is a bad leader. Attitude is reflected on a leader’s approach to issues. For example, a company manager who sees the impossibility of making profits will never attain or cross the company’s profit margins. Good attitude towards ones position as a leader enables him/her to have a smile at the break of each new day.

Pessimism is an attitude that makes the leader see every negative aspect of his/her position thus making him/her feel that he/she is feared, disrespected, or even undermined by the people he/she leads. A pessimistic manager will exercise the half-empty-glass attitude by turn a blind eye on the other half. This is a key issue in leadership, which has its foundation on the attitude of the leader. A leader with a bad attitude will channel the same to the people he/she leads.

Attitude and Attention A leader with a bad attitude repels people from him or her while the reverse is true for a leader with a good attitude. Bad attitude towards the organization’s management and development, the stakeholders, and even ones position makes one scoreless in attraction.

No loyal stakeholder of an organization can trust a leader who expresses negative attitude towards his/her organization. In fact, in most cases, such leaders are seen as mobile statues that are on the move always. This makes the stakeholders withhold their loyalty and trust from this category of leaders.

On the other hand, leaders/managers who demonstrate good attitude towards people and the organization are like magnets in their work. In this end, Griffin (2010, p.138) points out that leaders with a good attitude delight in the satisfaction of their stakeholders. They attract the stakeholders towards them. It is also easier for them to attain a full control of the people they lead. The stakeholders exhibit loyalty to good leaders. Attraction also plays a key role in the formation and achievement of teamwork.

In team building exercise of any organization, the leader’s attraction is essential because other members tend to like those who like them and or even identify with them. If the stakeholders of a certain organization are not proud of their leader, they are likely to resist his or her leadership.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Attitude Reflects Leadership: a Look at Leadership in your Professional Portfolio specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More People will seek the advice and wise counsel of a leader who scores high on attitude. The expectations of the people are also high especially on performance. Leaders with a bad attitude are also not able to attract and even retain the tier-one kind of executives and talents.

Many employees look forward to working with the best leaders. A leader with a positive attitude will score high in attracting talents and top rated executives because people desire working for and with leaders who have much to offer them. There is a lot for one to learn from a leader with a positive attitude who believes in the power of positivity and success.

Attitude and variation in Perspective Leaders with bad attitudes differ with the stakeholders on a variety of issues because they have different attitudes towards the issues. Such leadership will be reflected on the many arguments and confrontations that pessimistic leaders experience each day. It is also very difficult for a leader with a bad attitude to build consensus with the stakeholders. The energies of such organizations or groups are channeled towards different dimensions. Hence, there is much wastage of useful resources.

Attitude and Teambuilding For an organization to work effectively, teambuilding must be fostered. A leader with a positive attitude is expected to exhibit the relationship-oriented kind of leadership. The leader should focus on building strong relationships with the stakeholders. Team building enables the stakeholders to work towards meeting a common goal.

In fact, Griffin (2010, p.135) points out that a leader should be more concerned with satisfaction and well-being of the stakeholders. An optimistic leader will always believe in the success of his or her followers. Such leaders will ensure that there is a two-way communication between them and the people. This will in turn result to trust, appreciation, and confidence. The attitude that leaders display determines the expected performance of the people they lead.

Positive Attitude and leadership A leader with a positive attitude is able to cope with activities of every day. Positive attitude is the foundation of optimism in a leader’s life. A positive minded leader will evade the impact of negative thinking and or causing of worry that makes other people arrogant and anxious.

Leaders with a positive attitude are exceptional in that they appear brighter, happier, and successful. Such leaders always see the positive side of life. They believe in the positivity of the most difficult activities. This instills confidence in them thus making them expect the best results in life. Leaders with a positive attitude will always be willing to learn. They become very strong because of knowledge acquisition.

Ways in which positive attitude manifests good leadership A leader with a positive attitude is able to think creatively. Creativity is a key building block for organizational success. With a positive attitude, a leader will initiate new ideas and developments in his/her institution. One has an open mind to foreign ideas and contributions from other people. It is also from positive attitude that one learns to look at the possibility of success especially in novel ideas. With a positive attitude, a leader’s mind is never gridlocked.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Attitude Reflects Leadership: a Look at Leadership in your Professional Portfolio by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It keeps on evolving. Such people are also open to new developments for example in technology. Positive attitude is synonymous with positive thinking. A person with a positive attitude is able to convince others to see the possibilities of the most impossible ventures. Positive thinking persons work with determination to achieve what they believe. Such people do not listen to discouragements from their environment.

Rather, they have their minds and energies focused on success and nothing else. Leaders with a positive attitude do not give up easily. These people believe in their abilities. They do not recognize the prevalence of obstructions. Rather, they see the life that is beyond the current zone of sufferings and difficulties. At all times, these leaders expect success and positive development. Positive attitude is a source of inspiration.

This makes the leader able to search for solutions instead of giving up on difficult situations. A person with a positive attitude makes the leaders able to look for opportunities. Positive attitude can be manifested at three levels. According to Scouller (2010, p.35), both public and private leadership are behavioral levels, which implies that the ability of one to exhibit good leadership both publicly and privately is dictated by the leader’s behavior.

These behaviors are portrayed through one’s ability to motivate his/her group, ability to pursue development, results and activities done, ability of a leader to foster unity and teamwork, and the motivation of individuals and their ability to select the best for the people. Level two of attitude manifestation in leadership is through personal leadership. At this level, the attitude of leaders determines their ability to build their skills and knowhow.

Scouller enumerates three levels of personal leadership as skills and technical knowhow, ability to develop a positive attitude towards the people especially in servant leadership, and self-mastery in a psychological dimension, which form the foundation of originality in leadership.

The attitude that a leader has in any organization determines the staff’s ability to exhibit stable emotions. In fact, George (2000, p.1027) argues that leadership is an emotion led process, which means that, since attitude is mainly manifested by the emotions that one exhibits, a leader ought to have a certain attitude that controls his/her emotions.

A leader with a positive attitude will be able to monitor his or her emotions at various levels. If a group has more members who exhibit a positive attitude to each other, the whole mood of the group becomes enthusiastic. Positive attitude enables the members of the group to share emotions.

In the same way, an organization that has a leader who exhibits positive attitude towards the members is likely to perform better than that of a pessimistic leader. In such groups, members also learn to exhibit negative attitude from their leaders.

According to Sy (2005, p.295), through emotional contagion, leaders are able to transmit moods to their group members. This explains why a leader is able to influence a large number of followers towards what they believe in. For example, a leader who has a negative attitude towards his/her institution is likely to influence the stakeholders to dislike the organization too.

As a result, the organization is likely to collapse. Leaders with a positive attitude also use contagion mechanism to influence the stakeholders. According to Bono (2006, p. 317), charismatic leaders use the contagion mechanism to influence their followers. To influence the followers towards a certain direction, leaders with positive attitude use contagion to achieve their goals. Leadership is about influence.

A leader stands at an advantaged point to influence people either in a positive or negative dimension. People also like emulating what leaders do in order to be as successful as they seem are. Moreover, an organization’s affective attitude is the aggregate of the attitude exhibited by each member, as derived from an analysis of the moods of various members who comprise a certain group.

According to Sy (2005, p.299), if a group has a leader with a positive attitude, it scores high in the positive group’s affective attitude. This implies that leaders play an integral role in determining the attitude of the group that they lead. If the leaders suffer from a negative attitude syndrome, then the people that he or she leads also learn and exhibit negative attitude. Attitude affects the ability of a group to have coordinated efforts in achieving objectives.

The attitude of the leader determines the strategy his/her organization adopts. The attitude of the individual group members determines how they act and even think. When individuals express their attitudes toward certain objects, ideas, and even persons they communicate certain information to others. In fact, Sy (2005, p. 295) says, a group with more members with a positive attitude is more effective than that of negative attitude-minded members.

A group that trains its members to have a positive attitude towards themselves, their work, their colleagues, and new ideas is likely to meet its objectives. Moreover, George (2006, p.778) argues that a leader with a positive attitude is able to improve the performance of his/her group, which is a proof that leaders ought to be trained on how to have stable attitude because the attitude that the leaders exhibit eventually trickles down to the members.

To this end, Dasborough (2006, p.163) argues that it is always important for organizations and groups to always put into consideration the response they get from their leaders. One can therefore argue that the emotional responses of leaders can manifest their attitude towards their followers. On the other hand, the followers can infer the attitude that their leaders have towards them from the way they respond to them.

Conclusion In conclusion, attitude reflects leadership. The attitude that leaders like managers have concerning ideas, objects, people, and even themselves determines whether they can be good leaders or not. Since attitude affects the emotional wellbeing of leaders, it is important that leaders learn the importance of positive attitude in group performance. A leader with a positive attitude is optimistic and does not give up easily.

He/she also believes in the positivity of life. Leaders are influential. Their attitude influences their followers. Therefore, based on the expositions made in the paper, professional development in the field of management calls for a positive attitude of all stakeholders.

Reference List Allport, G. (1935). Attitudes, in A Handbook of Social Psychology. Worcester, MA: Clark University Press.

Bono, J.,


Stress and Burnout in the Workplace Essay scholarship essay help

With the dynamic economic environments that businesses operate in, workplace stress and burnout has increasingly become common. “Three out of every four American workers describe their work as stressful” (Maxon 1). The problem is not only in America but also in all other parts of the world. Incidences of mergers, acquisitions, downsizing, bankruptcies, layoffs, etc have cost workers their jobs. After such incidences, the workplace is normally stressful and uncomfortable for workers.

Other workers may also undertake their duties fearfully due to the possibility of the aforementioned occurrences. Many workers are held up in tasks they are either uncomfortable with or unfamiliar with causing stress and burnout in their work. This paper investigates the causes of stress and burnout in the workplace and suggests ways of minimizing stress and burnout.

Among the factors that contribute to burnout in workers is the fact that workers are sometimes given too much work to accomplish in a short period. This exposes workers to performance pressure because they are worried that they cannot accomplish the task in the given time (Immen 1). Executives and managers should therefore ensure that they give workers reasonable deadlines for assignments in order to avoid stress and burnout that comes with pressure to beat deadlines.

Additionally, stress and burnout in the workplace may be caused by surveillance of workers’ production using computer systems, fewer benefits, longer working hours, and even new bosses. In every organization, workers across the hierarchy experience some form of uncertainty and tension making them vulnerable to stress and burnout.

It is therefore vital to ensure that computer surveillance systems are appropriately designed to reduce the effects they have on workers. Employers should also address other related issues like employee benefits and working hours with a view of reducing the stress and burnout that workers experience.

Executives are facing greater demands than in the past with the advent of technology. During their personal time, most executives find themselves doing office work due to the convenience offered by Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs) and tablets. This exacerbates stress and burnout because even hardworking people require some recovery time after work in order to manage stress and burnout effectively. Therefore, there is need for organizations to divide labor effectively so that each worker gets time to rest (Immen 1).

In some cases, an uncomfortable working environment like operating heavy and dangerous equipment may cause stress. In other cases, stress may be a result of unhealthy inter-personal relationships in the working environment.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Examples of the latter include uncoordinated teamwork, conflict among co-workers and unclear supervision (Maxon 1). Organizations should put in place proper systems to minimize stress and burnout that may come from poor relations among employees. In the case of a dangerous working environment, organizations should provide their workers with insurance and set up proper security measures.

Changes in how operations are carried out in organizations are a major cause of stress and burnout for workers. A couple of decades ago, a workers job remained constant during his/her tenure at the job. The situation is different in contemporary organizations.

Pilots are flying under pressing time demands, carrying more passengers, with more traffic, and using planes that are more complicated (Maxon 1). Other professionals like economists, accountants, finance officers, engineers, etc have to learn specialized computer software in order to work effectively. This has therefore been a source of stress and burnout for workers.

A particularly alarming cause of stress in the workplace is aggression. Millions of workers across the U.S. experience some form of violence in the workplace leading to absenteeism and lost wages. People who experience aggression at work are likely to experience higher stress and burnout levels that their counterparts (Maxon 1). Aggression may be in the form of physical assault or passive aggression. The latter is most common in organizations where workers engage in ‘cold war’.

Some workers may withhold resources from other workers, others may have a habit of ignoring invitations to meetings, and some may fail to respond to memos and phone calls. Although these causes may sound benign, they are responsible for workplace stress and burnout in millions of workers in the United States (Maxon 1). Organizations should therefore ensure that they have proper redress mechanisms for dealing with the various forms of aggressions in order to minimize stress and burnout among their workers.

The largest cause of stress and burnout in the workplace is perhaps wrong job placement. Sometimes people follow the wrong careers and end up doing jobs that are not suitable for them. For instance, an introvert who chooses marketing or sales as his/her profession is likely to experience high levels of stress and burnout than an extrovert in the same profession.

Similarly, an extrovert who chooses accounting as his/her profession is likely to experience high levels of stress and burnout than an introvert in the same profession. Worse still, management may force a person to work in a department that does not suit his/her disposition and qualifications. This usually leads to job dissatisfaction and ultimately the worker will experience stress and burnout. It is therefore important that managers assign jobs to workers according to the skills and competencies of the workers (Bowman 1).

We will write a custom Essay on Stress and Burnout in the Workplace specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Employees should also ensure that they evaluate their competencies and identify the areas where they fit best. In addition to this, workers may be having personal problems like bereavement, separation, divorce, sickness, etc. This will also result in stress and burnout, ultimately affecting the performance of the workers.

Stress and burnout are also common among employees who feel that they do not have enough control over what they do. Despite the fact that management must exercise control over what workers do in their organizations, it is vital that the workers are given some control over their work in order to motivate them and avoid instances of stress and burnout among workers. Management should also ensure that workers are given credit for jobs well done and that managers acknowledge the input of their juniors in every exercise.

Stress and burnout in the workplace remain a global challenge. As evidenced in the discussion above, stress and burnout have a myriad of causes and thus solutions to workplace stress and burnout depend on the cause. Causes of stress and burnout in the workplace can be classified into three categories.

These are work, self and life situations. The first class of causes is the most common and it includes issues like lack of control over work, lack of proper compensation, lack of clear supervision, etc. The second class includes issues like job placement and a person’s character, while the third includes personal issues like bereavement and divorce.

Works Cited Bowman, Dave. Stress in the Workplace. n.d. Web.

Immen, Wallace. Workplace burnout affecting the best and the brightest. 2012. Web.

Maxon, Rebecca. Stress in the Workplace: A Costly Epidemic. 1999. Web.


Can a Switch to Renewable Energy Sources help combat Global Warming? Research Paper essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

Fossil Fuels and Global Warming

A Case for Renewable Energy Sources

Rebutting Arguments against Renewable Energy Sources



Works Cited

Introduction Global warming has emerged as one of the most important problems facing the international community in the 21st century. For decades, human beings engaged in intensive industrial activity will little consideration for the environmental consequences of his actions.

These activities have led to changes in the climate due to the accumulation of greenhouse gases in the upper atmosphere, a condition known as global warming. Global warming has led to many adverse effects including storms, frequent flooding due to a rise in sea levels, heat waves, devastation of plant life, and the spread of diseases.

The global community has therefore singled out global warming as an environmental issue that needs to be addressed promptly. One of the solutions proposed has been to replace fossil fuels with renewable energy sources. This paper will argue that since fossil fuels have been the primary contributors to the global warming problem, a switch to renewable energy sources will help to mitigate global warming and possibly even reverse the damages done so far.

Fossil Fuels and Global Warming There is unanimous agreement that global warming is a problem that requires a universal solution. Carbon dioxide has been earmarked as the Green House gas (GHG) most responsible for this phenomenon. This implicates fossil fuels since CO2 is the main byproduct of fossil fuel combustion.

Ferrey reinforces this statement by documenting that burning fossil fuels contributes 81% of CO2 emissions in the world (73). Arguments have therefore been made that reducing fossil fuel use will result in lower CO2 emissions and therefore mitigate global warming. However, this argument faces opposition from proponents of fossil fuels who claim that renewable energy sources will not offset the global warming problem.

A Case for Renewable Energy Sources Renewable energy sources will provide clean power and therefore reduce the amount of GHGs emitted by the present power generation technologies. Reliance on fossil fuels for power generation has caused a notable acceleration in carbon emissions since 1990.

Ferrey documents that the reliance on coal resources for power generation in developing countries has led to an in CO2 emissions by about 40% (70). Electric power generation is projected to be the main contributor to GHG emissions in the near future, as developing countries turn to fossil fuels for their power generation.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Alternative means of producing electricity will therefore have positive environmental outcomes. A substantial change to renewable technology will have a marked impact on the environment since it will significantly reduce the greenhouse gas emissions emanating from the power sector. This is a critical point considering that the International Energy Agency (IEA) has forecast that the world demand for energy will grow by 60% by the year 2030.

Renewable energy sources for vehicles will improve the air quality in all countries and therefore mitigate global warming. The growth in fossil-fuel powered automobiles has been responsible for the high CO2 emissions experienced in many parts of the world (Rich and David 1). Renewable energy sources such as hydrogen can be used to power vehicles and reduce the negative environmental impacts, including global warming, that carbon emissions from automobiles cause.

Renewable energy sources will enable countries to continue enjoying industrial success without causing further harm the environment. The current state of the environment is the result of industrial action by the developed countries in the world. Dimitrov asserts that the aggregate GHG emissions from developed nations since the 18th century are to blame for the global warming problem (801).

If developing nations continue to rely on fossil fuels to stimulate their economic growth, the world will suffer significantly. A shift to renewable energy sources will assist the counties to enjoy industrial growth without increasing global warming.

Some renewable energy sources such as wind turbines and solar panels contribute directly to the reduction of global warming by reducing the amount of heat energy scattered in the earth’s atmosphere. Jangra et al. theorize that when wind energy is used to turn turbines, some of the heat energy contained in it is converted into electric energy (39). The air released back into the atmosphere is cooler because of the energy transfer taking place in the wind turbines.

Solar PV cells convert some of the heat coming from the sun into electrical energy therefore reducing the rate at which the earth is heating up. Instead of having the heat energy absorbed by the earth or reflected into space, solar PV cells absorb the energy and convert it into electricity. In addition to this, the wind turbines and solar PV cells create electricity, therefore reducing the need for fossil fuels.

The current effect of wind turbines and solar PV cells on global warming is negligible since the two technologies are not prevalent. However, the effect can be made significant if the number of wind farm installations and solar energy generation plants is increased dramatically.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Can a Switch to Renewable Energy Sources help combat Global Warming? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Rebutting Arguments against Renewable Energy Sources Opponents of the global warming theory declare that there is no proof that reducing fossil fuel use will mitigate global warming. Spencer claims that the supposed scientific consensus that human action is to blame for recent global warming is mostly a “statement of faith made from a position of relative ignorance about natural variability in the climate system (45).

The common assumption that humanity’s use of fossil fuels is to blame for global warming has not been proven beyond doubt. In addition to this, the future impact of the global warming caused by fossil fuels cannot be predicted accurately. While some computer climate models estimate that the global climate will increase by about 10C late in this century, others predict warming levels of four times this magnitude.

Spencer asserts that the catastrophic global warming predictions are based on a myriad of assumptions and should therefore not be taken as gospel truth (50). While the exact impact of the greenhouse gases produced by fossil fuels cannot be accessed, it is clear that burning fossil fuels exacerbates the situation. Lack of definite predictions should therefore not be used as a basis for refusing to tackle the problem.

There are alternative methods that can be used to deal with the carbon emissions from fossil fuels. Ferrey reveals that large tracks of forests can effectively absorb and convert CO2 to various sugars and oxygen during photosynthesis thereby reducing the carbon concentration in the atmosphere by a significant factor (68). The UN Climate Change Negotiations confirmed that forestry “provides a cost-effective way to ameliorate climate change and should be an integral part of new climate agreements (Dimitrov 802).

Policy makers should therefore focus on these methods to mitigate the emission of CO2 instead of focusing primarily on renewable fuel sources. While it is true that there are other methods for reducing CO2 concentration and therefore mitigating global warming, renewable energy sources are the only means through which the catastrophic effects of global warming can be avoided.

The other CO2 limiting methods will only result in a decrease in the GHG emissions. However, scientists assert that the sharp reduction in GHG emissions to near zero by 2100 can only be achieved through a shift to non-CO2 emitting technologies (Ferrey 71). The sharp reduction is only possible through a shift to renewable energy sources that do not emit GHGs.

Some opponents of renewable energy sources argue that the atmospheric concentration of GHGs is already too high for any abatement actions to mitigate the effects of global warming. This argument is reinforced by the fact that the pace of reform by most countries has been too slow.

According to these cynics, the level of warming is going to keep rising regardless of the switch to renewable energy source because of positive feedback that occurs when the direct warming tendency of the CO2 is amplified by changes in clouds, and water vapor (Spencer 45). Switching to renewable energy sources will therefore be a costly project that will not yield a positive impact on global warming.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Can a Switch to Renewable Energy Sources help combat Global Warming? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This deduction is strongly refuted by Ferrey who documents that a sharp reduction in GHG emissions will limit the increase in Earth’s surface temperature and therefore help avoid the catastrophic effects of global warming (71). All efforts should therefore be made to mitigate CO2 emissions and help mitigate global warming.

Proponents of fossil fuels argue that it is possible to use these energy resources in such a manner that the environmental impact is significantly reduced. Technological advances have made it possible for fossil fuels such as coal to be produced in an environmentally friendly manner.

Engines can also be designed to minimize vehicular CO2 emissions and therefore reduce global warming. Rich and David assert that while these efforts are commendable, they will not be able to make the monumental reductions in CO2 emissions that are necessary for global warming to be mitigated (1). Using fossil fuels will still lead to the production of GHGs and the ideal goal is to stop all GHG emissions.

Discussion Global warming is a real problem facing the international community and all solutions must be pursued to try to mitigate the problem. Fortunately, global warming has not yet reached an irreversible level and steps can still be taken to avoid the consequences associated with global warming.

A switch to renewable energy resources will mitigate and even stop global warming at the same time providing for the energy needs of human beings. Renewable energy resources can contribute to the reduction of global warming by directly reducing the amount of heat in the environment, and indirectly by reducing the use of fossil fuels that increase global warming.

This solution is going to take time and involve significant finances. Climate mitigation policies are an expensive affair with the World Bank estimating that the cost of preventing a 2 degree temperature rise will require 140 to 175 billion dollars of financial contributions to developing countries over two decades (Dimitrov 802).

However, this is a small price to pay for the rescue of the earth. Although renewable energy sources still constitute a very small part of energy consumption, they are rapidly expanding. As the total clean energy investments increase annually, these technologies can be projected to make a positive impact on the environment.

Conclusion The world is largely dependent on vast amounts of energy to sustain it. The paper set out to argue that the overreliance on fossil fuels to provide energy for man has been detrimental to the environment and a fundamental shift to renewable energy resources is necessary to mitigate the adverse effects of global warming. Renewable power sources are available today and they will be the basis on which a sustainable power infrastructure in the world will be built.

The paper notes that in addition to the environmental benefits of renewable energy sources, these sources offer compelling economic incentives. Many technical and economic hurdles will need to be overcome before renewable energy sources can completely replace fossil fuels. The arguments made in this paper prove that renewable energy sources are the best means through which man can mitigate global warming at the same time satisfying his energy needs in a sustainable manner.

Works Cited Dimitrov, Radoslav. “Inside UN Climate Change Negotiations: The Copenhagen Conference”. Review of Policy Research 27.6 (2010): 795-821. Web.

Ferrey, Steven. “The failure of international global warming regulation to promote needed renewable energy”. Boston College Environmental Affairs Law Review 37.1 (2010): 67-126. Web.

Jangra, Munish, Parmar kumar, and Nadia Yadav. “Reduction of Global Warming By Using Renewable Energy Resources: A Mathematic Approach”. International Journal of Computer Science and Telecommunications 3.2 (2012): 37-41. Web.

Rich, Alex, and David Morley. “Point: The World Must Actively Explore Alternative Sources of Energy”. Alternative Energy Exploration 2.1 (2009): 1-5. Web.

Spencer, Roy. “How Serious is the Global Warming Threat”. Society 44.5 (2007): 45-50. Web.


Light vs. Dark Romanticism Essay college essay help online

Irving explores the theme of imagination in his story Rip Van Winkle. The author’s interest in ancient times depicts his power of imagination and the consequent impact on the readers. The readers are forced to get into the protagonist’s shoes, explore the past with him in an entirely imaginative stance. In addition to exploration of medieval times, the narrator personifies the wild creating an imaginative aura on the part of the reader.

Rip, the main character talks to the Kaatskill Mountains giving them human abilities. He tells the mountains that when the atmosphere is calm, they are dressed “in blue and purple” (38). Before falling asleep, the narrator talks about what Rip saw. In a short description, Rip saw the lordly Hudson “moving on its silent and majestic course,” the reader follows the description of what appears like a dream; the description is more of imaginable than real (43).

The character of Rip and what transpires in his life depicts the theme of imagination. Rip is described as polite, generous, kind and obedient. He is described as straightforward and good natured, henpecked by his wife, but liked by his neighbors (39). Although he is described as the “favorite among the townsfolk,” his appears as an emotionally disturbed person, possibly derived from his home predicaments.

His wife is described as a nagging person; for this reason Rip has given up with most of domestic activities because he believed that everything was going to be destroyed (39).His life is based on imaginations; he spends a lot of time day dreaming. He falls asleep, which was entirely imaginative, only to wake up after twenty years when everything has changed (53).

The theme of imagination has also been explored in The Legend of Sleepy Hollow. Irving’s imaginations and his point of view dominate his narration. As the narrator wanders through the town of the Sleepy Hollow, he is told about the Headless Horseman. He interrupts the story with his imaginations as he narrates the side story of Ichabod Crane (333). As the narration continues and Katrina is wooed by Crane, Irving interrupts and expresses his imagination about the challenging and admirable nature of women (342).

The story appeals to imagination of the audience as the physical look of the Ichabod Crane. It is stated that the last name, Crane, matched with his looks. He is also described negatively as a poor singer and a rumormonger. The description of the Headless Horseman is meant to cause fear, although it is very imaginative.

The imagined shadows and shapes at nightfall are described as frightening to lonely people. The competition between Crane and Bones captures the reader’s imagination. Bones is described as strong and a complete opposite of Crane.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The war and ghost tales told by men after the dance are totally imaginative. The encounter between the Horseman and Bones (351) and the encounter between the Horseman and Crane (355) are imaginations, arguably meant to show their personalities. After Crane disappears, the townsfolk are unable to find his body and therefore believe that he was taken away by spirits or supernatural means; this is Irving’s way of depicting the theme of imagination (358).

The theme of imagination is effectively portrayed by Ichabod Crane, the protagonist in the story. Crane has moved to Sleepy Hollow from his hometown, Connecticut, to embark on a teaching career. His description creates a sense of imagination; he is tall, excessively lank with long legs and long arms.

The narrator creates a sense of humor when he states that his hands dangle a long distance out of their sleeves. His entire body frame is said to be loosely hung together and his feet might be substituted for shovels. His head is described as comparatively small, flat at the top with exceedingly huge ears.

His eyes are said to be green in color and glassy coupled with a long nose. A sense of humor is created when it is stated that his head was like a weather-cock on his thin neck to detect the wind’s direction. The writer uses metaphorical comparisons and humor to give a description of his character and appearance. The reader is left with a lot of imagination and this creates more suspense as the story unfolds.

Crane is said to be superstitious; he has a strong inclination to mythical ideas, legends and ghostly tales. His character and inclinations are based on total imagination since myths can only be imagined, legends are passed from one generation to another and ghosts are invisible and therefore, only imagined.

His decisions in life are affected by superstitions, and ultimately shape his character and fate. Although Crane is skinny, he is described as greedy with a voracious appetite. Crane’s plans are mostly based on imagination and day dreaming. He is very opportunistic; he thrives on befriending and dining at the homes of his students. At some instance, he befriends and eventually proposes to Katrina, a rich woman from a wealthy Van Tassel family. His intentions are to eventually marry Katrina so that he can inherit wealth from her family.

Crane’s powerful sense of imagination causes his downfall. His obsession with legends, ghosts and myths makes him believe in unreal things. His imaginations lead him into believing that he was going to marry Katrina and to inherit from her family. He is lost into his imaginations and finally, he is unable to face his realities. His downfall is caused by his fantasies which make him unable to work hard for Katrina. His beliefs in Ghosts and mythical tales makes him susceptible to Bone’s tricks, he is eventually defeated.

We will write a custom Essay on Light vs. Dark Romanticism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In my opinion and concerning the theme of imagination, The Legend of Sleepy Hollow is better suited to communicate with the reader that Rip Van Winkle. The theme of imagination is better established and the fate of the main character is well comprehensible and serves to give a lesson. The reader can better identify with the character of Crane than the character of Rip who slept for twenty years.

The lessons from The Legend of Sleepy Hollow are clearly portrayed by the themes, the plot and the characters. The story warns against the strong power of imagination and the consequences of allowing fantasies to overcome realities.

The author seems to express his opinion that it is better to imagine something better than to face something bad. Crane derives a lot of happiness and fulfillment from his imaginations; he therefore chooses imagination instead of reality. However, both stories are characteristically belonging to the romanticism due to emphasis of awe, apprehension, nature and horror (Baym 98).

Works Cited Baym, Nina. The Norton Anthology of American Literature, Vols. A


The Ukita Family and the Skeen Family Compare and Contrast Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

The Ukita family has a medium degree of well-being because it owns all necessary household appliances, including the washing machine, two TV sets, the microwave oven, and the kitchen machine. The children and parents are well dressed and they have enough clothing in their wardrobe.

They also have a family car, which is another necessary attribute of wealth. As per the Skeen family, it has relatively similar level of well-being because they have enough household appliances, two cars, and good furniture. They also garage for their automobile.

Both the Japanese family and the American family seem to be happy and well off, but in a difference sense. The Ukita family is more concerned with material well-being, which can be judged from the things that are placed in front of the house. Besides, the family itself is sitting around the table and watching TV. Therefore, it can be concluded that the parents are more interested on earning more money and become richer.

Despite their focus on household values, the Ukita family still adheres to the Japanese traditions by eating traditional dishes and sitting at the table without shoes on. The family leaves the shoes outside the kitchen before entering the room. In contrast, the Skeen family attaches much more importance to spiritual and cultural values rather than to the material ones. Mrs. Skeen holding the Bible is another evidence of the family’s adherence to religion and traditions.

The wall with family photos handing on it is another thing that supports the family’s adherence to family values. Therefore, the members of the Skeen family are less concerned with material well-being because all household appliances are placed in the background of the photo.

Aside from economic well-being, the photos depict the differences in social well-being and its influence on the families. In particular, the Ukita family is depicted as sitting in front of the TV and watching news. So, it is possible to suggest that they are interested in what is going on in the world, but are less concerned with what is going on in the neighboring house. In contrast, the Skeen family rely less on mass media because they are more focused on face-to-face communication.

They are more open-minded and less prejudiced. Environmental issues are also brightly illustrated in the photo. Hence, the Skeen family considers environmental problems a priority because all of the furniture items seem to be made up from the ecologically pure materials. Unlike the Skeens, the Ukita do not pay much attention to the environment because there is no sign of their interest in the surrounding world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While comparing these two families, it should be stressed that the Japanese family is under greater influence of popular culture and consumerism trends because all of the items presented are traditional objects that an average family should have, including clothing, appliances, and car.

Unlike the Japanese interior, the American family is more likely to stay beyond the media culture expansion because they are less attracted with the material values. The poses of the Skeen member are also more open and they look happier than Japanese family members. Allocation of objects, including car and furniture in the foreground serve as a sound argument for the adherence to consumerism. The Skeen family stands separately from the interior, which indicates their indifference to material objects.

Works Cited “MW-Japan”. n. d. JPEG File. 20. Nov. 2012. Print.

“MW-US”. n. d. JPEG File. 20 Nov. 2012. Print.


The Ability to Refuse the Bad Habits Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Reasons why People Continue to Overeat, Smoke, Take Illegal Drugs, Practice Unsafe Sex and Fail to Sleep People continue with the listed habits for several reasons. Drugs, smoking, and sex are highly addictive and, most likely, extremely challenging behaviors to avoid. Depending on the geographical location, smoking may socially be accepted and even encouraged. Additionally, it may result from an environmental behavior in which children may be raised as it is known that they are used to imitate from their parents, while growing up.

Majority of teenagers spend time on coaches watching television and playing video games, as opposed to playing outside. This behavior aggravates intake of unhealthy fast foods and fatty snacks and leads to detrimental health.

People continue engaging in using illegal drugs as the single way to run away from their reality, and interfere with their mind states. People fail to get adequate sleep since they have adopted the notion that one lives once. Therefore, time should not be wasted for sleep when one can spend it partying and enjoying his/her life.

Mostly, people practice unsafe sex since they are usually too intoxicated to remember about safety. Others dislike the feel of condoms, and consider the feelings more significant as compared to long-term health. In other cases, people unconsciously engage in unsafe sex.

Steps to Maintaining Good Health Developing as well as maintaining an unimpeachable health is hard for every person. However, it is not impossible if the person has determination. There are five basic guidelines which can help maintain good health, while fulfilling the fitness goals. The steps offer accountability and motivation so that achieving a satisfactory health becomes easier. These steps may be considered undemanding and vital for maintaining better well-being and energy.

Keep the Goal of Embracing Good Health Visible

The goal of achieving good health should always be kept in mind. Therefore, pictures of vegetables and fruits may be placed on the refrigerator, and pictures of healthy bodies taped on the mirror. Moreover, the desired new habits can be written on sticky notes and placed in the purse, by the clock, on the billfold, by the side of the computer screen, or any other place where they catch your attention. This is extremely motivational and helps the person keep focused.

Learn the Facts which will Inspire Change

Reading new articles, magazines and books, which offer the scientific data to prove the importance of new habits and health claims, impacts on the efforts made to seem worthy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Establish Accountability

Establishing accountability is the most vital step towards achieving good health. When a person is striving to maintain health habits, a partner should help him/her remain focused on the set goals. Support of a partner makes it easier for a person to adhere to his/her aim to quit smoking, exercise more, or eat better as opposed to when an individual is working alone. Hence, various diet and exercise groups are more successful in achieving the end result as compared to individual effort.

Allow for Failures

Since failure may be inevitable, it should be allowed. Giving up a new habit because of pressing issues should be excused though a person should try again. In such a case, the principle goal is to develop the appropriate health habit throughout lifetime.

Rewarding the Achievements

The person should come up with small goals and identify how to reward him/herself after meeting the aim. However, the reward should not disrupt the goal, for instance, allowing smoking a cigarette for a smoker. On the contrary, the goal should motivate one to keep moving forward.


Southeast Asia Human-Environment Issue Essay essay help

Some of the ecological problems associated with Gold in Indonesia include depletion of the resource, land erosion, human conflict and illegal gold mining and illegal trade (McMahon et al vii; 6). For many years, Indonesia has been relying on gold as one of the most valuable resources. Therefore, a lot of emphasis is given to how the resource should be mined and used for the benefit of the country’s economy. Recently, there have been concerns over the environmental degradation, if the current mining methods continue to be used (ix).

Most of the gold that is mined in Indonesia is exported to other countries. Only a small portion of gold is used domestically. This has made gold to be one of the most sought out natural resources in the country. Therefore, this makes the resource vulnerable to both illegal mining and illegal trade (xi). In this context, various and uncertified gold miners mining methods have been used to mine the resource. As a result, a lot of depletion of the resource is taking place at a very high rate.

On the other hand, there are ethical issues that surround gold mining. For example, communities that live near gold mines are not direct beneficiaries of the resources. Basically, mining corporations have failed to consider such communities when setting up mining plants by giving out jobs.

Moreover, the technology used for mining gold in Indonesia has been alleged to have negative implication to human health. Some of the large-scale miners in Indonesia have been accused of not compensating their workers fairly, amidst mining one of the most valuable resources in the world (5).

Precisely, the risks associated with large scale mining of gold indicate that miners are at risk of major accidents (xi). Another significant environmental issue is the loss of forest cover. Once these forest covers are lost after the clearance of mining fields, little is done to ensure that there is good soil management (5). Moreover, miners are unable to maintain good drainage system around areas that are termed as gold fields (xi).

The natural gold resources in Indonesia have been instrumental in improving the country’s economy, as well as the livelihoods of the populations. Indonesia has been able to trade globally by using gold. In addition, the Indonesian gold mines have created jobs for thousands of Indonesians. On the other hand, the Indonesian government has been able to collect revenue from gold income.

Indonesia is prone to several natural hazards. For example, flooding is a common environmental hazard in most regions in the country. In the last few decades, Indonesia has witnessed some of the most prolific tsunamis and earthquakes recorded in history. An example of such disasters has occurred severally in areas such as Mentawi islands and Sumantra. In most of these disasters, volcanic eruptions are usually evidenced.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Forest fires are also known to be natural disasters in Indonesia. Nevertheless, the relationship with gold mining and the natural hazards is relatively positive. In this perspective, some of the mining activities results to the mentioned natural disasters. For example, clearing of forest can result to disastrous forest fires. In addition, drilling of the earth cluster can distort the cluster plates underneath thus creating a disruption of the tectonic plates.

This disruption is a major cause of earthquakes and consequently volcanic eruptions. As indicated earlier, clearing of forests and mismanagement of soils in cleared lands can lead to creation of flooding zones, if a good drainage system is not created within and around the mining locations.

Works Cited McMahon, Gary, Subdibjo, Elly, Aden, Jean, Bouzaher, Aziz, Dore, Giovanna.


Characteristics of Incarcerated Women Essay essay help: essay help

Incarcerated women demonstrate characteristics that are unique to their status. As is the case with other groups of the population, incarcerated women often engage in self-mutilation behavior. This behavior occurs when the women intentionally harm, damage or mutilate themselves through cutting, burning, head banging or taking known poisons, with the intention to self destruct.

Second, these women often exhibit multiple risks behavior, which makes them particularly vulnerable to the development and progression of a deviant lifestyle. In many occasions, the multiple risks behavior stems from the fact that most of these women come from extremely troubled family backgrounds.

Third, many incarcerated women have issues with substance use and abuse, which interferes with their emotional and mental health. Fourth, a sizeable number of incarcerated women are victims of trauma experiences, including rape, domestic violence and parental irresponsibility. The fifth characteristic of incarcerated women is that they are more likely to exhibit a violent temperament than the general population.

Sixth, women in jail exhibit high risk for criminal recidivism than their male counterparts. Lastly, considering the demographic dynamics and socio-economic status, it is a well known fact that incarcerated women are often young, single, mothers from marginalized ethnic environments who have minimal education and extremely wanting work relationships.


Business Society cheap essay help

Table of Contents Summary

Research update

Critical analysis


Works Cited

Summary The chosen article is entitled “In Business for Life” by Judy Wicks. She endorses community self reliance through the growth of local business. Wicks (3) has personal experience in local communities since she owns two such businesses and also spearheaded a fair food movement.

The author created this group in order to get other businesses to promote local growth. Her interest in this approach began when she learnt about the plight of farm animals in the food industrial complex. Her concern about global warming, peak oil and the loss of work amongst local farmers caused her to adopt this lifestyle, as well. She only serves products that come from local enterprises and encourages other businesses to do the same.

Wicks (33) claims that businesses are intended on promoting common good rather than the selfish interest of a few stakeholders. Her solution to today’s environmental problems lie in shifting business practices away from competition to cooperation. Judy Wicks urges individuals to identify with the suffering of others in order to find fulfilment in life.

Research update Two ideas that can be updated include: greed in business practices and how communities can build sustainable businesses. In the article, the author questions the basic premise of business. Many individuals measure business success on the basis of continuous growth, yet democracy depends on multiple ownership (Wicks 23). The industrial economy ignores the needs of the masses.

Economic growth from this business approach does not benefit all as the wealthy become wealthier when other people’s affluence keeps declining (Wicks 15). Furthermore, businesses have been corrupted to become instruments of greed. At this point, the author would have talked about the financial crisis of 2007 to 2008, since she delivered the lecture in 2006.

The 2007 to 2008 financial crisis emanated from powerful elites who dominate the financial industry. The US banking sector is controlled by an oligarchy, which consists of few players that can affect the entire economy. They made poor decisions and took too many risks, yet their actions had a wide-reaching impact on the population.

Bankers gave subprime mortgages to people with questionable credit in order to enjoy interests earned on their loans. Consumers continued to take out loans on their homes from banks, which still financed them. Instead of exercising discretion, these financial institutions let greed drive them and thus perpetuated the housing burst, mortgage defaults and the financial crisis (Reavis 19). The author could have illustrated how focus on greed is destructive even to those who benefit from it.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Wicks (15) also explained that local communities can create sustainable businesses by doing import replacement. She also endorsed the concept of fair trade. Governments could protect the interests of their citizens by ensuring that goods which cannot be produced locally are imported fairly.

In recent years (between 2008 and 2012), some local governments have made several initiatives that have assisted in meeting this goal. The author could have talked about the application of the idea if she wrote it more recently. A case in point was the city of El Paso in Texas.

The Mayor and his council are at the forefront of the sustainability movement. They are talking to locals about how to do business sustainably (Okubo 48). The mayor links residents to local farmers, vendors to local businesses and transport providers to markets. Therefore, local councils can act as matchmakers between members of local communities and businesses in order to meet sustainability goals.

Critical analysis The major advantage of building local communities where people work and live in the same area is that it benefits a wider range of people than the industrial complex. First, local farmers can still stay in business and enjoy profits. Additionally, small-scale entrepreneurs can survive and even enjoy high profits by having a ready and conveniently located market base (Gershon 92). Vendors do not have to waste money, fuel or time to get their produce to other parts of the country.

Residents or members of these communities get to enjoy better prices or quality of products because the decision makers are close to them. They can boost their health by eating unprocessed and organic produce. Consumers can also save their environment by minimising wastage, which stems from the industrial complex. This will cushion them against peak oil, pollution and global warming.

On the flipside, local communities would oppose neoliberal principles that the US firmly endorses. Big businesses have grown tremendously because they have higher chances of success.

Economies of scale, operational benefits and risk minimisation explain why stakeholders in the industrial complex make a lot of money. They are better for the economy than small business. Statistics indicate that over half of all small businesses close after three years in operation, yet most of these institutions get loans for start-ups and operation (Epstein 8).

We will write a custom Essay on Business Society


Causes and Effects of Unemployment Essay scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Causes of Unemployment

Effects of Unemployment


Works Cited

Introduction Unemployment refers to a state of not having a job. Unemployment entails individuals with the ability to work, a resolve to find employment, available and in the hunt for employment (Stone 25). Categories of unemployment include classical, structural, frictional, cyclical and hidden unemployment. Classical unemployment entails a situation in which earnings received for a job go beyond ordinary levels.

This results in limited job vacancies for the many unemployed people. Structural unemployment refers to a situation in which unemployed individuals fail to meet job requirements in terms of skills needed (Stone 29). Frictional unemployment refers to changeover phase between jobs. Cyclical unemployment refers to a state in which claims in the economy fail to offer jobs to people. When claim for goods and services lowers, there is a limited production that requires few workers (Stone 29).

Hidden unemployment refers to unemployment of prospective workers due to errors made in generating statistics on unemployment (Stone 30). Unemployment has numerous effects on individuals, society and the economy in general. Unemployment results from various factors relating to social, economic, environmental, political and individual elements in an economy.

Causes of Unemployment Unemployment results from several causes and factors related to an economy. Some causes are due to personal choices while others are beyond individual control (Stone 31). People invest many resources in gaining reputable education and eligibility for jobs, but often find themselves with no employment (Stone 34). Unemployment results from factors and causes discussed below.

The first cause is inflation. Inflation refers to the progressive increase in prices of commodities and services in the economy. Economic inflation is one of the major causes of unemployment (Stone 37). Inflation results in a limited market activity by economies that cannot match efforts by others due to escalating prices. The economy experiences trouble, and progressively employers fire some workers to reduce the cost of production. This result in unemployment among the individuals fired.

The second cause is recession. Recession refers to decline Gross Domestic Product (GDP) of an economy, employment rate and market activity (Dawson 75). Economic recession links directly with economic inflation. Recession results from inflation where people are not able to afford goods and services offered by the economy (Stone 41).

A decline in production and more imports than exports characterize a recession. These elements influence negatively on GDP of an economy. This results in increased rates of unemployment because many employers refuse to hire while others fire some of their employees (Stone 43).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Another cause is change in technology. Rapid change in technology is driving many employers into diversifying and improving the effectiveness of their workforce (Dawson 78). Some of technology applied replaces individuals in the production process as some process executed manually apply through technology.

This leads to several people losing their jobs. Job dissatisfaction is also another leading cause of unemployment (Dawson 78). New technology results in some employees being involved partially in production activities, which leads to frustration. Frustrations may lead to employee resignation (Dawson 80). This causes unemployment.

Another cause is employee worth (Dawson 85). Employees put a lot of effort and dedication in their activities but often end up unappreciated by their employers. This may result to lack of motivation among employees, which may compel them to stop working for their employers (Dawson 85).

This leads to individuals being unemployed until they find employers who appreciate their efforts. Discrimination in places of work is another cause of unemployment. Discrimination could be because of age, gender, social class, race, religion or ethnic background. Securing a job in such a working environment is extremely difficult and may discourage people from looking for jobs as well as forcing those already in jobs to quit (Dawson 87).

Other causes of unemployment relate to an individual and include disability, attitude towards potential employers, negative perceptions about jobs and employees as well as an individual’s ability to look for a job (Dawson 93). Welfare payments should be discouraged as they reduce the will of unemployed people to look for jobs. People develop dependency on grants and lack any meaning in employment since they are able to meet their basic needs (Dawson 98).

Effects of Unemployment Unemployment has both positive and negative effects. However, negative effects of unemployment surpass positive effects (Stone 65). Unemployed individuals experience difficulties meeting their basic needs as well as contributing to economic prosperity of their countries (Stone 66). In recessions, many people lose their jobs, but companies usually develop mechanisms to produce more goods with limited workforce. Unemployment leads to effects discussed below.

The first effect is loss of income. Unemployment results in individuals losing their source of income and livelihood. Most people in employment use their incomes to get mortgages and other forms of financing (Stone 69). Loss of income leads to poor living standards and increased risk on health.

We will write a custom Essay on Causes and Effects of Unemployment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Another effect of unemployment is social exclusion. A work place provides a platform for socialization. When people lose their jobs, their social circle reduces considerably and end up excluded from the social environment. Other social problems associated with unemployment include crime, bribery and gambling (Stone 70).

Unemployment causes political instability (Stone 75). When majority of a country’s population is unemployed, life becomes hard, and people develop hostile characters. They consider their government as ineffective and incapable of providing the needs of its people (Stone 76). Such individuals participate in movements that oppose government policies through riots that result in political instability.

effects of unemployment include over exploitation of available labor, reduced rate of economic growth, reduced human capacity, loss of human resources and increase in poverty levels (Dawson 101). One positive effect of unemployment is the availability of adequate labor at reduced market prices. When many people are unemployed, labor is available at competitive prices because people are always eager to have some income (Stone 80).

Conclusion Unemployment has various categories that include classical, structural, frictional, cyclical and hidden unemployment (Stone 26). Unemployment results from several factors that vary in terms of the supporting conditions. Some causes are due to personal choices while others are beyond individual control. Unemployment has both positive and negative effects, although negative effects surpass positive effects. Welfare payments should be discouraged as they reduce the will of unemployed people to look for jobs (Stone 50).

People should be encouraged to look for a job instead of waiting on grants because they may not achieve financial freedom to satisfactory levels. In order to reduce the effects of unemployment, governments should develop and implement policies that regulate circumstances in which an employer can fire an employee (Dawson 90). This will prevent victimization of employees by employers who take advantage of weak policies on labor regulation and employee protection.

Works Cited Dawson, Graham. Inflation and Unemployment: Causes, Consequences and Cures. California: University of California, 2008. Print.

Stone, Jack. Unemployment: The Shocking Truth of Its Causes, Its Outrageous Consequences and What Can Be Done About It. New York: Trafford on Demand Pub, 2007. Print.


Judicial Process in America: Federal and State Courts Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Federal and state courts

Political influence

Appointment of judges

Qualifications of Lawyers

Course of action

A factor that may influence judicial decision making


Works Cited

Introduction The US is a country that has successfully adopted the concept of federalism in its management structure. This has led to the incorporation of two different court systems. These are the federal and state court systems. These two systems have to work together for them to function effectively as per the powers granted to each faction by the constitution. The goal of this essay is to analyze the relationship between the federal and state courts in relation to the political arena, in which they operate, and to evaluate, compare and contrast the parties and factors that make these two courts different.

Federal and state courts The federal courts comprises of two court systems. Namely the Article III courts, and the courts that have been established by congress. The article III courts use the judicial power granted by the country in the court system. Congress, on the other hand, uses its power to establish several courts all with the aim of exercising the judicial rights of the citizens.

The state courts exercise the power given to them by the constitution and state laws. Several courts systems that have been established based on a hierarchy have been set up to deal with any issues pertaining to the law. The state supreme court is the highest court in this level. Depending on a particular state some have intermediate court of appeals. There are also the state trial courts, of which some are known as circuit or district courts. There are specific courts that handle particular issues such as the probate and family courts.

Political influence Politics plays a major role when it comes to handling the affairs of the courts. This is clearly evident in the judicial selection. The president is the one responsible for nominating the candidate that he or she sees fit to fill a judicial post, but the senate must back the candidate, or simply confirm that the person is qualified to hold office. The decision is arrived at by a majority vote. At the state courts, judges at the higher courts are given a higher term in office so as to enable them to do their work well, free from any political influence.

Appointment of judges When it comes to the federal courts, the constitution clearly states that the president is the one with the power to nominate a judge after which the senate must confirm the individual to fill the judicial opening. The term of office is supposed to be for life during good behavior. If the federal judge, however, misbehaves in office through congressional impeachment proceedings the individual may be removed from office.

State courts judges are usually put in office using several methods which depend on the level of court that one is to represent. The term duration also increases depending on the levels, and that is why the term at the county and municipal levels are lower. The term is usually four years as compared to the higher courts where the term of office is 8-12 years. Appointments can be done for a specific number of years or for life. Some judges are also given the posts after they have been appointed then after elected into office.

Qualifications of Lawyers There are several formal requirements that a person must meet so as to be able to practice law. These include getting a 4-year college degree, attending 3 years of law school and passing a mandatory written bar examination. The requirements may vary depending on the state, for instance in some states the applicants are required to pass a written ethics exam which is taken separately. These are the common requirements per state.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The bar exam depends with the state hence an attorney is only qualified to practice law in the specific state. Lawyers are required to take the bar exam in another state if they plan to practice in it. There are some situations that do not necessarily require an attorney to take the bar exam again, such as in a situation where a lawyer has legal experience which spans a couple of years and if the person meets certain standards.

At federal courts, however, not every lawyer can present a case before the judges as they have their own qualifications. Attorneys are sworn in differently before they can become federal attorneys which in turn make them qualified to represent clients at the federal courts. The federal attorney must meet all the requirements that will make him or her eligible to become a licensed attorney such as attending law school and taking and passing the bar exam.

Course of action The federal courts have put in place measures or a system that aims at helping parties that are not content with the decisions made by the lower courts such as the U.S district court. A party may appeal the case at the U.S court of appeals. If the same thing happens at this level the case can further be reviewed at the highest level which is the U.S Supreme court. The decision made at this point is final.

At the state courts, parties that feel that the decision made by a judge at the trial court is not satisfactory may appeal at the intermediate Court of Appeals. In case they feel that the decision made is still not favorable they may ask for a review at the highest state court. Most of the appeals that are usually forwarded at the state supreme courts come from defendants.

A factor that may influence judicial decision making There are some things that determine where the case will be heard. This depends with the location of the violation of law, as well as the place of residence of the plaintiff and the defendant. If both parties are from the same state then the plaintiff will have to file the complaint at the state courts.

The federal courts are known to have many diversity cases because lawyers believe that plaintiffs have an advantage when they bring a case against a defendant who is a non resident at the state courts. This is why they ask for removal to neutral grounds which is the federal courts so that the case is not influenced by such factors.

Conclusion The U.S constitution has been made with the consideration of the concept of federalism which guides the country. This makes it possible for the two courts systems that have been put in place to function effectively. Politics plays a huge role in the judicial system as far as appointing and impeaching judges is concerned, but there are measures such as long terms in office that make political influence in the system minimal as this gives judges the freedom to make lawful decisions.

We will write a custom Essay on Judicial Process in America: Federal and State Courts specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Both courts have ranks which can be used to appeal cases or handle big and sensitive issues. Judges and attorneys at the federal courts have more power and their requirements for qualification are more intensive. Lastly, depending on the type of case, judicial decision making may be influenced by whether the case is being determined at the state or federal courts.

Works Cited Carp, Robert A, and Ronald Stidham. Judicial process in America. Washington, D.C: CQ Press, 1990. Print.

Cass, Ronald A. The rule of law in America. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2001. Print.

Posner, Richard A. The federal courts: challenge and reform. Cambridge, Mass: Harvard University Press, 1996. Print.

Rosen, Jeffrey. The Supreme Court: the personalities and rivalries that defined America. New York: Times Books, 2007. Print.


Social Survey: Sex Essay college essay help online

The participants are three males and three females and are all heterosexual. Two of the females are 22 years old and are in committed relationships whereas the other female is 23 years old and is single. Two of the male participants are 22 years old and single. The other male participant is 28 years old and is in a committed relationship.

All the participants agree that it is acceptable to have sex before marriage. However, the males are more liberal than the females because they all think that the maximum duration that a couple ought to take before engaging in sex is one month. The females, on the other hand, think that the minimum time before engaging in sex ought to be six months.

This means that the males are likely to engage in sex earlier than the females. In addition, the male subjects agree with having friends for purely sexual acts without committed relationships. Two of the females are not interested in a “friends with benefits” relationship. However, only one of the females accepts that she can consent to a “friends with benefits” relationship if the guy in question is someone who she likes.

The males are sexually liberal than females because most females tend to get involved emotionally and psychologically with their sexual partners. Males, on the other hand, simply view sex as the physical act. They, therefore, do not attach themselves emotionally to their sexual partners hence the ability to have sex (without a committed relationship) with many partners without a sense of guilt.

The definition of dating varies with gender to some extent. The male participants see dating as “hanging out” with a friend of the opposite sex, which may include sex. The females view dating as spending time with someone without involving sexual activity. All the participants agree “booty call” has sex as the sole intention.

Their thoughts on hooking up are diverse and do not correlate with the participants’ age or gender. For example, some participants think that hooking up includes sex as the key agenda while others think that hooking up has different results. The participants unanimously agree “open relationships” promote promiscuity and no one is willing to be part of open relationships. The participants also agree that cheating involves having a relationship (sexual or not) with someone other than one’s official spouse.

Technology makes dating convenient since people can communicate effortlessly via email and online chatting services. Technology also facilitates meeting new people. However, technology makes it easy for unfaithful spouses to cheat on their partners.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The male participants are open to online dating. The females, however, find online dating a misuse of time as they do not trust the people they meet online. The two parties reach a compromise that watching pornography does not affect relationships. However, all males are willing to watch pornography with their partners whereas only one of the three females is willing to do so.

None of the participants agrees on swapping of partners or “swinging.” The 28-year old male subject is the only one who agrees to have a threesome. All these outcomes are because everyone regardless of age or gender tends to guard jealously their sexual partner.


The Differences in Nonverbal Communication between Men and Women in the Workplaces Research Paper essay help online: essay help online

Nonverbal communication entails the use body expressions, movements and gestures that signify a certain aspect. Nonverbal communication plays an important role in passing information from one person to another. For effective communication to take place, both parties should be able to decode the nonverbal cues involved.

Therefore, one has to be well equipped with the necessary knowledge to enable him/her to identify a given nonverbal cue as well as understand the message attached to that particular gesture. Men and women have different facial expressions as well as different gestures as far as nonverbal communication is concerned. This paper explores the differences in nonverbal communication between men and women in the workplaces.

Nonverbal cues not only reveal ones emotions but also tend to reveal all the underlying motives of the person in question. In most cases, they reveal fear, joy, honesty, indecision as well as frustration among others. The simplest gestures like the way co-workers stand or enter a room usually speak volumes about aspects such as their confidence, self-worth and credibility (Bryon, 2007, p. 720).

Some behaviors also reveal people’s intent than they may realize. For instance, one unknowingly passes information by the way they sit, look and even stand among othes. Nonverbal communication occurs in a variety of ways such as eye movements, facial expressions and body postures.

Eye contact is a common nonverbal communication aspect. It is made through a series of glances by one party (the speaker) to ensure that the other party (listener) has understood or to gage reactions. The listener uses eye contact to indicate their interest in the speaker’s words or activity. However, men and women behave differently. Most men tend to look up at the end of utterances unlike women who will still retain their eye contact.

According to Espito, women use eye contact more than their male counterparts do especially as a sign of a lagging conversation (2007, p. 102). They do so by looking away to pay more attention to other people and objects within their vicinity. For instance, when a woman glances at her watch, gazes blankly into the distance, or visually scans the room, she is giving definite signals with her eyes that she has, in effect, stopped listening (Gorman, 2008, p. 44).

Most women tend to discuss work-related issues using a social gaze instead of a business gaze. A business gaze entails placing one’s eyes at the mid forehead of the listener. Usually, it is like an imaginary triangle with the eyes at the base and the apex at the mid forehead. When one keeps their gaze in that area, they nonverbally signal no-nonsense, businesslike approach.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When the imaginary triangle is inverted, one moves their focus from the eyes to the mouth-a social gaze. Men have proven to be good at the business gaze as opposed to their female counterparts in the work places. Gorman argues that women need to be aware that to be taken seriously in business interactions, a business gaze has the most impact (2008, p. 52).

When men stare at someone in a business setting, their sole intention is to challenge power or status, which is not the case with women. Women usually engage in more eye contact when holding a conversation. However, men do not make much eye contact. Another aspect that distinguishes the two genders as far as eye contact is concerned is that women are usually more likely to be interrupted when eye contact is not maintained with the other party compared to men.

Men and women differ in their pacifying behaviors that help them deal with their stress. Touching or rubbing one’s neck is one of the most significant and frequent pacifying responses to not only internal but also external stressors. Men may pull their collar as an indirect way to get more ‘breathing space’. They also express their stress by stroking themselves under the chin above the Adam’s apple as well as tugging at the fleshy part of their neck.

Research has shown that the fleshy part of the neck is rich with nerve endings that, when stroked, reduce blood pressure, lower the heart rate and calm the individual down. Women pacify by touching their necks differently than men do. They at times touch or twist the necklaces that they might be wearing. Additionally, they touch or cover the hollow area right below the Adam’s apple when they feel threatened, fearful or anxious.

Mostly, male executives tend to show their dominance in their area of expertise by using finger pointing which is less likely to be associated with the females. They usually use finger pointing in meetings, negotiations or interviews. Rather than being a sign of authority, aggressive finger pointing (with one or four fingers) suggests that the person is losing control of the situation.

The position of the legs is also an important signal as far as nonverbal communication is concerned. When men sit with their legs open, they signify an open dominant attitude. A crossed leg position for men usually signifies uncertainty. The opposite is true for women-crossed leg positions show an open dominant attitude in women. Sitting with legs apart in public forums is an especially masculine signal that indicates a high level of comfort and confidence.

The design of crossing ones legs is also a significant aspect in understanding the nonverbal cues of both men and women. Crossing legs at the knee with the toes relaxed is the usual option for women. On the other hand, most men usually stretch out their legs and cross them loosely at the ankles. Crossing one leg and resting it on the other thigh (so that one knee opens up) is a very masculine position that tales up a great deal of room and signals that the person in question is very sure of himself and of his place in the group.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Differences in Nonverbal Communication between Men and Women in the Workplaces specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One’s walking style speaks volumes about their confidence. Men tend to land squarely on their heels and roll toward the balls of their feet. On the other hand, women catch their weight forward-‘off their heels’. Some women, in expression of their confidence, actually walk on the balls of their feet.

Another aspect that portrays ones confidence if the way they greet other people especially via a handshake. Men do not attach a lot of significance to the way they greet other people, thus it might not mean much to the recipients. On the other hand, in women, a firm handshake is a sign of self-confidence. They make a good impression due to their confidence as well as assertiveness.

The amount of space required to feel comfortable in work relations (when holding conversations) varies with not only individuals but also with gender. Men who do not know each other well tend to keep a greater distance between them than women who have just met.

The difference in the interpersonal distance as determined by gender is even true in Web 2.0 virtual online worlds where many of the rules that govern personal space in the physical world can be found in the virtual world. Generally, women tend to approach others closer than men do. Additionally, they prefer side-by-side interactions whereas men prefer face-to-face conversations (Pathi, 2008, p. 110).

The amount of space given to an individual in the workplace signifies their status. Space usually indicates dominance and leadership. The higher the professional status an employee has, the more space he or she is commonly awarded. Gender differences cannot be identified in such a setting.

However, males and females behave differently when it comes to taking space during meetings. Less confident men tend to pull in as opposed to their less confident female counterparts. On the other hand, confident women tend to keep their materials on the desk in one neat pile whereas the men usually spread out their papers on the table. Both are taken as nonverbal expressions for their dominance as well as confidence.

While entering meetings with a high status, female employees have a greater composure than men do. Before entering the room where the meeting is being held, most male employees will often adjust their jacket, touch their hair or make other adjustments to how they look. However, some female employees show such a behavior.

Women prefer high levels of nonverbal communication than men. Men’s nonverbal behavior associated with dominance and power. Most of women’s facial and body motions signal friendliness and approachability. On the other hand, such motions indicate more reservation and control in men.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Differences in Nonverbal Communication between Men and Women in the Workplaces by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Research as shown that the reason why most women are receptionists is that they smile even when they are not happy. On the other hand, it is hard for men to display their emotions through smiling. Additionally, women use facial expressions a lot to not only send but also to receive messages. On the contrary, men do not use facial expressions as much.

Honesty is one of the core values of most organizations in the contemporary society. However, some employees may not always be honest. Nonverbal cues have been proved to be effective in detecting lies in such instances.

For instance, men engage more in foot/leg movement when telling a truth than their female counterparts do. Furthermore, facial expression/cues differ significantly. Males who are telling the truth are less likely to employ facial adaptors, as is the case with male liars. On the other hand, women are more likely to employ facial cues when telling the truth than men are.

In conclusion, there are many ways in which men and women differ as far as nonverbal communication is concerned. Some of the ways include the manner in which they cross or rather position their legs while seated, their motives when they stare at someone as well as their ability to use their facial expressions.

Additionally, men tend to use space especially in business meetings to express their dominance as opposed to their female counterparts. It is important to have a thorough understanding of the role that body language plays in day-to-day business activities. Executives, salespeople and managers should not only make efforts in reading the clear signs of others but also have to understand their own nonverbal communication means.

References Bryon, Kristin. (2007). Male and Female Managers’ Ability to ‘read’ Emotions:

Relationships with Supervisor’s Performance Ratings and Subordinates’ Satisfaction. Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology, 80, 713-733.

Espito, A. (2007). Fundamentals of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication and the Biometric Issue. Amsterdam, NLD: IOS Press.

Gorman, C.K. (2008). Nonverbal Advantage: Secrets and Science of the Body Language at Work. Williston, VT: Berrett-Koehler Publishers.

Pathi, S. (2008). Modern Business Communication. Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House.


A Report on Customer driven marketing strategy for Easy-pay mobile banking service Case Study cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Introduction Triple play limited is a communication company that specializes in providing voice communication and data communication services. Due to the emergence and advancement of technology, it has become a mandatory for any company to embrace technology so as to match the evolving industry needs.

A recent market research done by Triple play limited in readiness to introduce its mobile banking service indicated that there is a huge chance of success. It is from this market research that the company launches the new product called ‘Easy pay’.

This product has been designed to suit the majority of the unbanked communities more so in rural areas where banks have not penetrated. The company seeks to reach 2 million clients in the next two years with a possibility of gaining a comparative advantage against potential competitors due to the fact that it is has the first mover advantage.

The company has adopted customer driven marketing strategy to sell this product to more so to the rural population who do not have an access to a bank yet need to do transactions like any other population in the urban setting. A customer driven marketing strategy is a marketing strategy that is focused towards a specific group of consumers. This particular group of consumers is referred to as a niche.

Marketing strategy An understanding of the rural setting is crucial in formulating the marketing strategy for Easy pay mobile banking service. The first step is to develop customer loyalty. This will go a long way in trying to penetrate the new market. Customer loyalty is a crucial aspect of customer driven marketing strategy since it help in retaining the customers as well as obtaining referrals from satisfied and loyal customers.

The second step in marketing Easy-pay mobile transfer service is to do formulate the right promotional strategy for the niche. The promotional method to be used is the Top-down communication strategy that will entail the use of offers and promotional materials such as road shows. This is an advertisement method that is common and effective when trying to push products into a rural population that has less access to the internet and has low media reach.

once this has been achieved, the consumers will be required to have the Subscriber Information Module (SIM) cards registered and activated to enable them send and/ or receive money from other subscribers within the triple play voice communication network. The strategy will incorporate three major stages; Introduction, promotion, and adoption.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Once this process has been completed, a continuum of marketing activities that range from media advertisements, road shows and lottery competitions will follow I order to popularize the product among the rural people.

Conclusion and positioning statement This product is aimed at the individual who possess a mobile phone and are subscribers with triple play communication limited. Easy pay is aimed at introducing banking service to a new group of unbanked people. This will provide them with a reliable method of keeping their money safe and secure. It will also introduce a system where they can transfer money to other individuals at real time.

This will bring about convenience and bridge the gap between the banked and the unbanked communities. The company will also seek strategic parterships with several retail banks to allow people who have bank accounts to send money to the ones that have Easy-pay mobile service.

The positioning statement for Easy pay mobile transfer service is ” For all of you who need a fast, reliable, convenient, and a safe way of keeping and transferring funds, Easy-pay offers the right solution for you. With an unprecedented entry into the market, a customer can rest assured that we offer more than just a service; we change lives of many.


Social Consequences of Tourism Research Paper essay help online free

Executive Summary Tourism has a number of social benefits to the host communities. From one end, it assembles people of different cultural affiliations together. The act of sharing and learning from each other’s culture fosters cultural understanding. This understanding is an incredible ingredient towards embracing the spirit of multiculturalism.

However, when cultural inferiority and superiority complexes exist between the host communities and the visiting people, embracement of multiculturalism suffers a great deal. The perceptions of the host people about tourism also play pivotal roles in determining the social impacts of tourism. When tourism serves to introduce some lifestyles that are not acceptable within the ethical and moral domains of the host communities, they may perceive it as a means of deteriorating their cultural beliefs and norms.

Therefore, rather than tourism serving to highlight and reinforce the need for global cultural integration, it serves to produce cultural conflicts. The paper notes that some of the things that cause the cultural conflicts are only undue indulgences by some specific persons but not the entire society from which the tourists come. Unfortunately, chances exist where the host communities may tend to over generalize the behaviors of an individual tourist to use them to define the entire society from which she or he comes.

This leads to stereotyping, which is another social impact of tourism. The paper also argues that tourism has the social impacts of creating public awareness of the host communities’ cultural artifacts coupled with their needs to the international community. More often than not, such awareness has the implication of attracting the attention of the global community to the societal needs.

Introduction Across the globe, tourism constitutes an industry that is growing rapidly. It affects communities both socially and economically. This means that it is a source of livelihood to many people living within tourism destinations. However, even with these advantages, tourism creates a perceived fear among the residents of the tourism destinations who associate with the perception of its capacity to erode the cultures of the indigenous people.

Opposed to these negative social impacts, “as with any economic activity, tourism can have negative impacts on communities” (Surabaya, Tee, and Somme 57). Thus, it is critical for measures and steps taken to be taken to minimize all these negative impacts so that tourism can act to benefit the communities living within the locations of the tourism destinations. As an economic sector, tourism is peculiar in comparison with all other economic sectors.

In the first instance, unlike many sectors, tourism remains a subtle industry whose employees remain not replaced by technology. Consequently, tourism will continue to act a major source of employment. It “aids in the conservation of natural spaces, avoids the migration of the local population, and improves the economic and socio-cultural level of the local population” (Haley 4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Tourism plays pivotal roles as a major employer in changing social interactions of people. Additionally, tourism facilitates “the commercialization of the local products, interchange of ideas, costumes and the sensitization of the tourist, and local population for protection of the environment” (Haley 4).

From the perspective this fundamental argument, this paper focuses on highlighting the various social impacts of tourism. However, since time constraint hinders one from scrutinizing all the impacts in a single paper, the research paper only considers the social impacts of tourism.

Methodology This research utilizes secondary data and information to analyze the social impacts of tourism. The research generates data and information from a variety of secondary sources including libraries, journals, and internet resources. After an in depth analysis of the social impacts of tourism as reflected in these secondary sources, the research will draw inferences from them.

However, it is crucial to reveal that such an approach introduces a major drawback especially on issues such as the reliability of the secondary sources as general reflections of social impacts of tourism. Nevertheless, the paper mitigates this limitation by drawing the sources utilized in the literature review from a variety of studies based on largely disbursed geographical regions across the globe.

Aims and Objectives The main objectives of this research are to

Introspect the social impacts of tourism

Deploy the social impacts introspected in (i) above to prescribe some approaches that may be used to minimize and mitigate the negative impacts

Based on these objectives, the main aim of the research is to lay down theoretical constructs on how tourism can act to influence societies living in tourism destinations positively. By shedding light on the negative and positive impacts of tourism, the point of argument here is that it becomes possible to capitalize on specific policies to enhance the realization of optimal benefits from the positive impacts while minimizing the negative impacts.

Literature Review Residents’ Perception of Tourism

An enormous body of knowledge, which scrutinizes the impacts of tourism on societies living within tourism destinations, depicts tourism as having both positive and negative social impacts. On the negative side, Deer, Jag, and Fred argue, “most jobs for local people in the tourist industry require the locals to work as servants, house maids, waiters, gardeners, and other menial works that may give people a sense of inferiority” (66).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Social Consequences of Tourism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Consequently, tourism may make people perceive themselves as inferior in comparison to those touring their historical areas of residence. The danger in this kind of perception is that local people possess high risks of their cultures mixing with those of the tourists.

Therefore, their cultural artifacts are likely to disappear or fade. While this argument may remain valid in some situations, it is also arguable that cultures of people may also act as sources of tourism attraction. Consequently, while tourism may serve to dissolve indigenous people’s cultures, it may also act as a mechanism of reinforcing them because, if indigenous people’s cultures attract tourists, it is likely that the tourists would tend to associate themselves with such cultures for them to have an ample experience on the cultures.

Deer, Jag, and Fred agree with line of argument by claiming, “Tourists come from other societies with different values and lifestyles, and because they have come to seek pleasure, they may spend large amounts of money besides behaving in ways that they would not accept at home” (68). This implies that the fantasy associated with tourism may act to justify some otherwise morally unacceptable social indulgences.

In this line of argument, Haley asserts, “visitor’s behavior can have a detrimental effect on the quality of life of the host community including crowding and congestion, drugs and alcohol problems, and prostitution and increased crime levels”(5). When some of the unethical behaviors evidencing themselves within societies because of tourism end up being justified, the moral norms that tie the host communities together must disintegrate.

Thus, the society becomes fragmented. In addition, societies may develop a perception that tourism is one of the mechanisms of taking away what is traditionally rightfully theirs. For instance, in most cases, some people normally move from their places of residence to pave ways for construction of tourists’ recreational centers, restaurants, and amusement parks among other things.

This case has the implication of making tourism “infringe on human rights” (Haley 6). Where tourists may engage in morally unacceptable indulgences within their societies of origin, their interaction with local people within the tourism destinations may create the wrong impression about the social, moral, and ethical constructions of the societies from which particular tourist comes. In one end, this may have the implication of stereotyping some people of a given originality.

On the other end, where a given society living within tourism attraction centers perceives itself as inferior in comparison to the visiting people, chances are that it may end up embracing certain unethical indulgences, which may not even be acceptable by the visitors’ cultural, moral, and ethical norms. In this context, Deer, Jag, and Fred argue, “local people seeing the tourist example may want to live and behave the same way” (67).

This step is a great impediment to social norms of the indigenous people living within tourism attraction destinations. By impairing the social norms of the residents of tourists’ destinations, tourism creates differing perceptions about the tourists among the locals. For instance, Haley argues that aspects that are akin to the perception of tourism among the local people living within north America results to poor and inappropriate hosts’ attitudes.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Social Consequences of Tourism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More According to him, tourism truncates into “increased noise, litter, traffic, crime, over-crowding, and tourism-induced price increases” (5). In particular, price hiking that is induced by the perception that tourists have a lot of money to spend impairs the buying power of the local people living within the localities where the tourism attraction centers are located.

Nevertheless, the same perception leads to prioritization of certain developments within the tourism destination centers, which have the overall impact of bettering the mobility of the local people. A good example of this is the immense investment by the governments towards the development of infrastructures including roads and recreational facilities in areas of tourist attraction. The myriads of social impacts of tourism based on the perceptions of people about economic activities are ideally theoretical in nature.

Quoting Ape et al. work on ‘Developing and Testing a Tourism Impact Scale’, which was published in the journal Travel Research in 1998, Haley supports this line of argument. He asserts, “While the research conducted has made a significant step towards a better understanding of the relationship between positive and negative perceptions of tourism and support for specific tourism-related policies, historically, most of the research on the topic of residents’ perceptions has been theoretical in nature” (Haley 6).

To resolve the criticism of understanding of social impacts of tourism based on the constructed perception of people about the industry, the theory of social exchange is relevant. Surabaya, Tee, and Somme have done a research on the capacity of social exchange theory to explain the social impacts of tourism. Their research claims, “It is not simply the existence of an exchange that is important, but the nature and value of the exchange that influences attitudes and perceptions” (Surabaya, Tee, and Somme 59).

This implies that people who are likely to hold a positive perception of the social impact of tourism are the ones who have been employed by the industry. However, for this to happen, such people need to have had a positive employment experience with the industry. Otherwise, their perceptions would end up being negative. Thus, it is arguable that the discussed social impact of tourism based on the perception of the locals is akin to experience that people have with the tourism industry within their areas of residence.

Tourism and Stereotyping

Tourism brings together people of differing nationalities, race, and gender coupled with people segregated based on other demographic differences. More often than not, conception of differences among people in a negative way based on nationality, gender, and race among other social and demographic differences merely entangle oversimplification of perceptions of people involved.

In fact, association of one group with some certain characteristics that are inferior or negative is not based on facts but rather on misconceptions and prejudices. These misconceptions and prejudices about a particular group of people lead to their stereotyping. More interactively, and from the perspective of socio-psychology, stereotyping entangles “the pictures that people have in their heads about other groups” (Major et al. 34).

When the interactions of tourists with the indigenous people within the localities of tourism destinations serve to amplify the differences between the tourists and the locals, the preconceived negative perceptions of the indigenous people against the tourists’ of particular origin are confirmed.

For instance, when an indigenous person living within a tourist attraction destination encounters an individual of a certain nationality who is violent, the person may spread the news that all people belonging to the same nationality as the tourist are all violent.

This kind of generalization hinders diversity besides leading to stigmatization and discrimination. Although these are examples of negative stereotypes, positive stereotypes associated with tourists of a given originality may also be harmful since they truncate into limitation of the attitudes of people towards a group of people.

Bearing in mind the arguments raised here, is becomes imperative to posit that, depending on the nature of social and cultural differences between the indigenous people and the tourists, tourism may act to either boost the spirit of multiculturalism or destroy it even further when two groups of people of different nationalities come together. Concepts of stereotyping are anchored on three fundamental aspects. These are traits, concepts, and antecedents. Antecedents involve feelings of being rejected or accepted at an individual level.

In the interaction process of tourists and the local people, such feelings influence the local people’s behaviors and attitudes towards tourists and vice versa. On the other hand, concepts entail a “person’s beliefs regarding the stereotype that out-group members hold about his or her own group” (Voyager and Main 917). This implies that people who are stereotyped presume that the version of beliefs held against their intergroup are justifiable from the basis of impressions held by other people as opposed to out-group stereotypes.

This aspect of stereotyping is significant in the social interactions of people possessing conspicuous differences. Arguably, tourism presents such kind of social interaction. Indeed, the traits of stereotypes are contextual components, behavioral components, and cognitive components. Such components play incredible roles in defining social relationships between tourists and the host communities.

Tourism and Multiculturalism

For the creation of an environment that would foster multiculturalism, it is desirable that the parties coming together respect the cultural norms of each other. Unfortunately, “…out of ignorance or carelessness, tourists may fail to respect local customs and moral values” (Deer, Jag, and Fred 67).

The repercussion is the emergence of cultural conflicts. This means that one of the groups of people would be seeing the other as having some cultural traits, which are inferior in comparison to the cultural norms of the group from where one comes. This hinders the integration of the indigenous people’s and the tourists’ cultures.

The implication is hindering multiculturalism. In the same line of thought, Gawker Visitor Information posits, “there are some concerns that tourism development may lead to destinations losing their cultural identity by catering for the perceived needs of tourists – particularly from international markets” (2).

Therefore, a cultural battle exists between tourists and the indigenous people due to the need to protect the cultural artifacts of the indigenous people and the need to fulfill the cultural desires of the international tourist in the attempt to entice them to come back.

Where tourism is the only source of income in societies that are caught up in the mayhem of cultural conflicts, the battle has the highest probabilities of favoring the tourists. Put differently, the cultures of the indigenous people would be superimposed by those of the tourists. Consequently, the fertile environments for fostering multiculturalism cease to exist. Where the indigenous people are culturally inflexible, the overall impact is hostility.

The local people acerbate this hostility towards the tourists in the attempt to maintain cultural status quo. The argument here is that, in case the interaction process of tourists and the local people produces threats to the cultures of both parties, it becomes incredibly difficult for either party to embrace the differences between them. Therefore, creating the spirit of multiculturalism becomes difficult.

Amid the raised concerns that cultural conflicts between tourists and the host communities establish an environment that is prohibitive of cultural integration and hence multiculturalism, there is a scholarly evidence that tourism is an essential tool for propagating cultural understanding. For instance, Surabaya, Tee, and Somme argue, “tourism is an interface for cultural exchange, facilitating the interaction between communities and visitors (domestic and international)” (59).

Opposed to the raised arguments, where the grounds for visiting a particular destination are pegged on the reasons for coming to an understanding and experiencing a certain group of people’s cultures, cultural conflicts may not exist because there is no point that the tourists would attempt to seek attention for their cultural beliefs and affiliations from the host communities.

Rather, the intention of visits is to experience cultural beliefs and affiliations of the host communities. In this dimension, Surabaya, Tee, and Somme assert, “People want to interact with other cultures, learn about traditions, and even confront themselves with new perspectives on life and society” (59). Directly congruent with this view, it sounds plausible to infer that the tourism industry is driven by experience. Hence, host communities’ culture constitutes unique experiences.

Tourism as a Tool for Creating Social Awareness

The cultural artifacts of different people are unique. When tourists visit to experience these artifacts of local people, awareness of both the existence and value for the cultural artifacts of the host community is created. This way, tourism helps in the integration of the host communities’ beliefs and norms with those of the wider global community.

It also helps in raising the caliber of awareness of the host communities’ social needs. For instance, through tourism, awareness is created for the inadequacy of community services such as healthcare and or continued persistence of cultural beliefs that impede the development of societies such as seeking access to education, gender equality, and other things that are given amicable consideration by the developed societies.

Based on the experience concerning the ways of life of particular groups of people, donor agencies are able to design programs to address the challenges that face people in ways that the programs are going to be welcomed without undue friction. Still in the realm of awareness, Haley argues that tourism helps to create awareness for the need to “promote conservation of wildlife and natural resources such as rain forests, as these are now regarded as tourism assets” (12).

However, even though the awareness of the needs to conserve the natural environment is created coupled with the society embracing the efforts, tourism also acts to destroy it. Surabaya, Tee, and Somme exemplify how tourism may serve to destroy natural ecosystems amid the intensive awareness by the host communities on the significance of their conservation.

They argue, “Tourism poses a threat to a region’s natural and cultural resources such as water supply, beaches, coral reefs, and heritage sites through overuse” (Surabaya, Tee, and Somme 63). This negative impact is even more amplified by considering how tourism results to more waste release to the environment, more noise, and littering among other things.

Conclusion Therefore, based on the expositions made in the paper about tourism, it suffices to declare the industry as one that has a lot of influence socially and economically. Socially, tourism influences host communities both positively and negatively. In this research paper, it has been argued that some of the social impacts of tourism are erosion and or fostering the cultures of the indigenous people. It may lead to stereotyping besides serving as a tool for creating awareness.

The capacity of tourism to result to reinforcement of the cultural beliefs of the locals or to erode them depends on the perceptions that the locals have on tourisms and the reasons as to why people visit a particular destination. From this paradigm, the paper argues that, in case people tour certain tourism attraction centers with the chief intention of learning and experiencing the cultures of the indigenous people, chances of cultural conflicts are minimal since tourists would not bring in their cultural beliefs and affiliations in the interaction process.

Furthermore, the paper argued that where tourists engage in some behaviors, which are not morally acceptable by the host communities, tourism might have the social impacts of inducing stereotypes. This acts as immense impediments to the integration of the persons brought together by tourism. In overall, the paper maintains that tourism has more positive social impacts than negative impacts. Therefore, tourism acts to benefit the host communities both socially and economically.

Works Cited Deer, Margaret, Leo Jag, and Liz Fred. “Rethinking social impacts of tourism research: A new research agenda.” Tourism Management 33.1(2012): 64-73. Print.

Gawker Visitor Information. The Social and Cultural Impacts of Tourism, 2011. Web.

Haley, Arthur. The Social Impacts of Tourism: A Case Study of Bath, UK. Surrey: University of Surrey, UK, 2004. Print.

Major, Boniface et al. “Coping with negative stereotypes about intellectual performance: The role of psychological disengagement.” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 24.3(1998): 34-50. Print.

Surabaya, Elijah, Veronica Tee, and Stephaney Somme. “Understanding Residents’ support for tourism development in the central region of Ghana.” Journal of Travel Research 41.3(2002): 57-67. Print.

Voyager, Douglas, and James Main. “How Do Individuals Expect to Be Viewed by Members of Lower Status Groups? Content and Implications of Meta-Stereotypes.” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 75.4(1998): 917-937. Print.


Religion and Tourism Relations Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help

Executive Summary The relationship between religion and tourism is complex. Therefore, this relationship can only be explained by revisiting religious tourism. This essay provides an insight into the various dimensions of religious tourism. For that reason, it provides a better understanding of religion and tourism relations through religious tourism practices.

This essay acknowledges that religious tourism is a multi-purpose trip. Therefore, the relationship between religion and tourism has resulted into the sharing of sacred and secular spaces. This explains why religious tourism is one of the largest contributors of tourist flows. Additionally, it is one of the growing niches in the tourism market. Consequently, the relationship between religion and tourism has created a multi- billion industry.

Religious tourism is worth around $18 billion. The World Tourism Organization (UNWTO) also estimates that 300-330 million people visit major religious sites every year. In addition, this essay provides examples of good practices in religious tourism. For instance, there are sections explaining how governments, religious authorities and tour operators can manage events and religious sites. Additional, there are explanations on how these practices can be implemented in a way that promotes sustainable tourism.

For instance, it emphasizes on the use of modern information and communication technologies to market new products. The changing trend in religious tourism has also been explored in the essay. There is evident that most countries are taking religious tourism as a serious industry. Consequently, proliferation of modern infrastructures such as five stars hotels in pilgrimage sites is common place. Additionally, the purpose of religious tourism is slowly shifting away from spiritual enrichment to leisure.

This essay also provides an insight into the problems facing religious tourism. For instance, restrictions in international travel that hamper growth of religious tourism have been highlighted. In addition, terrorism has been indentified as one of the major impediments to religious tourism.

Lastly, this essay has provided recommendations on future developments in the religious tourism industry. For instance, there is special emphasis on the need to promote the prosperity of the local population. Consequently, locals will have the reason to preserve monuments and other heritages.

Introduction Citing Hitrec (1990), Vukonic argues that the word ‘tourist’ is derived from the Latin name ‘tornus’. Tornus refers to an obligation to visit religious shrines in Rome. For that reason, all forms of modern tourism are thought to have originated from religious tourism. However, there is little scholarly evidence to support this claim (Vukonic).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, people visit places with religious attractions every year. Some scholars argue that journeys made for religious purposes should not be termed as tourism. However, just like an ordinary tourist, a religious tourist consumes good and services on his way or at his destination. He, therefore, generates economic benefits that are similar to any other tourist.

Consequently, religious pilgrimages are undoubtedly a form of tourism. To best understand the relationship between religion and tourism the spatial approach is used (Shinde). In this regard, tourists and adherents of certain religions occupy the same place. For that reason, they both have a role in maintaining the identity of that place as a sacred site. Additionally, religious tourism has a spiritual and a recreational component.

Therefore, religious tourism enables people to appreciate commonalities among people in spite of their religious beliefs (Abelow). For that reason, religious tourism can result into a spiritual awakening for any person. Religious attractions fill a person with a feeling of sacredness. Consequently, a relationship between a tourist and the attraction is created. Accordingly, a tourist gets the urge to repeat the experience.

Nonetheless, these travels are closely or remotely connected to holidays. In addition, the world has become more open and festive. Likewise, globalization has opened religious tourist sites to the outside world. Therefore, leisure and holiday activities are slowly supplementing religious satisfaction in this form of tourism.

Apart from providing spiritual nourishment and leisure, religious tourism has other benefits. For instance, religious tourism can be used to increase awareness and protect the heritage of an attraction site. The relationship between religion and tourism relation is also an important tool in peace building. For that reason, the inter-cultural and inter-religious interaction experienced during pilgrimages can be used to foster unity and peaceful co-existence. For that reason, religious tourism is a multi-purpose trip.

Globalization has also commercialized religious tourism (UNWTO). For that reason, globalization has made this form of tourism a marketable product. The trend in religious tourism is, therefore, slowly changing. For instance, pilgrim sites have began to appreciate modern infrastructures such as five stars hotels. In addition, information and communication technologies are now extensively used in promotion and advertisement of these sites.

Moreover, most countries have embraced freedom of movement as an important factor in enhancing religious tourism. Some countries have also embarked on the measurement and management of the flow of people and traffics in major religious events. Additionally, some countries have reverted to maintenance and rehabilitation of neglected religious and cultural monuments. This initiative has occurred after these countries realized that these sites have an economic value.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Religion and Tourism Relations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Nonetheless, some international travel laws hamper internationalization of religious tourism (UNWTO). For instance, the fight against tourism has been used as an excuse to reduce the freedom of movement. Moreover, countries are tightening their immigration law. In addition, there are also tougher visa requirements which are applied in a selective manner. Although these measures do not target tourism, they have a negative effect on its development.

This essay provides an insight into the dimensions, destinations, inter-cultural and inter-faith aspects of religious tourism. For that reason, it provides a better understanding of religion and tourism relations through discussing religious tourism.

Overview of the Religious Tourism Industry According to Abelow, religious tourism is a multi-billion industry. The World Religious Travel states that this industry is worth around $18 billion (Abelow). Therefore, economic impact of religious tourism should not be underestimated. Additionally, more than 300 million tourists traverse across the world for religious purposes.

Abelow estimates that these tourists make over 600 million trips worldwide. Furthermore, tourism growth has followed a trend similar to that of the growth of religion (Scott and Jafari). In the last five decades, the Middle East has received a higher number of tourists than any other part of the world.

Accordingly, the flow of tourists is increasing at the rate of 10% in the Middle East (Scott and Jafari). It is worth noting that religious tourism is the main form of tourism in the Middle East. For that reason, it is clear that religious tourism is the fastest growing form of tourism. With the popularity of religious tourism increasing, new markets for budget and luxury travel are being opened. Consequently, sacred and secular spaces are being shared on the global stage.

Major Development in Religious Tourism Globalization is one of the factors that have enabled the commercialization of religious tourism (UNWTO). For that reason, globalization has made this form of tourism a marketable product. A few years ago, paying to enter a house of God was something strange. Furthermore, pilgrims were exempted from taxes and, therefore, countries gained nothing from them. However, this is changing and most countries are transforming religious tourism into a serious industry.

Previously, religious pilgrimages were thought to be holy. Therefore, they were a preserve of a particular religious group. Nowadays, pilgrimages and other religious travels have been secularized (UNWTO). Additionally, most countries are ignoring religious consideration and teachings to enjoy gains from religious tourism (Vukonic). In the last decade, many countries have experienced growth in their economy.

For that reason, the middle and upper class have accumulated sufficient disposable income for travel (UNWTO). Religious tourism, on the other hand, provides great opportunities for those seeking leisure and spiritual nourishment. Religious tourism, therefore, provides an opportunity to all people regardless of their faith, religion and philosophy.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Religion and Tourism Relations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Religious tourism refers to travels made to pilgrimage sites (Shinde). Therefore, religious tourism is a form of tourism where the motivating factor is religious. Additionally, the destination for a religious tourist is a sacred, pilgrimage or a religious heritage site (Shinde). However, these travels are closely or remotely connected to holidays nowadays. For that reason, although religious tourists are motivated by religious satisfaction, leisure and holiday activities are supplementary opportunities (UNWTO).

Consequently, the client base of religious tourism is slowly changing. Initially, people visiting religious sites were mainly locals or members of a particular religious group. Today, these areas are receiving an increasing number of foreigners. These foreigners are also not particularly from a religious group associated with these sites. Moreover, pilgrimages are also accompanied by services such as tour operations and a package of leisure related activities (Shinde).

For that reason, there is a realization that the worlds is more open, festive and free (UNWTO). Most countries have also developed overlapping markets for this industry. These markets include spiritual, physical and leisure (UNWTO). Although this is a late realization, it has an enormous room for growth. However, this growth will be effectively realized if inter-faith and inter-cultural dialogues are fostered (UNWTO). Moreover, travel sites must respond to the new expectations from the people.

In order to accrue maximum benefits from religious tourism, some countries have invested on the necessary infrastructure (Vukonic). These infrastructures include good accommodation, shops, entertainment facilities and other facilities that meet the needs and interests of tourists.

For instance, Saudi Arabia has spent US $100 million on the extension mosques in Mecca (Vukonic). Roads and airports have also been built to connect Mecca with other parts of Saudi Arabia. Saudi Arabia has also embarked on innovative ways of monitoring traffic and people when an enormous mass of people visit Mecca and other pilgrimage areas.

For instance, a closed circuit television network is being used to regulate the flow of people and traffic (Vukonic). Deterring the maximum number of visitors at a place of pilgrimage or a religious gathering is important as overcrowding has in the past led to stampedes. Accordingly, these happenings have dissuaded people from visiting these interesting places.

Accommodations meant for pilgrims and other visitors have also been improved. For instance, luxury hotels have replaced the simple accommodation associated with these visits (UNWTO). These hotels are also offering foods and services that meet the needs of all visitors. Therefore, an economic way of thinking is slowly finding inroads in religious pilgrimages. For that reason, the future of religious tourism looks bright.

Types of Attractions in Religious Tourism Travels made as a means of fulfilling a religious purpose have been part man’s history. However, religious tourism remains among the least explored activities in the tourism industry (Vukonic). Nonetheless, religious tourism is gaining roots in developed and developing countries.

There are three main types of religious tourism (UNWTO). These types are classified according to their dimensions and the places where they are in practice. They include pilgrimages whose activity has become touristic, religious gatherings and religious routes that lead to pilgrimage sites, monuments and sanctuaries (UNWTO).

Additionally, in a bid to market and enable access by lower classes, religious tourism is gaining prominence. Furthermore, religious tourism is being internationalized (UNWTO). Through these changes pilgrimages are regaining the status they once enjoyed (UNWTO). Consequently, religious gathering and attraction sites are attracting millions of people all over the world. For that reason, pilgrimage and religious routes are once again acting as links among people of different nationalities.

Pilgrimages are the most common types of religious tourism. Interestingly, pilgrimages are thought to be the predecessors of modern tourism (Vukonic). A pilgrimage confirms the fundamental characteristic of tourism as a change of residence due to some reasons (Vukonic). Additionally, most religions incorporate pilgrimages in their doctrines. Therefore, this is a common practice among Christians, Muslims, Hindus and Buddhists. Most of the pilgrimages are made in centralized areas.

Historically, visitors have always streamed in these areas for religious purposes. Religious gatherings, on the other hand, are held to mark a religious event. Some of these events include a visit by a prominent religious leader, marking an anniversary or a jubilee. These gatherings have the capability to attract millions of people. Pilgrimage routes such as the Way of St. James are also a major attraction (UNWTO).

To make then more attractive, the routes are enriched with cultural events. However, lifestyles have changed, and many religious travels are not inclined to religious purposes only. Today, the motives for these pilgrimages are more secular than religious. Therefore, most people are visiting this attraction for education and leisure. For that reason, there are minimal or no differences between other types of tourism and religious tourism.

Role of Religious Tourism in Solving Major Problems in the World

Religious tourism is characterized by the ethics that shape the behaviour of pilgrims and tourists (UNWTO). This ethical behaviour transforms religious tourists into agents of dialogue among cultures and civilizations. For that reason, pilgrimages are a way of weaving together peaceful coexistence between different people. In addition, pilgrimages and religious gathering encourage solidarity in fighting major problems facing the world such as poverty.

Religious tourism is, therefore, one of the most effective methods of dialogue among religions and cultures. Furthermore, religious tourism presents a clear understanding of the economic, ecological and cultural dealings of a particular group of people (UNWTO). For that reason, it is an effective way of communicating the various problems affecting a particular people.

Additionally, ecumenism is also a good way of promoting mutual acceptance and cooperation worldwide (UNWTO). Although it is a Christian doctrine, ecumenism can be successfully applied to solve inter-religious conflicts. For that reason, promoters of religious tourism should incorporate this principle in their plans as it brings harmony to the society.

Moreover, tourism destinations with a combination of attractions from different faiths favour inter-faith dialogue. Such encounters are facilitated by continuous meeting at major religious tourist sites. When these kinds of encounters are encouraged, the world will truly become a global village. In addition, tourism will be promoted to greater heights since people will feel welcomed in all parts of the world despite their religious and cultural inclinations.

Impediment to the Development of Religious Tourism Various obstacles stand in the way of developing religious tourism sustainably. Some of the main impediments include lack of respect to human rights and limitations in the freedom of movements. For instance, there is discrimination in the issuance of visas.

In this regard, some countries do not allow people from certain parts of the world to enter their countries when religious tourism is on the peak for security reasons. Terrorism is also another impediment to the development of religious tourism. For instance, in countries such as Mali, particular groups of people do not uphold the right to heritage.

They seem not to understand that this heritage enriches their cultural diversity. The destruction of religious monuments in northern Mali is, therefore, an insult to religious tourism. Coincidentally, terrorism is a major problem in countries where tourism totally relies on religious practices. A typical example of these countries is Iraq. In Iraq, there are numerous pilgrimages sites for the Muslim faith. For other faiths, these sites and other attractions are also a joy to watch.

Nonetheless, Iraq lacks a stable government and experiences frequent terrorist attacks. Consequently, Iraq does not reap full benefits from religious tourism despite housing major attractions. Lack of insufficient information is another setback to the development of religious tourism (UNWTO). For instance, information on the volume and dynamics of religious tourism is either absent or unreliable. Consequently, it is very difficult to develop a religious tourism strategy.

Recommendation for Future Developments in Religious Tourism

The hospitality industry is one of the rapidly growing industries globally (Kana). Therefore, it is one of the industries that are creating jobs and building new careers at the moment. Commercially, religious tourism is developing at an alarming rate.

For that reason, this industry must overcome a number of operational problems in order to sustainably manage facilities, sites and the heritage of these sites (UNWTO). Products within this industry must, hence, be developed carefully and marketed in a way that meets the changing needs of clients. Accordingly, religious tourism should seek to totally satisfy guest by offering quality services.

Most of the sites visited by domestic tourists are yet to be fully exploited (Kana). Moreover, they are not managed in a way that offers comfort to the visiting tourists. For that reason, the quality of services offered in these destinations must be upgraded. Some sites, especially those in troubled regions, lack good roads and comfortable accommodation. For instance, there is a shortage of hotels in most parts of Iraq (Kana).

Shockingly, the few hotels available are not being exploited in a manner that derives full benefits from the visiting tourists. However, there are many hotels and accommodations in the provinces of Najaf and Karbala. These provinces host major religious attractions in Iran. However, very few hotels are first class. Majority are from second to fourth class. Therefore, they lack the luxury of five stars hotels (Kana).

Therefore, good accommodation should be offered and major roads leading to these sites upgraded (Kana). Hotels are an important element in tourism and, therefore, must be of the required standards. In addition, the human resource within these hotels must be competent. Moreover, marketing of these sites as major tourist destination must be intensified (Kana). Promoters should embrace latest communication and information technologies to advertise these sites to other parts of the world.

For religious tourism to be characterized as sustainable, it must foster local development (UNWTO). Furthermore, it must provide economic, environment and cultural benefits to the local people. The UNWTO has recommended objectives that must be fulfilled before any form of religious tourism is termed sustainable. Some of these objectives include economic feasibility, local growth and provision of employment.

Other objectives include visitor satisfaction, environmental conservation and enhancing cultural richness. It is believed that communities will only support tourism if the industry generates income to sustain their members. According to Shinde, indigenous religious entrepreneurs play a big role in developing relations in religious tourism. Religious tourism is a modern form of traditional pilgrimage economy.

For that reason, indigenous entrepreneurship with knowledge on socio-cultural activities, ritual exchanges and religious protocols must be tolerated in areas receiving high numbers of religious tourists (Shinde). Consequently, these local entrepreneurs will be able to develop innovative products that suit the demands of their visitors. This is what is happening at Vrindavan in India (Shinde). This act also encourages campaigns aimed at education people on the need to maintain and preserve major attractions.

Conclusion Religious tourism impacts on the local community positively. The host quality of life, therefore, is transformed. For instance, some social-economic changes take place within the community. For that reason, religious tourism is an agent of development. Ensuring long-term conservation of religious sites is a means of ensuring sustainability in religious tourism. According to UNWTO, there is a need to develop a dynamic relationship between religious and cultural heritage values.

Consequently, the interests of the host community, tourists and the religious community are served. Most importantly, communities should acknowledge that religious tourism is now a multi-purpose trip. For that reason, services offered at attraction sites must meet the needs of both the religious and secular population. Additionally, it is important to deal with the major problems affecting the religious tourism industry.

For instance, law on immigration and visa application must be relaxed to facilitate free movements across borders. Most importantly, there is need to disseminate information on major religious tourist attraction using modern information and communication technologies. Finally, the world has changed and nearly everything has been commercialized. Consequently, countries with religious attractions must follow suit.

Works Cited Abelow, Lorraine. 2009. Religious Tourism is Rapidly On the Rise. Web.

Kana, Alaa Gado. “Religious Tourism in Iraq, 1996-1998: An Assessment”. International Journal of Business and Social Science 2.4 (2012). Print.

Scott, Noel, and Jafari Jafar. Tourism in the Muslim World. 2010 Bingley: Emerald Group Publishing Limited, 2010. Print.

Shinde, Kiran. Entrepreneurship and Indigenous Entrepreneurs in Religious Tourism in India International Journal of Tourism Research 12 (2010) 523–535. Print.

Vukonic, Boris “Religion Tourism: Economic Value or an Empty Box”. Zagreb International Review of Economics


The sales force organization Expository Essay essay help

The organization of the sales force entails the structure that has been adopted by a certain sales force in an organization. Some sales force may be less structured while others may have complex structures.

In addition, the structuring of a sales force may also be in terms of a centralized sales force and a decentralized workforce. The organization of the sales force helps the organization to choose the channel, which will be most appropriate in marketing the products. While organizing the workforce, the chosen channel should be structured in a way that meets the conditions in the market.

The organization of the sales workforce also determines the assigning of roles to the workforce. The sales workforce should be assigned roles that will enhance the organization’ success in the market. H2pro should also organize the sales workforce according to the customers’ needs in the market.

Type of Structure The type of organizational structure refers to the delegation of authority and power in the organization, as well as assigning of roles and duties that each employee should undertake. Line and staff structure encompass having specialized services and activities being offered and carried out by certain members of staff.

For example, the organization can select specialists and supervisors who will deal with sales staff. The line supervisors have the power to command the members of sales staff who fall under their respective lines. The structure adopted by H2pro can be regarded as line and staff structure since supervisors have been assigned the role of overseeing various activities in the organization.

Span of Control

The span of control details the delegation of duties in the organization and how the various members of staff have been assigned various roles. The span of control in H2pro ranges from the Chief Executive Officer, the mangers at various levels, to the employees at the lowest ranks.

Line and Staff or Not?

The structure of H2pro can be regarded as that of Line and Staff; at the top of the organization is the owner who carries out the role of a CEO. There are also managers of departments such as the manager in charge of sales and marketing.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The human resource manager deals with the hiring of employees. There is also a manager in charge of inventions and innovations taking place in the organization. The manager in charge of public relations represents the organization in meetings and forums, which may take place either outside or in the country.

Sales Territories

Sales territories encompass the markets in which the firm wishes to carry out promotion for its product. A company defines the sales territories through identifying the potential market. Based on the potential market, it is easy to know the territories that the sales team will cover.

The best territories are the ones most likely to have potential customers. In the case of H2pro, the sales territories of the headphones include playgrounds such as places where people engage in competitions in such sports like swimming, football, as well as athletics.

Sales Force Size

The sales force size refers to the number of employees in the sales department who will take part in marketing the product. An organization should have adequate employees to carry out the sales function. The size of the sales force should be enough to cover the entire market and ensure that promotion for a product is carried out extensively.

Sales force training Every organization that wishes to market its products to the target customers must train its sales workforce. Training the sales workforce ensures that they have the adequate knowledge about the product to be marketed. This way, they will convince customers and potential buyers that the product they are marketing is the best.

H2pro has to ensure that the sales team is well equipped with information about the headphones they intend to sell in the market. Members of the sales team should have adequate knowledge on the best ways they can communicate to the customers. This will ensure that customers receive the intended message concerning the product.

Training of sales workforce is essential as it will ensure that the sales team communicates effectively with customers, relate well to customers, and explain to customers about how the devices are used. During the training of the sales staff, it will be essential to train the team on how the wireless headphones are used. This will equip them with ways to answer some questions from the customers regarding the gadget.

We will write a custom Essay on The sales force organization specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The training of the sales team will also encompass sending the team to various markets where they will try to identify the best market to sell the product. The sales team has to be trained on how to convince customers of the need to use wireless headphones, as opposed to the use of wired headphones, which are the ones mainly circulating in the market.

The training of sales workforce ensures that the sales team gains knowledge on how to establish contact with customers. The sales workforce should develop a strong relationship to enable them market the product since the headphones are a new product in the market. The workforce should be trained on how to outdo the competitors in the market. This is because competitors may pose a significant threat to the marketing of the new headphones.

Training needs

Training needs encompass understanding the areas in which the sales team should be trained. While considering training needs, H2pro should identify the skills, knowledge, and abilities that the sales workforce should have in order to meet the requirements of marketing the product.

Through identifying the training needs, the organization will be equipped on how to allocate resources for the purposes of training and marketing of the product. In identifying training needs, H2pro should allocate the sales team resources that will enhance productivity.

Training needs should also identify gaps in knowledge and explore the best ways to fill these gaps. The other essential training need, which should be fulfilled by the sales team, encompasses equipping them with information about the prices of the headphones. This includes both the wholesale and retail price. This will ensure that the product is sold at prices, which customers can afford to purchase.

In order to ensure that the training needs are in line with the requirements of the organization, there should be an assessment of training needs. One of the ways to assess the training needs is through organizational assessment, which will help in determining the abilities, knowledge, and skills needed by H2pro marketing team.

H2pro should institute strategies of eliminating the weaknesses that may negatively influence the sales team. Another training need that H2pro should take into consideration includes assessing the members of the sales team individually. This way, it will be easy to know the capability of the workforce to conduct sales competitively. Assessing the members individually will also ensure that the organization knows weaknesses of sales representative and comes up with ways of dealing with these weaknesses.

Training needs also encompass exploring the ways in which the sales team will market the organization’s product. In the case of H2pro, the sales team should be trained on how to carry out promotions of the headphones. Having knowledge about promotions will enable the workforce to know how they can attract the target market, which includes sportsmen such as swimmers and athletes.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The sales force organization by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The sales workforce should also be taught on how to price the headphones in various markets. Another training need encompasses equipping the sales team with knowledge on how they can identify the potential market for the product. For example, they should know how to penetrate markets such as large cities, which may be holding sporting activities since such places can be promising markets for the product.

Training Methods

There are various methods that H2pro can employ in training their workforce. One of the methods includes hiring a sales coach who can help in pointing out vital sales issues. This method entails training and motivating the sales team.

A sales coach teaches members of the sales team the best methods to improve their sales techniques. The other method that can be used to train the sales staff encompasses teleconference training. Training through teleconferencing will ensure that members of H2pro sales team participate in conferences of sales training, which are taking place worldwide.

Another method that can be employed in training the sales team of H2pro includes role playing. This encompasses allowing some members of the team to assume the role of buyers while others will assume the role of salespersons. This method will enable the members of the sales team to portray their competencies, and how best they can carry out the sales.

The role playing method is also essential since it provides a salesperson the opportunity to learn from his or her colleagues. While using the training methods mentioned, it is essential that the trainer engages the team by asking questions and answering questions from members of the sales team. Participation of each of the members is essential as it enhances the success of the training program.

Training Program Evaluation

The evaluation of a training program is essential; it ensures that the targets set during the training of the sales team have been met. Evaluation of a training program also encompasses assessing whether the sales team has utilized the organization’s resources properly.

Training program evaluation entails tracking the success of the individual sales persons as well as assessing the success of the entire sales team. The effectiveness of the sales training program can be measured by looking at the performance of the organization. For example, if the sales team of H2pro helps the company realize high revenue from the sale of the headphones, then it can be concluded that the training program was a success.

The training program can also be evaluated through assessing the satisfaction of the customers; this is based on the feedback that customers give about the product. The ability of the sales team to meet the training objectives can also be used as a way of evaluating the training program.


The Wine Market in the United States Qualitative Research Essay essay help

Case analysis It is evident that the wine market in the United States is growing tremendously. The same can be evidenced in European countries. The improvement of the wine quality in recent years has proven that the demand for the product is high, especially in the United States. Moreover, the competition for the US market as a strategic and high priced wine market is an indication that the market is growing with time.

Moreover, the resuscitation of the old world wine producers in the European countries is an indication that wine market is yet to saturate. Over the years, the demand of wine has fluctuated as can be evidenced in the case study of the global wine war. Some of the factors that has affected this demand include, price, customer preferences, market distance, chain of distribution and wine quality (Anderson 278).

On the other hand, the supply of the wine has been affected by the following factors; the price of the product, wine producing technology, the price of related products such as beer, the climatic conditions of the wine producing countries and subsidies given to wine producers or grapevine growers. In the following discussions, the above aspects will be outlined in an in-depth manner.

As earlier indicated, the wine market is growing rapidly. An example of such is exemplified in the US wine market. It is asserted that with time a new generation of wine consumers started to prefer wine compared to conventional alcohol consumers in America. From this perspective, it is notable that majority of the Americans are used to liquor and beer (Bartlett 3).

However, with time, majority of the alcohol consumers started to understand the health benefits that are accrued from taking wine. As a matter of fact, American wine producers could not satisfy the domestic market, prompting more wine to be imported from the old world’s wine producers.

Another justification of the expanded market of wine is that some of the old world wine producers had already started to battle for a ready market of wine in America. The competition was largely contributed by price and quality factors. The Europe’s advance on the American market through various tactics is an example of a promising wine market. An example of such is evidenced by the subsidized marketing on wine products.

As a matter of fact, the subsidizing of these products is as a result of a European Union policy on agriculture. On the other hand, the American US producers have taken another role of rebranding the foreign wines as their own. Examples of such wine are the Italian wines; Ecco Domania and the Bella sera wines.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In order to determine the demand of wine in the wine industry, one has to consider the various factors that influence the commodities’ demand. In this case, the wine’s demand has incredibly changed or fluctuated over time. First, the price of the wine in old world wine producers was relatively high.

This is due to the fact that, wine was only associated with class and prestige. The increasing of the price affected the demand of the product and in due time, the demand of wine had reduced in many of the old world wine producing countries. Example of such is evidenced in Chile, Argentina and in Spain.

The entrance of the new world wine producers, namely; US and Australia, saw the reverse of this demand. The two countries ensured that wine was produced with the newest technology and made available at lower prices to many of the wine consumers. Relatively, this increased the demand for wine. America has a lot of alcohol consumers and their preference sometimes depends on the price of the commodity.

In the same context, the consumers’ preferences will determine the demand of the product in question. In case of the American wine consumers, most of them preferred the foreign wines. This was after the domestic wine producers in America started to increase the price of their wines (6). Moreover, some of the wine consumers in America believed in the authenticity of the wine blended in the old world.

This affected the demand of the local American-made wines, prompting for more wine imports into the country. Another reason that affects the demand of wine in America is the price of other alcoholic drinks such as beer and liquor (Bartlett 3). As indicated earlier, majority of the conventional Americans are used to beer and liquor. Beer and liquor can be termed as substitutes to alcohol. Since the prices of the two substitutes are relatively lower than wine, the demand for wine goes down.

However other factors such health benefits make more of the Americans consume wine than other alcoholic drinks. However, a higher demand on wine does not make beer and liquor inferior. The superiority of a commodity depends on the preference of the consumer. Majority of the wine consumers in the US are well endowed people, well educated and internet savvy. According to the case study on the global wine wars, the US wine clientele is also termed as price-sensitive (6).

This exhibits the sophistication of the US wine consumers. This means that they have the ability to buy wine regardless of the price, but with certain considerations; utility. The wine consumers want to buy a product of value and which they consider as quality. This is the reason they prefer low-priced wine from foreign countries, and which they still believe is still of good quality.

We will write a custom Essay on The Wine Market in the United States specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Supply is another major aspect to consider when discussing the wine industry in the US. According to Amerine and Josyln (146), the supply of wine into the US market has been influenced by factors discussed herein. Firstly, the price of the commodity in the US was relatively high considering that the product was under strict regulations (Bartlett 2). On the other hand, most of the old world wine producers had little wine production capacity.

This made the new world wine producers monopolize their market territories making the price of the commodity go high. In most of the European countries, the price of the grapevines was bought relatively low by the merchants and other corporations that were involved in large-scale wine production. The price of essential factors that contribute to production of wine such as land or labor can either reduce or increase the supply of the commodity.

For example, the fragmentation of land in many of the European countries like Germany and UK reduced the supply of wine. In this case, farming of the grapevine was done in small-scale and only few growers supplied the vines. On the other hand, large tracts of land in both Australia and America were used as vineyards. With time, the new technology used in producing wine by the new world made it easier to reduce labor and all costs associated with land and production (4).

Therefore, this reduction of the production costs increased the supply of wine in the expanding of wine market. Thirdly, the government’s action to subsidize farmers who had vineyards and wine making companies ensured that some of the old world wine producers supplied more wine.

Works Cited Amerine, A., Maynard and Josyln, A., Maynard. Table wines: The technology of their production, Volume 2. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 1970. Print.

Anderson, Kym. The world’s wine markets: Globalization at work. Northampton, MA: Edward Elgar Publishing, 2004. Print.

Bartlett, A., Christopher. Global wine war 2009: New world versus old. Harvard Business School Case Study, August 13, 2009. Print.


Impact of Environmental Changes in an Organization Report college essay help: college essay help

Introduction Studies reveal that change is steadfast and unchanging. The organizations that do not keep up with change end up being unstable. However, the long term survivability of such organizations is questioned. Events and situations happen in the business environment and they influence the manner in which businesses operate. They influence the performance of a business both in a constructive or destructive manner (Watkins, 2012).

These events or situations act as the environmental factors that influence the performance of organizations. External and internal situations are the major environmental factors that affect the performance of organizations. The goal of this paper is to discuss the manner in which changes in the business environment affect the performance of organizations. It will focus on changes in economic, cultural, technological and ethical environments.

Discussion Changes in the economic environment

Today, the economic environment acts as the key driver of major organizations in the world. This means that an organization needs to look for ways that can allow it to address the needs of its customers appropriately. The global market provides organizations with opportunities to expand their operations significantly (Watkins, 2012). As a result, it is the duty of managers to ensure that their organization embarks on the production of goods and services that meet the needs of the customers in the global market.

For example, the railway industry in the UK is adopting measures to help it cope with the changing economic forces. Changing lifestyles have made many people to own cars. This situation has made railway companies to adopt measures that will help them compete with road users effectively.

As a result, most railway companies are being privatized so as to ensure that they are properly managed. Moreover, they have been able to provide their customers with incentives that have enticed them to use rail transport. People’s living standards have changed drastically. As a result, most companies are investing funds to improve their infrastructure thereby allowing them to provide their customers with comfortable and reliable means of transport (Kirkup, 2012).

In this perspective therefore, it is evident that the railway industry in the UK is responding to the changes that are taking place in the global business environment. This situation has allowed the industry to address the needs of its customers in an efficient manner. As a result, most people now prefer to use rail transport because of the comfort and convenience it offers.

Changes in the cultural environment

The cultural environment plays an essential role in terms of boosting the productivity of an organization. Therefore, most organizations are responding to the needs of diverse cultural backgrounds in order to build customer loyalty and confidence (Watkins, 2012).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this perspective therefore, most banking institutions are engaging in reforms aimed at responding to the diverse needs of their customers. For example, Barclays has set up banking standards aimed at responding to the needs of its customers.

It has embarked on a legislation policy aimed at responding to the banking needs of its customers that will ensure that its customers are able to increase their returns on investment. In this perspective therefore, it is true that in order for an organization to win the confidence of its customers, it should study the cultural environment to help it understand the needs of its customers in an efficient manner (Stewart, 2012).

Changes in the technological environment

The field of technology is growing at a fast pace. As a result, global organizations are embracing technology to allow them boost their competitiveness and profitability in the market (Watkins, 2012).

For example, the Royal Academy of Engineering recently made a proposition that digital literacy, information technology and computer science should be taught to all people who have attained the age of five. This would make people to change their negative perception about the subject being dull. The goal of this initiative is to inform people that the subject is meant for the 21st century students and that it can make students to be creative and pervasive.

The Royal Academy of Engineering stipulated that digital literacy, information technology and computer science should be taught to children when they start going to school (Cookson , 2012). When children are exposed to technological concepts at an early age, they become innovative and creative. Therefore, when they find employment, they boost the productivity of their organizations significantly.

Changes in the ethical environment

The ethical environment is changing. The ethical environment plays an important role since it increases the customer base of an organization. This means that an organization needs to portray ethical behavior to its customers in order for it to gain their loyalty and confidence.

Therefore, to remain competitive in the global market, most organizations are engaging in green initiatives to help them build a sustainable customer base. For example studies reveal that low-carbon businesses in the UK provide a third of the growth that has been observed in the region. Moreover, approximately 1 million people in the UK have been employed by those organizations that offer green jobs (Harvey, 2012).

We will write a custom Report on Impact of Environmental Changes in an Organization specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The green economy is regarded as the biggest source of growth in the region. However, most businesses in the UK are frustrated since the government is not paying significant attention to the issue of green businesses. For example, Michael Heseltine stipulated that wind energy will provide the energy-deprived regions with affordable supply of energy. Moreover, this initiative is expected to provide the region with opportunities for growth.

There are approximately 10 foreign companies in the UK which are considering investing in wind energy (Harvey, 2012). This is because the issue of green businesses is gaining popularity in most parts of the world. As a result, the businesses that will take advantage of this opportunity today are expected to boost their productivity significantly. Therefore, because of the urge to conserve the environment, most consumers are shifting to green organizations in order to ensure that the environment is not subjected to destruction.

Conclusion From the analysis therefore, it is true that in order for an organization to remain competitive in the market, it should adopt the changes that take place in the business environment today. The factors that influence the manner in which an organization copes with the changes in the environment include the economic environment, cultural environment, technological environment, and ethical environment.

Once an organization pays attention to these factors, it is able to respond to the changes that take place in the business environment in an efficient manner. This way, an organization is able to gain access to new production techniques and customer support skills thereby boosting its competitiveness in the market.

Reference List Cookson , C 2012, Willetts announces new school IT curriculum. Web.

Harvey, F 2012, Green economy is on the rise but remains to be fully exploited. Web.

Kirkup, J 2012, Investment in rail industry. Web.

Stewart, H 2012, Banking sector reform. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Impact of Environmental Changes in an Organization by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Watkins, R 2012, Business Environment, Pearson Custom Publishing, New York.


Antigone Essay (Movie Review) scholarship essay help

Antigone is a 1961 movie directed by Yorgos Javellas and produced by Demetrious Paris. In the movie, Irene Papas plays Antigone, Maro Kodou plays Ismene, and Creon is acted by Manos Katrakis. The movie was released in 1961 and it is based on the famous Greek tragedy. Several months ago, I decided to watch a black-and-white film version, an adaptation of Sophocles’s most famous play called Antigone. The movie was released in Greece and it involves Greek actors, which suits mythological themes recovered in the picture.

The film refers to the times of ancient Greece. King Oedipus invades Thebes and unintentionally kills his farther and marries his mother Jocasta. The King later has four children –two daughters, Ismene and Antigone, and two sons, Polyneices and Eteocles (Antigone).

After Oedipus’s death, Eteocle promises his father to reign with his brother by alternating their power annually. However, when Polyneices ascends the throne, he refuses to give power to his brother and gathers the army to confront Eteocle. However, when both brothers die in a battle, the king Creon decrees that only Eleocles deserves the honorable ritual of burial whereas Polyneices must be left unburied.

When Antigone learns about this, she decides to bury his brother herself. As soon as Creon is informed about Antigone’s decision, the king thinks that burying her alive in a tomb is the only punishment for her horrible deed. However, the heroine hangs herself after she is pushed in a tomb. Haemon, Creon’s son, tries to attack the king, but later he kills himself as soon as he finds Antigone’s body.

The story is based on the famous Greek tragedy Antigone written by Sophocles in 441 BC. The play, in its turn, is an extended version of Theban legend. Despite the fact that the film is based on fictional characters, it is premised on historical context as well. In particular, Antigone dates to the epoch of national rebellion in 441, when imperialist movement was on the rise.

The story also relates to numerous military expeditions of Greek leaders to expand imperial control and power. In the play, Sophocles criticizes anarchy and makes direct references to Athens. In general, the play does not touch on patriotic themes. On the contrary, it refers to analysis of moral themes typical of those times.

The movie was set in Greece and it features Greek landscapes and ancient interiors so that the atmosphere was skillfully rendered by the director. In the movie, several locations have been used, the mountainous setting, the buildings reminding of ancient Greek palaces, and the caves where the main characters were buried.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In such a way, the director has managed to describe the epoch, as well as demonstrate what challenges that main heroes faced. While watching the actor’s clothing and the building interior, it was possible to feel the air of time. Black-and-white version contributed to the entire idea of the picture.

In my opinion, the movie successfully reflects the epoch of imperialism when the Kings expanded new territories and were obsessed with gaining control over new lands. The story also accurately conveys the behavior and habits of ancient time because honor and respect were among the most important qualities that a person should possess. Therefore, the movie is not a patriotic account about achievements and courage of Greek military leaders; it is a story about love, compassion, betrayal, and independence as presented by Sophocles.

Works Cited Antigone. Ex. Prod. Demetrios Paris. Greece: Dinos Katsouridis, 1961. DVD.


The Effects of Slavery on the American Society Research Paper best essay help: best essay help

During the lead up of the American Civil War, national ideological focus changed to what is known as the slavery debate. This shift was particularly important for a nation that prides itself on the principles of liberty and freedom. This debate over whether the ethical issue concerned with slavery exploitation was protected under the Constitution of the United States heavily challenged fundamental doctrines of this free nation.

One shining example is former president Abraham Lincoln and democratic nominee Stephen A. Douglas’ series of unmediated political debates, which illuminated much on the country’s reliance on slave exploitation. Stemming from this invigorated interest, remarkable changes began to blossom into a new era of American literature, cinematography and media coverage.

Distinct writers, such us Richard Wright, used their literary works as a way of redefining discussion of race relations in the United States during the mid 20th century. Indeed, Wrights novel Native Son was the first best selling novel by an African American writer and heavily increased his respect as a novelist.

In his novel, Wright uses his main character, Bigger as an example of the average brute Negro and highlights his relation with white individuals. Bigger’s life is not only contrasted with that of white, but an evident feeling of race superiority can be acclaimed through Bigger’s feelings and actions.

Wright’s chief success in the novel is his ability to warn America that Bigger’s aggressions were provoked by the oppressing racist force society imposed on African Americans. The author urges for change and explains to the white people the reasons behind several savage acts that black individuals such as Bigger committed. The effects of slavery on the American people have also been documented by James Baldwin.

James Baldwin an African American novelist and social critic of the mid 20th century presented Everybody’s Protest Novel: Notes of a Native Son, as a way of criticizing Richard Wright’s Native Son for portraying Bigger as and angry and violent black male.

Although Baldwin tackles issues against race in American and Europe, he believes that “Below the surface of (Wright’s) novel there lies, as it seems to me, a continuation, a complement of that monstrous legend it was written to destroy[1] .”It is evidential that Baldwin disregards Wright’s novel and intends to honestly analyze an African American man’s experience.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Specifically Baldwin condemns Wright by highlighting: “The failure of the protest novel lies in its rejection of life, the human being, the denial of his beauty, dread, power, in its insistence that it is his categorization alone which is real and which cannot be transcended[2].” Clearly, Baldwin’s Notes of a Native Son agrees with other African American authors, specially criticizing Wright’s abuse of naturalism and protest fiction in his novel.

Race intolerance is an extremely delicate topic in the United States. Slavery reinforces social prejudices and the forceful oppression against colored individuals during the mid 20th century.

The enslavement of African Americans in the United States opened wounds that until the date society cannot heal. Slavery has been the root of fear and the cause of violence of black individuals. Undeniably the society in which African Americans lived created an oppressive atmosphere that caused them to find its balance and identity relying on hostile actions.

All efforts to examine slavery through the lens of modernity makes it difficult to comprehend how individual’s supported and sustained an institution for centuries that degraded and dehumanized others for the exploitation of profit3. Slavery was a multidimensional practice that influenced economic thought in its time but also affected the social, cultural, and moral ethos of both its defenders and its destructors.

The slaveholder and the non slaveholder alike were sallied by maintaining a slave based society, and all individuals, whether they lived in the South or North, found their lives and times circumscribed by the necessities inherent in preserving slavery and preserving civil society simultaneously.

The response to this challenge led to the formation of a defensive posture that acknowledged the place of slavery in the natural order of the things and viewed abolitionist challenges to the peculiar institution as errant beliefs that would only produce social discord4.

Slavery played a significant role in the American politics in the nineteenth century. The legacies of slavery such civil rights, segregation and racial discrimination have dominated the current American society4. Slavery was a detrimental human servitude that put to test the very meaning and freedom of the American people. Slavery has had a significant impact on the political climate of the US. A number of experts hold the opinion that the early US was in fact defined by a relative lack of social differentiation3. The absence of class stratification in the American societies is also another outcome of slavery.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Effects of Slavery on the American Society specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The American Revolution is said to have reinforced the scientific, social, and economic sources of racism, a product of slavery. The American Revolution brought together an extended body of political thought within which the existence of slavery[3] could be tolerated only with the greatest difficulty.

Moreover, largely because it was the Revolutionary ideology and rhetoric which had prompted the debate over the nature of blacks and their place in the American society, that debate was concluded substantially within its context. Although religious inspiration and conviction accounted for a large proportion of individual manumissions and helped to promote antislavery, the scriptures themselves were ambiguous4.

They reinforced but rarely determined the course of the argument. If we are fully to appreciate, however, not only the extent but also the limitations in terms of the Revolutionary developments in approaches to slavery and race, then we must look at certain other trends in the American society which made their own contributions to the growth of more rigid patterns of racial prejudice and which lent their support to the view that it was necessary to resist slavery.

It has frequently been pointed out by historians that the very existence of any widespread antislavery sentiment in the Upper South was contingent upon the declining economic fortunes of the Tidewater region. During the last quarter of the eighteenth century, that region began the painful process of a major agricultural adjustment[4].

Until the middle of the eighteenth century the Negro’s place in the American society has been firmly institutionalized: he was a slave. The ideas central to the revolutions subjected the definition[5] to severe strains. Coupled with broad a humanitarian and religious impulses, they brought under fire the institution of slavery and promoted a destruction of the identity of the slave and Negro.

This demanded, especially of the South, a redefinition of society and its values; it demanded a cultural revolution to match the political evolution. The revolutionary debate promoted an articulation of ideas which had previously existed largely on the level of assumption4.

The process of articulation made hardened and rationalized those assumptions and thereby made them more difficult to dislodge. It focused attention on the multiracial nature of the American population and laid bare the anomalous position, which blacks occupied. Blame for the anomaly was almost inevitably heaped upon the hapless blacks themselves.

The outcome of the debate was largely influenced by existing prejudices, but this emerged from it stronger than ever. Articulation and definition gave them an authority and respectability which firmly established them as societal norms. Moreover, there seemed to be no countervailing forces to arrest this development apart from those contained in the dogma of the American creed.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Effects of Slavery on the American Society by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It had become obviously by 1820, however, that the revolutionary of force that creed was inadequate to destroy slavery and the social structure that it endangered3. It had become equally obvious that that the universality of the creed could not stand before the vision of America as a white man’s country.

Nether failure is all that suspiring, of course. Success would have involved a fundamental reordering of American society. But the extent of the failure was considerable. The growing discrimination against blacks has to be set against the active democratization and liberalization of the white society. It is worthy of note, for example, that restriction of black suffrage rights in some Northern states introduced in the very constitutions which were concerned to expand the political privileges of other members of the community.

Furthermore, by 1820, the major lines of Southern antebellum development had been established3. While this development included a similar, but modified, process of political liberalization, it was to include also an ever more active and positive defense of slavery. The 1820s was indeed a crucial decade; but the roots of those developments themselves foreshadowed, the revolutionary and post revolutionary generations.

The revolution flattered to deceive; it promised more than it achieved3. The historian is faced with the sad paradox that the first great onslaught on slavery on America was impelled by egalitarianism and by a belief in universal and natural rights: but it helped to produce a positive racism and explicit denial of those rights4.

The most detrimental impact of slavery on the American society is that it gave birth to racism. Racist doctrine evolved in early colonial America to place humanity into compartmentalized groups based on distinctive, social, and mental traits, which presumably established a ranking founded upon the unilinear evolutionist thinking of the time.

Its practitioners sought to delineate bicultural boundaries, coinciding with innate and heritable mental and moral differences, as justification for a polarization of the races that led to the subsequent exploitation and oppression of the darker races of the world.

The slave system was somewhat color blind until religious, social, legal, and political legitimation within the infrastructure of the Americas became aligned with the racist doctrine fostered by environmentalist thinking of the nineteenth century. Racism has its roots in the legacy of transatlantic slave trade, as it was the trades that created the ideology of white supremacy as a justification or support for the forced migration of millions of Africans to Europe and America4.

Bibliography Baldwin, James. Everybody’s Protest Novel. Paris: Partisan Review, 1949.

Davis, Darién. Slavery and Beyond: The African Impact on Latin America and the Caribbean. Maryland: Rowman


Beowulf Essay (Movie Review) college application essay help: college application essay help

Table of Contents Information

The Plot

The Reality

The Setting


Works Cited

Information The film Beowulf (2007) was directed and produced by Robert Zemeckis. Such Hollywood celebrities as Anthony Hopkins (King Hrothgar), Angelina Jolie (Grendel’s mother) and Ray Winstone (Beowulf) starred in the movie.

Beowulf (2007) is based on the Old English epic of the same title. Notably, the movie is “the full-length motion picture” where actor’s movements rather than their appearance were captured (Jones 18). I watched it on DVD and I was impressed by the technique used. I was also interested in the story itself, of course.

The Plot Beowulf is a warrior who travels the world and fights against the evil. He comes to help King Hrothgar to defeat a monster, Grendel, which devastates his kingdom. The warrior manages to kill the monster, but Grendel’s mother comes and kills almost all Beowulf’s men. Hrothgar tells Beowulf that Grendel’s mother, the Water Demon, lives in a cave and Beowulf sets to kill her only to be seduced by the monster’s mother who takes the form of a beautiful woman.

Beowulf and Grendel’s mother make a deal and the warrior becomes the next king while the Water Demon gives birth to Beowulf’s son. Many years later, when Beowulf is old, the deal between him and Grendel’s mother is broken and Water Demon’s son, a dragon, attacks the kingdom. Beowulf manages to kill the dragon but is wounded and dies soon after.

The Reality As has been mentioned above, the movie is based on the epic. However, it is an interpretation rather than a screening as, though major events are quite close to the text, the characters are very different from the original. First, Beowulf is not a very good example of a conventional warrior of the Middle Ages as he is less masculine and he is half naked throughout most of the film. Grendel is also depicted as a victim rather than hideous monster that is to be destroyed.

Grendel is that bad because people do not like him. People cause great pain to his head, which is the reason why Grendel attacks. In the text, Grendel is the evil monster who needs blood and murders. In the original, there is nothing about Grendel’s father and the dragon’s origins. In the movie these are children of Hrothgar and Beowulf respectively.

The Setting As far as the setting is concerned, it is really specific. On one hand, the landscape is depicted true to life. However, the creators of the film were not that precise when it came to costumes, appearance and customs. Thus, the king is wearing something like a Roman toga instead of clothes worn by Vikings (Jones 20).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The movie reveals certain clichés depicting the court in the Middle Ages as a “site of uncivilized savagery” with “bad table manners and boorishness” (Jones 20). Clothes of Beowulf and his warriors do not correspond to the epoch either.

Evaluation However, irrespective of these differences, I would recommend young people to watch the film. In the first place, this can make them read the text itself. More importantly, the movie represents a contemporary vision of people’s past. It reflects values that reign in the contemporary society.

Of course, the movie has certain artistic value. It is novel in terms of the production as it is a motion picture. It is also properly made. The performance is very good and the story develops at a proper pace. Therefore, the viewer will enjoy the great movie and will be able to think of history and development of the human society.

Works Cited Jones, Chris. “From Heorot to Hollywood: Beowulf in Its Third Millennium.” Anglo-Saxon Culture and the Modern Imagination. Ed. David Clark and Nicholas Perkins. Rochester, NY: Boydell


Columbia’s Last Flight by Langewiesche Essay college admissions essay help

The reading under analysis is called Columbia’s Last Flight and is introduced by Langewiesche. In particular, the story reveals the journalist’ investigation and research on the reasons for the space shuttle disaster happened in February1, 2003.

The author focuses on preliminary construction terms, NASA’s response to the tragedy, further investigations, and alternative methods for averting the tragedy. In addition, the author pays attention to negligent attitude of engineers and operators to risks detected at the preliminary stages of the shuttle launch.

At the very beginning of the article, the journalist outlines the underpinnings for the flight, including the construction terms, as well as the importance and the purpose of the mission. In particular, Langewiesche emphasizes that the space shuttle journey was not of the primary importance, although the construction deadline was under the great pressure.

Further considerations were dedicated to the accident, as well as to the events connected with it. In particular, the author focuses on the lack of awareness and failure of communication between the flight control board and the shuttle which became decisive factor influencing the tragedy.

In the reading, the journalist insists that the shuttle was damaged by the foam block that broke off the fuel tank and struck the shuttle’s left wing. Despite the fact that the damage was noticed, “…the shuttle program managers…had dismissed the incident as essentially unthreatening” (Langewiesche 61). However, ignorance and improper assessment of the situation contributed to further irreversible complications.

Further in the reading, the author refers to the analysis of investigation procedures and NASA’s responses to the tragedy. In fact, NASA’s representatives rejected the idea of foam block damaging the left wing because the latter was made of temperature-proof material that was strong enough to resist even the most powerful hit. As a result, the NASA’s reputation was at stake because further explorations and discoveries justified negligence of the engineers and constructors.

Apart from improper management of the construction process and lack of communication and reporting between the shuttle and the Space Center, there was a significant lapse in risk management. Specifically, Langewiesche discusses the alterative ways that the engineers could have employed during the rescue operation. On the one hand, launching the second shuttle to safe the crew was a risky business because there was a possibility of losing two shuttles.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, a carefully arranged contingency plan can save the lives of seventh people. The latter variant, however, also presupposes significant costs, which did not motivated NASA’s leaders. The journalist notes, “for all their willingness to explore less likely alternatives, many of NASA”s managers were stubbornly closed-minded on the subject of foam” (Langewiesche 73). Once again, the author emphasizes inconsistent approach of the government to the incident.

At the end of the story, Langewiesche confesses that the details of the tragedy are quite sophisticated due to the involvement of technical, moral, and ethical issues. The human factor is also emphasized because all the parties involved in the issue failed to reach a consensus concerning the actual reason for the damage.

Nevertheless, all aspects in total had become lethal for the seven pilots on the board of the cosmic shuttle. The story also provides many lessons to be learnt that relate specifically to the communication and crisis management. Specific attention should also be given to NASA’s reputation and their response to the disaster.

Works Cited Langewiesche, William. “Colambia’s Last Flight: The Inside Story of Investigation and the Catastrophe it Laid Bare”. The Atlantic Monthly, (2003): 58-87. Print.


Relying on Senses: Concerning the Physicalism. Information vs. Experience Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Table of Contents The Knowledge Argument Summary: Concerning the Key Ideas

Lewis’s Main Argument: Reading between the Lines

Against the Knowledge Argument: Joining Lewis’s Ranks

Works Cited

The Knowledge Argument Summary: Concerning the Key Ideas The process of the world cognition must be one of the most complicated ones that occur in a human mind. Indeed, the ability to make a coherent logical transition from experiencing a certain feeling to obtaining information, processing it and memorizing for the further use is what makes the human brain such an amazing organ.

However, some of the stages of the cognition process remain quite obscure despite the fact that the world science has developed considerably, having explained a number of peculiar phenomena, the question whether recognizing a certain object or issue and learning about its key properties can be considered the process of cognition or the process of physical perception is yet to be solved.

To be more exact, physical properties represent all the information that one can possibly obtain about a certain object, which is why the five senses are enough for learning all the essential information.

Lewis’s Main Argument: Reading between the Lines According to Lewis, the five senses of a human being are enough to learn everything that is needed to understand the functions and the properties of a certain object. While Jackson insists that there is more than the tangible image of an object, Lewis still makes it clear that, with the help of the five senses, one can obtain the required information about a certain thing within practically no time.

On the one hand, the argument is solely about the means of cognizing the reality. However, when digging a bit deeper, one will realize that there is more to this argument than meets the eye. Admitting that there are only the tangible parameters of a certain object or thing to recognize, Lewis makes it clear that the process of cognition consists only of obtaining a certain kind of information about the object in question.

On the contrary, Jackson explains that there is more to learning about a certain object than considering its properties; according to Lewis the process of studying an object is a process of cognition and learning, which can be possibly followed by practicing the newly obtained skills.

Against the Knowledge Argument: Joining Lewis’s Ranks It seems that Lewis’ argument is more valid than the one that Jackson presents. While both scholars offer sufficient pieces of evidence to back their ideas up with, there is still a grain of uncertainty about the arguments which Jackson makes. While the latter makes it clear that the process of cognition is a natural stage of experiencing a certain phenomenon, he still misses the fact that the process of recognizing the object’s properties comes first. Hence, the cognition process can be considered a result of the latter.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, the peculiarities of short-term memory must be taken into account. It is clear that a human memory cannot retain all the experiences which one has had over the day; therefore, the experience element in the process of cognition might be insignificant (for instance, in identifying an obstacle on the road).

In the above-mentioned example, the role of the five senses is obvious, while the experience and the conclusion which the experience should lead to are unclear. Hence, one can assume that Lewis’ ideas are closer to the truth than the ones of Jackson.

Works Cited Jackson, Frank. Lewisian Themes: The Philosophy of David K. Lewis. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. 2004. Print.

Lewis, David. “Knowing What It’s Like.” Theories of Mind: An Introductory Reader.

Ed. Maureen Eckert. Lanham, MD: Rowman


Disaster of Columbia shuttle Essay best essay help

In this chapter James Surowiecki describes the events that led to the Columbia shuttle disaster and explains the factors that contributed to this catastrophe. First of all, the author mentions that during the launch of Columbia a large piece of foam was broken off and smashed into the wing of the shuttle.

The thing is that that the members of the Mission Management Team (MMT) knew about this event, but they convinced themselves that it did not pose a significant threat to the crew. More importantly, the findings of the Debris Assessment Team (DAS) were not properly investigated. So, poor decision-making within the NASA led to the death of seven astronauts. In his book, James Surowiecki analyzes organizational factors that can explain unsatisfactory performance of the MMT team.

First of all, people, who took part in this project, were extremely firm in their conviction that there had been no defects with Columbia. This is one of the reasons they rejected the request to take photographs of the shuttle in order to estimate the impact of the foam on the shuttle.

The problem is that they did not know much about the possible quality of these images. This is why they lacked evidence when analyzing the situation and evaluating risks. James Surowiecki believes that it is a form of confirmation bias when people choose to see that they want to see. Moreover, such situations exemplify such a phenomenon as groupthink. It occurs when separate individuals do not want to contradict the opinions of their superiors.

Furthermore, James Surowiecki notes that when the member of the MMT team realized the extent of the threat, they came to the conclusion that nothing could have been done. Yet, after the investigation, it became clear that there could be at least two ways of rescuing the Columbia crew. These examples demonstrate that poor decision-making can have significant implications for people’s lives.

Apart from that, James Surowiecki argues that such organizational behavior can in part be explained by the culture of the NASA. In the past, this organization recruited people who had worked in various industries. It was more likely that they could have different views on the same question or problem.

Yet, nowadays, the employees come to the NASA mostly from graduate schools. Very often they may not be experienced in such discussions. In many cases, the employees may be reluctant to voice their disagreement with those people, who occupy a higher position in the workplace hierarchy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, the writer attempts to explain the reasons why group discussions in organizations may not be very productive. In his opinion, some members of the team can dominate others, while the opinions of more reserved people can be overlooked. James Surowiecki refers to empirical studies demonstrating that teams are more likely to take better decisions than separate individuals, if team members can openly exchange ideas. The task of a leader is to ensure that communication within a group is not hindered in any way.

James Surowiecki emphasizes the necessity of looking at the same question or problem from different angles. More importantly, people should express these different views on during discussions or meetings. Only, in this way, organizations can avoid tragedies like the collapse of Columbia. The issues discussed by the author are relevant to many organizations that consist of many divisions or discussions.